Evc Series Zpv066 Zpv096 User Guide en 3671334

User Guide
Variable Speed Drive

Original Instructions
For the purposes of compliance with the EU Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC:
General information
The manufacturer accepts no liability for any consequences resulting from inappropriate, negligent or incorrect
installation or adjustment of the optional operating parameters of the equipment or from mismatching the variable speed
drive with the motor.
The contents of this guide are believed to be correct at the time of printing. In the interests of a commitment to a policy
of continuous development and improvement, the manufacturer reserves the right to change the specification of the
product or its performance, or the contents of the guide, without notice.
All rights reserved. No parts of this guide may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electrical or
mechanical including photocopying, recording or by an information storage or retrieval system, without permission in
writing from the publisher.
Drive firmware version

This product is supplied with the latest hardware firmware version. If this drive is to be connected to an existing system
or machine, all drive firmware versions should be verified to confirm the same functionality as drives of the same model
already present. This may also apply to drives returned from a Service Centre or Repair Centre. If there is any doubt
please contact the supplier of the product.
The firmware version of the drive can be checked by looking at Pr 11.029. it is also at the bottom of this page.
Drive Software version

This product is supplied with the latest application specific software version. The software version can be verified by
viewing Pr 00.078; it is also at the bottom of this page.
Part Number: 0478-0107-06
Copyright © August 2018

Issue Number: 6
Drive Firmware: 01.13.XX.XX onwards
Drive Software: 01.10 onwards
How to use this guide
This user guide provides complete information for installing and operating the drive from start to finish.
The information is in logical order, taking the reader from receiving the drive through to fine tuning the performance.
NOTE
There are specific safety warnings throughout this guide, located in the relevant sections. In addition, Chapter 1 Safety
information contains general safety information. It is essential that the warnings are observed and the information
considered when working with or designing a system using the drive.
This map of the user guide helps to find the right sections for the task you wish to complete, but for specific information,
refer to Contents on page 4:
1 Safety information
2 Product information
3 Mechanical installation
4 Electrical installation
5 Getting started
Compressor specific
6
functions
7 Running the motor
8 NV media card operation
9 Advanced parameters
10 CT MODBUS RTU
11 Technical data
12 Diagnostics
13 UL listing information
Contents
1 Safety information .................................8 5 Getting started .................................... 66
1.1 Warnings, Cautions and Notes .............................8 5.1 Understanding the display .................................. 66
1.2 Electrical safety - general warning ........................8 5.2 Keypad operation ............................................... 66
1.3 System design and safety of personnel ................8 5.3 Menu structure ................................................... 68
1.4 Environmental limits ..............................................8 5.4 Menu 0 ............................................................... 69
1.5 Access ...................................................................8 5.5 Advanced menus ............................................... 69
1.6 Compliance with regulations .................................8 5.6 Saving parameters ............................................. 70
1.7 Motor .....................................................................8 5.7 Restoring parameter defaults ............................. 70
1.8 Adjusting parameters ............................................8 5.8 Parameter access level and security ................. 70
1.9 Electrical installation ..............................................8 5.9 Displaying parameters with non-default
values only ......................................................... 71
2 Product information ..............................9 5.10 Displaying destination parameters only ............. 71
2.1 Introduction ...........................................................9 5.11 Communications ................................................ 71
2.2 Drive model number ............................................11
2.3 Ratings ................................................................11 6 Compressor specific functions ......... 73
2.4 Operating modes .................................................12 6.1 Menu 0 - compressor specific parameters ......... 73
2.5 Drive features ......................................................12 6.2 Detailed compressor function descriptions ........ 75
2.6 Nameplate description ........................................13 6.3 Compressor protection ....................................... 84
2.7 Options ................................................................14 6.4 System control ................................................... 89
2.8 Items supplied with the drive ...............................16 6.5 Parameter descriptions ...................................... 94
3 Mechanical installation .......................19 7 Running the compressor ................... 96

3.1 Safety information ...............................................19 7.1 Quick start connections ...................................... 96
3.2 Planning the installation ......................................19 7.2 Control mode configurations .............................. 98
3.3 Terminal cover removal .......................................20
3.4 Installing / removing option modules and 8 NV Media Card Operation ................ 106
keypads ...............................................................23 8.1 Introduction ...................................................... 106
3.5 Dimensions and mounting methods ....................25 8.2 NV Media Card support .................................... 106
3.6 Enclosure for standard drives .............................30 8.3 Transferring data .............................................. 107
3.7 Enclosure design and drive ambient 8.4 Data block header information ......................... 108
temperature .........................................................31 8.5 NV Media Card parameters ............................. 108
3.8 Heatsink fan operation ........................................31 8.6 NV Media Card trips ......................................... 109
3.9 Enclosing standard drive for high
environmental protection .....................................32 9 Advanced parameters ...................... 110
3.10 External EMC filter ..............................................34 9.1 Parameter ranges and Variable minimum/
3.11 Electrical terminals ..............................................37 maximums: ....................................................... 111
3.12 Routine maintenance ..........................................39 9.2 Menu 1: Frequency / speed reference ............. 116
9.3 Menu 2: Ramps ................................................ 120
4 Electrical installation ...........................43 9.4 Menu 3: Speed feedback and Speed control ... 124
4.1 Power connections ..............................................43 9.5 Menu 4: Torque and current control ................. 127
4.2 AC supply requirements ......................................45 9.6 Menu 5: Motor control ...................................... 130
4.3 Ratings ................................................................47 9.7 Menu 6: Sequencer and clock .......................... 133
4.4 Output circuit and motor protection .....................49 9.8 Menu 7: Analog I/O .......................................... 135
4.5 Ground leakage ...................................................50 9.9 Menu 8: Digital I/O ........................................... 138
4.6 EMC (Electromagnetic compatibility) ..................50 9.10 Menu 10: Status and trips ................................ 142
4.7 Communications connections .............................57 9.11 Menu 11: General drive set-up ......................... 144
4.8 Control connections ............................................58 9.12 Menus 15, 16 and 17: Option module set-up ... 146
4.9 Drive specific Input/Output and control ...............59 9.13 Menu 22: Additional Menu 0 set-up ................. 147
4.10 Safe Torque Off (STO) ........................................64 9.14 Menu 29: Compressor specific functions ......... 149
4 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
10 MODBUS RTU ....................................169
10.1 Communications connections ...........................169
10.2 MODBUS RTU ..................................................172
10.3 Slave address ...................................................172
10.4 MODBUS registers ...........................................172
10.5 Data encoding ...................................................173
10.6 Function codes ..................................................173
10.7 Exceptions ........................................................176
10.8 CRC ..................................................................176
11 Technical data ...................................177

11.1 Drive technical data ..........................................177
11.2 Optional external EMC filters ............................187
12 Diagnostics ........................................189
12.1 Status modes (Keypad and LED status) ...........189
12.2 Trip indications ..................................................189
12.3 Identifying a trip / trip source .............................190
12.4 Compressor specific diagnostics ......................191
12.5 Trips, Sub-trip numbers ....................................195
12.6 Internal / Hardware trips ....................................211
12.7 Alarm indications ...............................................212
12.8 Status indications ..............................................212
12.9 Displaying the trip history ..................................212
12.10 Behaviour of the drive when tripped .................213
13 UL listing information .......................214

13.1 UL file reference ................................................214
13.2 Option modules, kits and accessories ..............214
13.3 Enclosure ratings ..............................................214
13.4 Mounting ...........................................................214
13.5 Environment ......................................................214
13.6 Electrical installation .........................................214
13.7 External Class 2 supply ....................................214
13.8 Requirement for Transient Surge Suppression .215
Drive User Guide 5

Issue Number: 6
EU Declaration of Conformity
Control Techniques Ltd Moteurs Leroy-Somer
The Gro Usine des Agriers
Newtown Boulevard Marcellin Leroy
Powys CS10015
UK 16915 Angoulême Cedex 9
SY16 3BE France
This declaration is issued under the sole responsibility of the manufacturer. The object of the declaration is in conformity with the relevant Union
harmonization legislation. The declaration applies to the variable speed drive products shown below:
Model Numbers - EVC Compressor Drives

EVC1150B-J1-*14 EVC1185B-K1-*14 EVC1150B-K1-*14 EVC1150B-L1-*14
Where * = 1 or 8.
The model number may be followed by additional characters that do not affect the ratings.
The variable speed drive products listed above have been designed and manufactured in accordance with the following European harmonized
standards:
EN 61800-5-1:2007 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems - Part 5-1: Safety requirements - Electrical, thermal and energy
EN 61800-3: 2004+A1:2012 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems - Part 3: EMC requirements and specific test methods
EN 61000-6-2:2005 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 6-2: Generic standards - Immunity for industrial environments
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 6-4: Generic standards - Emission standard for industrial
EN 61000-6-4: 2007+ A1:2011
environments
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 3-2: Limits for harmonic current emissions (equipment input current
EN 61000-3-2:2014
≤16 A per phase)
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 3-3: Limitation of voltage changes, voltage fluctuations and flicker in
EN 61000-3-3:2013 public, low voltage supply systems, for equipment with rated current ≤16 A per phase and not subject to
conditional connection
EN 61000-3-2:2014 Applicable where input current < 16 A. No limits apply for professional equipment where input power 1 kW.
These products comply with the Restriction of Hazardous Substances Directive (2011/65/EU), the Low Voltage Directive (2014/35/EU) and the
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (2014/30/EU).
G Williams
Vice President, Technology
Date: 22nd February 2016
These electronic drive products are intended to be used with appropriate motors, controllers, electrical protection components and other
equipment to form complete end products or systems. Compliance with safety and EMC regulations depends upon installing and
configuring drives correctly, including using the specified input filters.
The drives must be installed only by professional installers who are familiar with requirements for safety and EMC. Refer to the Product
Documentation. An EMC data sheet is available giving detailed information. The assembler is responsible for ensuring that the end product
or system complies with all the relevant laws in the country where it is to be used.
6 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
EU Declaration of Conformity (including 2006 Machinery Directive)
Control Techniques Ltd Moteurs Leroy-Somer
The Gro Usine des Agriers
Newtown Boulevard Marcellin Leroy
Powys CS10015
UK 16915 Angoulême Cedex 9
SY16 3BE France
This declaration is issued under the sole responsibility of the manufacturer. The object of the declaration is in conformity with the relevant Union
harmonization legislation. The declaration applies to the variable speed drive products shown below:
Model Numbers - EVC Compressor Drives

* = 1 or 8 denoting OEM or Aftermarket drives respectively.
The model number may be followed by additional characters that do not affect the ratings.
This declaration relates to these products when used as a safety component of a machine. Only the Safe Torque Off function may be used
for a safety function of a machine. None of the other functions of the drive may be used to carry out a safety function.
These products fulfil all the relevant provisions of the Machinery Directive (2006/42/EC) and the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (2014/30/
EU).
EC type examination has been carried out by the following notified body:
TUV Rheinland Industrie Service GmbH EC type-examination certificate numbers:

Am Grauen Stein 01/205/5270.01/14 dated 2016-06-10
D-51105 Köln
Germany
Notified body identification number: 0035
The harmonized standards used are shown below:
EN 61800-5-1:2007 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems - Part 5-1: Safety requirements - Electrical, thermal and energy
EN 61800-5-2:2007 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems - Part 5-2: Safety requirements - Functional
EN ISO 13849-1:2008 Safety of Machinery, Safety-related parts of control systems, General principles for design
EN ISO 13849-2:2008 Safety of machinery, Safety-related parts of control systems. Validation
EN 61800-3: 2004+A1:2012 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems - Part 3: EMC requirements and specific test methods
Safety of machinery, Functional safety of safety related electrical, electronic and programmable electronic control
EN 62061:2005
systems
Person authorised to complete the technical file:
P. Knight
Conformity Engineer
Newtown, Powys, UK
DofC authorised by:
G Williams
Vice President, Technology
Date: 9th June 2016
IMPORTANT NOTICE
These electronic drive products are intended to be used with appropriate motors, controllers, electrical protection components and other
equipment to form complete end products or systems. It is the responsibility of the installer to ensure that the design of the complete
machine, including its safety-related control system, is carried out in accordance with the requirements of the Machinery Directive and any
other relevant legislation. The use of a safety-related drive in itself does not ensure the safety of the machine. Compliance with safety and
EMC regulations depends upon installing and configuring drives correctly, including using the specified input filters. The drive must be
installed only by professional installers who are familiar with requirements for safety and EMC. The assembler is responsible for ensuring
that the end product or system complies with all relevant laws in the country where it is to be used. For more information regarding Safe
Torque Off, refer to the Product Documentation.
Drive User Guide 7

Issue Number: 6
Safety Product Mechanical Electrical Getting Compressor Running the NV Media Card Advanced MODBUS Technical UL listing
Diagnostics
information information installation installation started specific functions compressor Operation parameters RTU data information
1 Safety information 1.4 Environmental limits

Instructions in this User Guide regarding transport, storage, installation
1.1 Warnings, Cautions and Notes and use of the drive must be complied with, including the specified
environmental limits. Drives must not be subjected to excessive physical
force.
A Warning contains information which is essential for
avoiding a safety hazard. 1.5 Access
WARNING Drive access must be restricted to authorized personnel only. Safety
regulations which apply at the place of use must be complied with.
A Caution contains information which is necessary for 1.6 Compliance with regulations
avoiding a risk of damage to the product or other equipment. The installer is responsible for complying with all relevant regulations,
CAUTION such as national wiring regulations, accident prevention regulations and
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) regulations. Particular attention
NOTE must be given to the cross-sectional areas of conductors, the selection
A Note contains information which helps to ensure correct operation of of fuses or other protection, and protective ground (earth) connections.
the product. This User Guide contains instruction for achieving compliance with
specific EMC standards.
1.2 Electrical safety - general warning Within the European Union, all machinery in which this product is used
The voltages used in the drive can cause severe electrical shock and/or must comply with the following directives:
burns, and could be lethal. Extreme care is necessary at all times when 2006/42/EC: Safety of machinery.
working with or adjacent to the drive. 2014/30/EU: Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive
Specific warnings are given at the relevant places in this User Guide.
1.7 Motor
1.3 System design and safety of
Each drive has been carefully designed to control a specific compressor
personnel motor. Therefore, motor over-temperature sensing via a thermocouple is
The drive is intended as a component for professional incorporation into not required. Additionally, thermal memory retention is not provided by
complete equipment or a system. If installed incorrectly, the drive may the drive.
present a safety hazard.
The drive uses high voltages and currents, carries a high level of stored 1.8 Adjusting parameters
electrical energy, and is used to control equipment which can cause Some parameters have a profound effect on the operation of the drive.
injury. They must not be altered without careful consideration of the impact on
Close attention is required to the electrical installation and the system the controlled system. Measures must be taken to prevent unwanted
design to avoid hazards either in normal operation or in the event of changes due to error or tampering.
equipment malfunction. System design, installation, commissioning/
start-up and maintenance must be carried out by personnel who have 1.9 Electrical installation
the necessary training and experience. They must read this safety 1.9.1 Electric shock risk
information and this User Guide carefully. The voltages present in the following locations can cause severe electric
The STOP and Safe Torque Off functions of the drive do not isolate shock and may be lethal:
dangerous voltages from the output of the drive or from any external AC supply cables and connections
option unit. The supply must be disconnected by an approved electrical
Output cables and connections
isolation device before gaining access to the electrical connections.
Many internal parts of the drive, and external option units
With the sole exception of the Safe Torque Off function, none of the
drive functions must be used to ensure safety of personnel, i.e. Unless otherwise indicated, control terminals are single insulated and
they must not be used for safety-related functions. must not be touched.
Careful consideration must be given to the functions of the drive which 1.9.2 Stored charge
might result in a hazard, either through their intended behavior or The drive contains capacitors that remain charged to a potentially lethal
through incorrect operation due to a fault. In any application where a voltage after the AC supply has been disconnected. If the drive has been
malfunction of the drive or its control system could lead to or allow energized, the AC supply must be isolated at least ten minutes before
damage, loss or injury, a risk analysis must be carried out, and where work may continue.
necessary, further measures taken to reduce the risk.
The Safe Torque Off function may be used in a safety-related
application. The system designer is responsible for ensuring that the
complete system is safe and designed correctly according to the
relevant safety standards.
8 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
2 Product information
NOTE
For applications using EVC0631E series drives or drives running derivative firmware V1.08 or earlier, please refer to the Issue 3 EVC User Guide.
2.1 Introduction
Variable speed compressor drive
The Drive delivers maximum machine performance with sensorless permanent magnet motor control, for dynamic and efficient machine operation.
Features
• Universal high performance drive for sensorless permanent magnet motors.
• Onboard IEC 61131-3 programmable automation
• 485 serial communications interface
• Single channel Safe Torque Off (STO) input
Optional features
• Select up to three option modules
• NV Media Card for parameter copying and data storage
• Keypad
• EMC filter
• Input line reactor
The drive is designed to control a compressor in one of two modes. The analog / digital control mode is shown in Figure 2-1; the Modbus control
mode is shown in Figure 2-2 on page 10.
Figure 2-1 Analog / digital control mode
OEM controller
Start/Stop and Stator Heating Control 2 x digital input
Speed Reference command (rpm) 0-10 V Analog signal
User Trip, Drive Reset,Defrost control 3 x digital input
Safe Torque Off (STO)
Drive OK Relay
Compressor On 1 x Digital Output
DLT
AI2 Pevaporating
Discharge
AI1 Pcondensing
Temperature
Pe
For Super
Heat Control
Condenser Pressure (Pc)
Motor
Condenser Power
Expansion
Valve
Compressor
Evaporator
Evaporator Pressure (Pe)
Drive User Guide 9

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Figure 2-2 Modbus control mode
OEM controller
Reset
Start / Stop and Stator heating control
Stator heat
Defrost control
OEM trip
Speed reference command (rpm)
Drive condition (alerts / trips / lockouts)
Pc and Pe
Discharge Line Temperature
Safe Torque Off (STO)
Discharge
Temperature
Pe Pc
Condenser Pressure (Pc)
Motor
Condenser Power
Expansion
Valve
Compressor
Evaporator
Evaporator Pressure (Pe)
The dedicated drive compressor related functionality includes:
• Soft start
The initial start of the compressor, where the motor is accelerated to a predetermined dwell speed.
• Locked rotor
During a mechanical failure of compressor or associated system, a condition can occur where the motor cannot turn even with maximum current, this
is the locked rotor condition. It is detected by the software during soft start if the estimating motor speed is below 20% of the soft-start dwell speed.
• Motor phase loss detection
The drive will detect and trip if a phase connection to the motor is missing during soft-starting. After 5 minutes the trip is automatically reset and the
soft-start can begin once more. The system will lockout after 10 trips within a 24 hour period. The count of trips is reset on lockout.
• Envelope control
The compressor has a speed envelope in which normal operation takes place. Envelope control is used to keep the compressor operating within this
envelope. The software function receives both the condenser and evaporator pressures and limits the speed reference to keep the compressor
operating within its envelope. If operation outside the outer envelope is detected, a trip will occur to protect the compressor.
• Resonance avoidance
This is to avoid running at speeds where mechanical resonance effects are identified.
• Defrost cycle
During this mode of operation the compressor motor is changed to a defined speed for a period of time. This is to raise the temperature of the
evaporator and defrost it.
• Oil boost
If the compressor is running at a speed that is insufficient to guarantee lubrication (for a defined time) oil boost mode is entered. During oil boost the
motor speed is increased for a period of time to ensure the compressor is correctly lubricated.
• Lost rotor trip prevent
The drive automatically reduces the compressor speed under conditions where the speed error is greater than expected to avoid nuisance trips.
10 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
• Controlled shutdown
A controlled shutdown avoids compressor issues that would be caused by simply turning off the power. During a controlled shutdown, the motor
decelerates to a defined speed for a dwell time and then slows to zero speed at a controlled rate.
• Anti short cycling
Excessive short duration cycles can cause damage to the compressor and system. The short-cycle prevention scheme detects if there have been too
many short-cycles. It will alert the user and impose a restart lockout time to prevent further short-cycles.
• Discharge Line Temperature
The drive monitors the level of the discharge line temperature sensor and trips if it is outside of the permitted range.
• Stator Heating
This function feeds DC current through the motor stator windings in order to heat the compressor while the compressor is not spinning.
• Field-bus communications watchdog timer
This function may be used to protect the system from a long term loss of field-bus communications.
• Alert log
The last 20 alerts occurring within the last 7 days are logged for diagnostic purposes.
2.2 Drive model number

The way in which the model numbers for the drives range are formed is illustrated below:
Figure 2-3 Drive model number
EVC 1 185 B K 1 XXX
Model name
* 150 = 15.0 kW, 185 = 18.5 kW.
Generation ** B = Modbus RTU
*** J = 240 V, K = 380 V to 480 V, L = 575 V
Power *
**** Indicates a change in either motor or drive
Communications**
Voltage***
Power output code****
Product variation
The continuous current ratings given are for maximum 40 C (104 F), 1000 m altitude and 3.0 kHz switching. Derating is required for higher switching
frequencies, ambient temperature >40 C (104 F) and high altitude. For further information, refer to Chapter 11 Technical data on page 177.
2.3 Ratings
Table 2-1 Compressor / Drive cross reference
Compressor input
Compressor model Drive model Typical voltage
power
ZPV0631E-5E9 EVC1150B-J1-*14 200 V to 240 V 15 kW
ZPV0631E-4E9 EVC1185B-K1-*14 380 V to 480 V 18.5 kW
ZPV0631E-4E9 EVC1150B-K1-*14 380 V to 480 V
15 kW
ZPV0631E-4E9 EVC1150B-L1-*14 500 V to 575 V
ZPV0662E-5E9 EVC1150B-J1-*24 200 V to 240 V
ZPV0662E-4E9 EVC1150B-K2-*24 380 V to 480 V
15 kW
ZPV0662E-7E9 EVC1150B-K1-*24 380 V to 480 V
ZPV0662E-7E9 EVC1150B-L1-*24 500 V to 575 V
ZPV0962E-5E9 EVC1185B-J1-*24 200 V to 240 V
ZPV0962E-4E9 EVC1185B-K2-*24 380 V to 480 V
18.5 kW
ZPV0962E-7E9 EVC1185B-K1-*24 380 V to 480 V
ZPV0962E-7E9 EVC1185B-L1-*24 500 V to 575 V
Where: * = 1 or 8 denoting OEM or Aftermarket drives respectively.
Drive User Guide 11

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Table 2-2 Drive ratings - ZPV0631E Compressors

Maximum permissible continuous output current
Nominal rating
Drive model Drive frame size Input voltage (A) for the following ambient temperatures
kW (40°C) (60°C)
EVC1150B-J1-*14 6 200 V to 240 V  10 % 15 58 58
EVC1185B-K1-*14 6 380 V to 480 V  10 % 18.5 38 38
EVC1150B-K1-*14 5 380 V to 480 V  10 % 15 31 26
EVC1150B-L1-*14 6 500 V to 575 V  10 % 15 27 27

Nominal rating
kW (40°C) (60°C)
EVC1150B-J1-*24 6 200 V to 240 V  10 % 58 58
EVC1150B-K2-*24 5 380 V to 480 V  10 % 31 26
15
EVC1150B-K1-*24 5 380 V to 480 V  10 % 31 26
EVC1150B-L1-*24 6 500 V to 575 V  10 % 27 27

Nominal rating
kW (40°C) (60°C)
EVC1185B-J1-*24 7 200 V to 240 V  10 % 75 75
EVC1185B-K2-*24 6 380 V to 480 V  10 % 48 46
18.5
EVC1185B-K1-*24 6 380 V to 480 V  10 % 38 38
EVC1185B-L1-*24 6 500 V to 575 V  10 % 34 34
2.4 Operating modes

The drive is designed to operate in RFC - S (Sensorless) mode. RFC-S mode provides closed-loop control without the need for position feedback by
using current, voltage, or key motor parameters to estimate the motor speed.
2.5 Drive features

Figure 2-4 Features of the drive - Control (all sizes)
11 3
1. Keypad connection 6. Option module slot 2
2. Rating label 7. Option module slot 3
10 4 3. Identification label 8. Relay connections
4. Status LED 9. Control connections
5
5. Option module slot 1
6
9
8
12 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Figure 2-5 Features of the drive - Power (frame sizes 5 to 7)
2
3 1
53
2
1 2 3 1
4
3
13
1 4
Key
1. Motor connections 2. AC supply connections 3. Ground connections 4. External 24 V (terminals 51 & 52)
2.6 Nameplate description

See Figure 2-4 for location of rating labels.
Figure 2-6 Typical drive rating labels
Model name Power Voltage Power output code
Refer to
User Guide EVC 1 185 B K 1 XXX
Product variation
Generation Communications
Key to approvals
Power Input Customer and
rating frequency
Input date code
voltage CE approval Europe
No.of phases &
Typical input current RCM - Regulatory
Australia
Output Compliance Mark
voltage
Rated output USA &
UL / cUL approval
current
R
Canada
Approvals RoHS compliant Europe
USA &
Serial Functional safety
Canada
number
Refer to Figure 2-3 Drive model number on page 11 for further information relating to the labels.
Drive User Guide 13

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
2.7 Options
Figure 2-7 Options available with the drive
6
8
1. Keypad
5. USB to 485 Comms cable
6. KI-485 Adaptor
7. Remote mountable LCD Keypad
8. SMARTCARD
14 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
All standard option modules are color-coded in order to make identification easy. All modules have an identification label on top of the module.
Standard option modules can be installed to any of the available option slots on the drive. The following tables shows the color-code key and gives
further details on their function.
Table 2-5 Option module identification
Option
Type Color Name Further Details
module
EIA-485 Comms Adaptor
EIA-485 Comms adaptor provides EIA-485 communication interface. This
Light grey KI-485 Adaptor adaptor supports node addresses between 1 through 16, but the baud rate
and serial mode on this adaptor are fixed at '115 k' and '8 1 NP M'
Fieldbus respectively.
External Ethernet module that supports EtherNet/IP, Modbus TCP/IP and
RTMoE. The module can be used to provide high speed drive access, global
Beige SI-Ethernet
connectivity and integration with IT network technologies, such as wireless
networking
Extended I/O
Increases the I/O capability by adding the following combinations:
• Digital I/O
Automation
Orange SI-I/O • Digital Inputs
(I/O expansion)
• Analog Inputs (differential or single ended)
• Analog Output
• Relays
Key:
KI = Keypad Interface.
SI = Systems Integration.
Table 2-6 Keypad identification
Type Keypad Name Further Details
LCD keypad option

KI-Keypad
Keypad with a LCD display
Keypad LCD keypad option

KI-Keypad RTC
Keypad with a LCD display and real time clock
LCD Remote keypad option

Remote Keypad
Remote mountable Keypad with a LCD display
Drive User Guide 15

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
2.8 Items supplied with the drive

The drive is supplied with a safety information booklet, the Certificate of Quality and an accessory kit box including the items shown in Table 2-7.
Table 2-7 Parts supplied with the drive
Description Size 5 Size 6 Size 7
Control connectors
(Terminals 1-11 & 21-31)
x1 x1
Relay connector
(Terminals 41 & 42)
x1
External 24 V power supply

connector
(Terminals 51 & 52)
x1
Grounding bracket
x1
Surface mounting brackets

x2 x2 x2
Grounding clamp
x1 x1
Terminal nuts
M6 x 11
Supply and motor connector

(U, V & W and L1, L2 & L3)
x1 x1
Finger guard grommets
x3 x2
16 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
2.8.1 Quick reference / Ordering part number list

Table 2-8 Part number quick reference
Drives Where used
EVC1150B-J1-114 (OEM drive) Used with ZPV0631E-5E6 compressor; 200 to 240 Vac
EVC1185B-K1-114 (OEM drive) Used with ZPV0631E-4E6 compressor; 380 to 400 Vac
EVC1150B-L1-114 (OEM drive) Used with ZPV0631E-4E6 compressor; 500 to 575 Vac
EVC1150B-J1-814 (Aftermarket) Used with ZPV0631E-5E6 compressor; 200 to 240 Vac
EVC1185B-K1-814 (Aftermarket) Used with ZPV0631E-4E6 compressor; 380 to 400 Vac
EVC1150B-L1-814 (Aftermarket) Used with ZPV0631E-4E6 compressor; 500 to 575 Vac
Table 2-9 Through panel mounting kits

Part number Where used
527-0258-01 Used with frame size 5 drives
Table 2-10 Fans

TBC** Used with frame size 5 drives (heatsink)
TBC** Used with frame size 6 drives (heatsink or auxiliary)
TBC** Used with frame size 7 drives (heatsink)
TBC** Used with frame size 7 drives (auxiliary)
Table 2-11 Grommet kits

TBC** Used with frame size 7 drives
Table 2-12 EMC filters

TBC** Used with EVC1150B-J1-*14, EVC1150B-J1-*24 drives
TBC** Used with EVC1185B-K1-*14, EVC1150B-K1-*14, EVC1150B-K1-*24; EVC1150B-K2-*24 drives
TBC** Used with EVC1150B-L1-*14, EVC1150B-L1-*24; EVC1185B-L1-*24 drives
TBC** Used with EVC1185B-J1-*24 drives
TBC** Used with EVC1185B-K1-*24; EVC1185B-K2-*24 drives
** Part numbers were not available at time of printing. Please contact your Emerson Climate Technologies application engineer when ordering parts.
Refer to section 11.2 Optional external EMC filters on page 187 for additional information.
Drive User Guide 17

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Table 2-13 Line reactors 2 %

TBC** Used with EVC1150B-J1-*14, EVC1150B-J1-*24 drives
TBC** Used with EVC1185B-K1-*14, EVC1185B-K1-*24, EVC1185B-K2-*24 drives
TBC** Used with EVC1150B-K1-*14 drives
TBC** Used with EVC1150B-L1-*14, EVC1150B-L1-*24 drives
TBC** Used with EVC1150B-K1-*24, EVC1150B-K2-*24 drives
TBC** Used with EVC1185B-J1-*24 drives
TBC** Used with EVC1185B-L1-*24 drives
Refer to Table 11-11 2 % Line reactors on page 180 for further information.
Table 2-14 Line reactors for EN 61000-3-12

Used with EVC1185B-K1-*14, EVC1150B-K1-*14, EVC1150B-K1-*24, EVC1185B-K1-*24,
TBC**
EVC1185B-K2-*24 drives
TBC** Used with EVC1150B-K2-*24 drives
Not required All other drives
Refer to Table 11-12 Line reactors for compliance with EN 61000-3-12 on page 181 for further information.
Table 2-15 Accessories

TBC** USB to 485 Comms cable
TBC** EIA232 (serial) to 485 Comms cable
Table 2-16 Memory cards

TBC** SD Card Adaptor (memory card not included)
TBC** 8 kB SMARTCARD
TBC** 64 kB SMARTCARD
18 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
3 Mechanical installation 3.2.3 Cooling

The heat produced by the drive must be removed without its specified
This chapter describes how to use all mechanical details to install the operating temperature being exceeded. Note that a sealed enclosure
drive. The drive is intended to be installed in an enclosure. Key features gives much reduced cooling compared with a ventilated one, and may
of this chapter include: need to be larger and/or use internal air circulating fans.
• Through-hole mounting For further information, refer to section 3.6 Enclosure for standard
• High IP as standard or through-panel mounting drives on page 30.
• Enclosure sizing and layout 3.2.4 Electrical safety
• Option module installing The installation must be safe under normal and fault conditions.
• Terminal location and torque settings Electrical installation instructions are given in Chapter 4 Electrical
installation on page 43.
3.1 Safety information
3.2.5 Electromagnetic compatibility
Follow the instructions Variable speed drives are powerful electronic circuits which can cause
The mechanical and electrical installation instructions must electromagnetic interference if not installed correctly with careful
be adhered to. Any questions or doubt should be referred to attention to the layout of the wiring.
the supplier of the equipment. It is the responsibility of the
Some simple routine precautions can prevent disturbance to typical
WARNING owner or user to ensure that the installation of the drive and
industrial control equipment.
any external option unit, and the way in which they are
operated and maintained, comply with the requirements of If it is necessary to meet strict emission limits, or if it is known that
the Health and Safety at Work Act in the United Kingdom or electromagnetically sensitive equipment is located nearby, then full
applicable legislation and regulations and codes of practice in precautions must be observed. Built into the drive, is an internal EMC
the country in which the equipment is used. filter, which reduces emissions under certain conditions. If these
conditions are exceeded, then the use of an external EMC filter may be
Competence of the installer required at the drive inputs, which must be located very close to the
The drive must be installed by professional assemblers who drives. Space must be made available for the filters and allowance made
are familiar with the requirements for safety and EMC. The for carefully segregated wiring. Both levels of precautions are covered in
assembler is responsible for ensuring that the end product or section 4.6 EMC (Electromagnetic compatibility) on page 50.
WARNING system complies with all the relevant laws in the country
3.2.6 Hazardous areas
where it is to be used.
The drive must not be located in a classified hazardous area unless it is
Enclosure installed in an approved enclosure and the installation is certified.
The drive is intended to be mounted in an enclosure which
prevents access except by trained and authorized
personnel, and which prevents the ingress of contamination.
WARNING
It is designed for use in an environment classified as
pollution degree 2 in accordance with IEC 60664-1. This
means that only dry, non-conducting contamination is
acceptable.
3.2 Planning the installation

The following considerations must be made when planning the installation:
3.2.1 Access
Access must be restricted to authorized personnel only. Safety
regulations which apply at the place of use must be complied with.
The IP (Ingress Protection) rating of the drive is installation dependent.
For further information, refer to section 3.9 Enclosing standard drive for
high environmental protection on page 32.
3.2.2 Environmental protection
The drive must be protected from:
• Moisture, including dripping water or spraying water and
condensation. An anti-condensation heater may be required, which
must be switched off when the drive is running.
• Contamination with electrically conductive material
• Contamination with any form of dust which may restrict the fan, or
impair airflow over various components
• Temperature beyond the specified operating and storage ranges
• Corrosive gasses
NOTE
During installation it is recommended that the vents on the drive are
covered to prevent debris (e.g. wire off-cuts) from entering the drive.
Drive User Guide 19

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
3.3 Terminal cover removal
Isolation device
The AC and / or DC power supply must be disconnected from the drive using an approved isolation device before any cover is removed
from the drive or before any servicing work is performed.
WARNING
Stored charge
The drive contains capacitors that remain charged to a potentially lethal voltage after the AC and / or DC power supply has been
disconnected. If the drive has been energized, the power supply must be isolated at least ten minutes before work may continue.
Normally, the capacitors are discharged by an internal resistor. Under certain, unusual fault conditions, it is possible that the capacitors may
WARNING
fail to discharge, or be prevented from being discharged by a voltage applied to the output terminals. If the drive has failed in a manner that
causes the display to go blank immediately, it is possible the capacitors will not be discharged. In this case, consult Emerson Climate
Technologies.
3.3.1 Removing the terminal covers

Figure 3-1 Location and identification of terminal covers (frame sizes 5 to 7)
AC / DC
DC terminal terminal cover
DC terminal DC terminal cover
cover left cover right
5 6
7
Control
terminal cover AC / Motor Control terminal
AC / Motor terminal cover cover
terminal cover
Motor Control terminal

terminal cover cover
20 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Figure 3-2 Removing the size 5 terminal covers
1. Control terminal cover

2. DC terminal cover right
On size 5 drives, the Control terminal cover must be removed before removal of the DC terminal cover right. When replacing the terminal covers, the
screws should be tightened to a maximum torque of 1 N m (0.7 lb ft).

When replacing the terminal covers, the screws should be tightened to a maximum torque of 1 N m (0.7 lb ft).
Drive User Guide 21

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics

When replacing the terminal covers, the screws should be tightened to a maximum torque of 1 N m (0.7 lb ft).
3.3.2 Removing the finger-guard and DC terminal Place finger-guard on a flat solid surface and hit relevant break-outs with
cover break-outs hammer as shown (1). Continue until all required break-outs are
Figure 3-5 Removing the finger-guard break-outs removed (2). Remove any flash / sharp edges once the break-outs are
removed.
Grommet kits are available for size 7 finger guards.
Table 3-1 Grommet kits
Drive size Part number Picture
Size 7 - Kit of 8 x single entry

TBC*
grommets
* Part numbers were not available at time of printing. Please contact

your Emerson Climate Technologies application engineer when ordering
parts.
A: All sizes. B: Size 5 only. C: Size 6 only. D: Size 7 only
22 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
3.4 Installing / removing option modules and keypads
Power down the drive before installing / removing the option module. Failure to do will result in 'HF' trips and may even result in damage
to the product.
CAUTION
Figure 3-6 Installation of a standard option module
Installing the first option module

NOTE
Option module slots must be used in the following order: slot 3, slot 2 and slot 1 (refer to Figure 2-4 Features of the drive - Control (all sizes) on
page 12 for slot numbers).
• Move the option module in direction shown (1).
• Align and insert the option module tab in to the slot provided (2), this is highlighted in the detailed view (A).
• Press down on the option module until it clicks into place.
Installing the second option module
• Move the option module in direction shown (3).
• Align and insert the option module tab in to the slot provided on the already installed option module (4), this is highlighted in the detailed view (B).
• Press down on the option module until it clicks into place. Image (5) shows two option modules fully installed.
Installing the third option module
• Repeat the above process.
The drive has the facility for all three option module slots to be used at the same time, image (6) shows the three option modules installed.
Drive User Guide 23

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Figure 3-7 Removal of an option module
• Press down on the tab (1) to release the option module from the drive housing, the tab is highlighted in the detailed view (A).
• Tilt the option module towards you as shown (2).
• Totally remove the option module in direction shown (3).
Figure 3-8 Installation and removal of the KI-Keypad
To install, align the keypad and press gently in the direction shown until it clicks into position.
To remove, reverse the installation instructions.
NOTE N
The keypad is hot swappable and can be installed / removed while the drive is powered up.
24 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
3.5 Dimensions and mounting methods

The drive can be either surface or through-panel mounted using the appropriate brackets. The following drawings show the dimensions of the drive
and mounting holes for each method to allow a back plate to be prepared.
If the drive has been used at high load levels for a period of time, the heatsink can reach temperatures in excess of 70 °C (158 °F). Human
contact with the heatsink should be prevented.
WARNING
Many of the drives in this product range weigh in excess of 15 kg (33 lb). Use appropriate safeguards when lifting these models.
A full list of drive weights can be found in section 11.1.20 Weights on page 183.
WARNING
3.5.1 Surface mounting

Figure 3-9 Surface mounting the size 5 drive
202 mm (7.95 in) 9 mm 8 mm

143 mm (5.63 in) (0.35 in) 106 mm (4.17 in) (0.32 in)
365 mm (14.37 in)
391 mm (15.39 in)
375 mm (14.76 in)
Æ 7.0 mm (0.28 in)
NOTE
The outer holes in the mounting bracket are to be used for surface mounting. See Table 3-2 for further information.
Drive User Guide 25

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
7.0 mm 196.0 mm
227 mm (8.94 in) (7.72 in)
(0.28 in)
6.0 mm
(0.24 in)
376 mm
389 mm 365 mm (14.80 in)
(15.32 in) 14.37 in
Æ7.0 mm
210 mm (8.27 in) (0.27 in)
NOTE
The outer holes in the mounting bracket are to be used for surface mounting. See Table 3-2 for further information.
25 mm
(0.98 in)
220 mm (8.66 in)
9.5 mm
(0.39 in)
270 mm (10.63 in) 280 mm (11.02 in)
508 mm (20.0 in)
538 mm (21.18)
557 mm (21.93 in)
Æ 9mm (0.35 in)
26 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
3.5.2 Through-panel mounting

The Through-panel mounting kit is not supplied with the drive and can be purchased separately, below are the relevant part numbers:
Size Part number

5 TBC*
6 TBC*
7 TBC*
* Part numbers were not available at time of printing. Please contact your Emerson Climate Technologies application engineer when ordering parts.
Figure 3-12 Through panel mounting the size 5 drive

67 mm (2.64 in) 157 mm (6.18 in)
135 mm (5.32 in) 17 mm

143 mm (5.63 in) 106 mm (4.17 in)
(0.66 in)
53 mm (2.1 in) 53 mm (2.1 in)
167 mm (6.58 in)

169 mm (6.65 in)
78.5 mm (3.09 in) 78.5 mm (3.09 in)
359 mm (14.13 in)

365 mm (14.37 in)
409 mm (16.10 in)
393 mm (15.47 in)

26 mm 26 mm
(1.02 in) (1.02 in)
Æ5.0 mm (0.20 in)

(x 4 holes)
78
68 mm (2.67 in) 68 mm (2.67 in)
Radius 1.0 mm
(0.04 in) Æ6.5 mm (0.3 in)
137 mm (5.47 in) (x 4 holes)
NOTE
Ensure that the supplied rubber bungs and the gasket are installed if a higher level of ingress protection is required. Refer to section 3.9 Enclosing
standard drive for high environmental protection on page 32 for High IP installation.
Drive User Guide 27

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
227 mm (8.94)
196 mm (7.72 in)
96 mm (3.78 in) 98 mm (3.86 in) 98 mm (3.86 in) Ø7.0 mm (0.276 in)
131 mm (5.16 in)
210 mm (8.27 in)
21 mm (0.83 in)
120 mm (4.73 in)
264 mm (10.39 in)
167 mm (6.58 in)

399 mm (15.71)
356 mm (14.02 in)
26 mm (1.02 in)
365 mm (14.37 in)
412 mm (16.22 in)
26 mm (1.02 in)
(1.02 in)
26 mm
Æ 5.0 mm
(0.20 in)
Radius 1.0 mm
(0.04 in)
101 mm (3.98 in) 101 mm (3.98 in)
202 mm (7.95 in)
NOTE
The outer holes plus the hole located in the center of the bracket are to be used for through panel mounting. Ensure that the supplied gasket is
installed if a higher level of ingress protection is required. Refer to section 3.9 Enclosing standard drive for high environmental protection on page 32
for High IP installation.
330 mm (12.99 in)

92 mm (3.62 in) 310 mm (12.20 in)
270 mm (10.63 in)
252 mm (9.92 in)
187 mm (7.36 in)
245 mm (9.65 in) 220 mm (8.66 in)
252 mm (9.92 in)

278 mm (10.95 in)
538 mm (21.18 in)
488 mm (19.21 in)

508 mm (20.0 in)
Æ 9mm (0.35 in)
NOTE
Ensure that the supplied gasket is installed if a higher level of ingress protection is required. Refer to section 3.9 Enclosing standard drive for high
environmental protection on page 32 for High IP installation.
28 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Table 3-2 Mounting brackets

Frame size Surface Qty Through-panel Qty
x2
5 x2 Hole size: 5.2 mm (0.21 in)
x2
Hole size: 6.5 mm (0.26 in) Hole size: 6.5 mm (0.26 in)
x3
6 x2 Hole size: 5.2 mm (0.21 in)
x2
Hole size: 6.5 mm (0.26 in) Hole size: 6.5 mm (0.26 in)
x2
Hole size: 9 mm (0.35 in)

7 x2
x2
Hole size: 9 mm (0.35 in) Hole size: 9 mm (0.35 in)
Drive User Guide 29

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
3.6 Enclosure for standard drives 3.6.2 Enclosure sizing

1. Add the dissipation figures from section 11.1.2 Power dissipation on
3.6.1 Enclosure layout page 179 for each drive that is to be installed in the enclosure.
Please observe the clearances in the diagram below taking into account 2. If an external EMC filter is to be used with each drive, add the
any appropriate notes for other devices / auxiliary equipment when dissipation figures from section 11.2.1 EMC filter ratings on
planning the installation. page 188 for each external EMC filter that is to be installed in the
Figure 3-15 Enclosure layout enclosure.
3. Calculate the total heat dissipation (in Watts) of any other equipment
Enclosure
to be installed in the enclosure.
³100mm
(4in) 4. Add the heat dissipation figures obtained above. This gives a figure
AC supply
contactor and
in Watts for the total heat that will be dissipated inside the enclosure.
fuses or MCB Calculating the size of a sealed enclosure
The enclosure transfers internally generated heat into the surrounding
Locate as air by natural convection (or external forced air flow); the greater the
required surface area of the enclosure walls, the better is the dissipation
capability. Only the surfaces of the enclosure that are unobstructed (not
Ensure minimum clearances in contact with a wall or floor) can dissipate heat.
are maintained for the drive
B B
and external EMC filter. Forced Calculate the minimum required unobstructed surface area Ae for the
or convection air-flow must not
be restricted by any object or
enclosure from:
cabling
P
A e = -----------------------------------
k  Tint – T ext 
The external EMC filter can be Where:
bookcase mounted (next to the
drive) or footprint mounted (with Ae Unobstructed surface area in m2 (1 m2 = 10.9 ft2)
the drive mounted onto the filter).
T
ext Maximum expected temperature in oC outside the
³100 mm enclosure
(4 in)
External Tint Maximum permissible temperature in oC inside the
controller
enclosure
P Power in Watts dissipated by all heat sources in the
enclosure
k Heat transmission coefficient of the enclosure material
Signal cables
Plan for all signal cables
in W/m2/oC
to be routed at least Example
300 mm (12 in) from the To calculate the size of an enclosure for the following:
drive and any power cable
• Two drives operating at the Normal Duty rating
• External EMC filter for each drive
• Maximum ambient temperature inside the enclosure: 40 C
• Maximum ambient temperature outside the enclosure: 30 C
For example, if the power dissipation from each drive is 187 W and the
Compressor
power dissipation from each external EMC filter is 9.2 W.
Total dissipation: 2 x (187 + 9.2) =392.4 W
Optional ground NOTE

connection Power dissipation for the drives and the external EMC filters can be
NOTE
obtained from Chapter 11 Technical data on page 177.
For EMC compliance: The enclosure is to be made from painted 2 mm (0.079 in) sheet steel
1. When using an external EMC filter, one filter is required for each drive. having a heat transmission coefficient of 5.5 W/m2/oC. Only the top,
2. Power cabling must be at least 100 mm (4 in) from the drive in all directions front, and two sides of the enclosure are free to dissipate heat.
Table 3-3 Spacing required between drive / enclosure and drive / The value of 5.5 W/m2/ºC can generally be used with a sheet steel
EMC filter enclosure (exact values can be obtained by the supplier of the material).
If in any doubt, allow for a greater margin in the temperature rise.
Drive Size Spacing (B)
5
6 30 mm (1.18 in)
7
NOTE
Drive size 5 can be tile mounted where limited mounting space is
available. The tile mounting kit is not supplied with the drive, it can be
purchased separately.
30 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Figure 3-16 Enclosure having front, sides and top panels free to Example
dissipate heat To calculate the size of an enclosure for the following:
• Three drives operating at the Normal Duty rating
• External EMC filter for each drive
• Maximum ambient temperature inside the enclosure: 40 C
• Maximum ambient temperature outside the enclosure: 30 C
H
For example, dissipation of each drive: 101 W and dissipation of each
external EMC filter: 6.9 W (max).
Total dissipation: 3 x (101 + 6.9) = 323.7 W
Insert the following values:
Tint 40 C
D Text 30 C
W k 1.3
P 323.7 W
Insert the following values: Then:
Tint 40 C
3  1.3  323.7
Text 30 C V = ---------------------------------------
40 – 30
k 5.5
P 392.4 W = 126.2 m3/hr (74.5 ft3 /min) (1 m3/ hr = 0.59 ft3/min)
The minimum required heat conducting area is then:
392.4
3.7 Enclosure design and drive ambient
A e = ---------------------------------
5.5  40 – 30  temperature
= 7.135 m2 (77.8 ft2) (1 m2 = 10.9 ft2) Drive derating is required for operation in high ambient temperatures
Estimate two of the enclosure dimensions - the height (H) and depth (D), Totally enclosing or through panel mounting the drive in either a sealed
for instance. Calculate the width (W) from: cabinet (no airflow) or in a well ventilated cabinet makes a significant
difference on drive cooling.
A e – 2HD
W = -------------------------- The chosen method affects the ambient temperature value (Trate) which
H+D
should be used for any necessary derating to ensure sufficient cooling
Inserting H = 2m and D = 0.6 m, obtain the minimum width: for the whole of the drive.
7.135 –  2  2  0.6 
W = ----------------------------------------------------- The ambient temperature for the four different combinations is defined
2 + 0.6
below:
=1.821 m (71.7 in) 1. Totally enclosed with no air flow (<2 m/s) over the drive
If the enclosure is too large for the space available, it can be made Trate = Tint + 5 °C
smaller only by attending to one or all of the following:
2. Totally enclosed with air flow (>2 m/s) over the drive
• Using a lower PWM switching frequency to reduce the dissipation in Trate = Tint
the drives
• Reducing the ambient temperature outside the enclosure, and/or 3. Through panel mounted with no airflow (<2 m/s) over the drive
applying forced-air cooling to the outside of the enclosure Trate = the greater of Text +5 °C, or Tint
• Reducing the number of drives in the enclosure 4. Through panel mounted with air flow (>2 m/s) over the drive
• Removing other heat-generating equipment Trate = the greater of Text or Tint
Calculating the air-flow in a ventilated enclosure Where:
The dimensions of the enclosure are required only for accommodating Text = Temperature outside the cabinet
the equipment. The equipment is cooled by the forced air flow. Tint = Temperature inside the cabinet
Calculate the minimum required volume of ventilating air from: Trate = Temperature used to select current rating from tables in
3kP Chapter 11 Technical data on page 177.
V = ---------------------------
T int – T ext
3.8 Heatsink fan operation
Where: The drive is ventilated by an internal heatsink mounted fan. The fan
V Air-flow in m3 per hour (1 m3/hr = 0.59 ft3/min) housing forms a baffle plate, channelling the air through the heatsink
Text Maximum expected temperature in C outside the chamber. Thus, regardless of mounting method (surface mounting or
enclosure through-panel mounting), the installing of additional baffle plates is not
Tint Maximum permissible temperature in C inside the required.
enclosure Ensure the minimum clearances around the drive are maintained to
P Power in Watts dissipated by all heat sources in the allow air to flow freely.
enclosure
The heatsink fan on all sizes is a variable speed fan. The drive controls
Po the speed at which the fan runs based on the temperature of the
k Ratio of -------
Pl heatsink and the drive's thermal model system. The maximum speed at
Where: which the fan operates can be limited in Pr 06.045. This could incur an
P0 is the air pressure at sea level output current derating. Refer to section 3.12.2 Fan removal
procedure on page 40 for information on fan removal. The size 6 and 7
PI is the air pressure at the installation
is also installed with a variable speed fan to ventilate the capacitor bank.
Typically use a factor of 1.2 to 1.3, to allow also for pressure-drops in
dirty air-filters.
Drive User Guide 31

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
3.9 Enclosing standard drive for high Figure 3-18 Installing the gasket
environmental protection Enclosure

rear wall
An explanation of environmental protection rating is provided in section
11.1.9 IP / UL Rating on page 181.
The standard drive is rated to IP20 pollution degree 2 (dry, non-
Gasket
conductive contamination only) (NEMA 1). However, it is possible to Drive
configure the drive to achieve IP65 rating (NEMA 12) at the rear of the
heatsink for through-panel mounting (some current derating is required).
This allows the front of the drive, along with various switchgear, to be
housed in a high IP enclosure with the heatsink protruding through the
panel to the external environment. Thus, the majority of the heat
generated by the drive is dissipated outside the enclosure maintaining a
reduced temperature inside the enclosure. This also relies on a good
seal being made between the heatsink and the rear of the enclosure
using the gaskets provided. The gaskets (and rubber bungs used on
frame size 5 drives) are supplied with the through-hole mounting kits,
see section 3.5.2 Through-panel mounting on page 27 for part numbers
of the trough-hole mounting kits available to order.
Figure 3-17 Example of IP65 (NEMA 12) through-panel layout
IP65 (sizes 4 to 7) (NEMA 12) enclosure
Drive with
high IP insert
IP20 installed
(NEMA1)
To seal the space between the drive and the backplate, use two sealing
brackets as shown in Figure 3-19. The sealing brackets are included in
the accessories kitbox supplied with the drive.
Gasket Figure 3-19 Through panel mounting
seal
Enclosure
rear wall
The main gasket should be installed as shown in Figure 3-18.
On drive size 5, in order to achieve the high IP rating at the rear of the
heatsink it is necessary to seal a heatsink vent by installing the high IP
insert as shown in Figure 3-20.
Through panel
securing bracket
Through panel
securing bracket
32 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Figure 3-20 Installation of high IP insert for size 5 Failure to do so may result in nuisance tripping.
NOTE
1 When designing an IP65 (NEMA 12) enclosure (Figure 3-17 Example of
IP65 (NEMA 12) through-panel layout on page 32), consideration should
be made to the dissipation from the front of the drive.
Table 3-5 Power losses from the front of the drive when through-
panel mounted
Drive model Frame size Power loss (W)
EVC1150B-J1-*14 6 ≤100
EVC1185B-K1-*14 6 ≤100
EVC1150B-K1-*14 5 ≤100
EVC1150B-L1-*14 6 ≤100
EVC1150B-J1-*24 6 ≤100
EVC1150B-K2-*24 5 ≤100
EVC1150B-K1-*24 5 ≤100
2 EVC1150B-L1-*24 6 ≤100
EVC1185B-J1-*24 7 ≤204
EVC1185B-K2-*24 6 ≤100
EVC1185B-K1-*24 6 ≤100
EVC1185B-L1-*24 6 ≤100
1. To install the high IP insert, firstly place a flat head screwdriver into
the slot highlighted (1).
2. Pull the hinged baffle up to expose the ventilation holes, install the
high IP inserts into the ventilation holes in the heatsink (2).
3. Ensure the high IP inserts are securely installed by firmly pressing
them into place (3).
4. Close the hinged baffle as shown (1).
To remove the high IP insert, reverse the above instructions.
The guidelines in Table 3-4 should be followed.
Table 3-4 Environment considerations

Environment High IP insert Comments
Clean Not installed
Dry, dusty (non-conductive) Installed
Regular cleaning
Dry, dusty (conductive) Installed
recommended
IP65 compliance Installed
NOTE
Only the frame size 5 drives require the use of rubber bung inserts for
high IP applications to prevent the environment from entering the drive.
A current derating must be applied to the drive if the high IP insert is
installed. Derating information is provided in section 11.1.1 Power and
current ratings on page 177.
Drive User Guide 33

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
3.10 External EMC filter

The external EMC filter details for each drive rating are provided in the table below
Table 3-6 External EMC filter data
Weight
Compressor model Drive model Part number
kg Ib
ZPV0631E-5E9 EVC1150B-J1-*14 TBC** 6.5 14.3
ZPV0631E-4E9 EVC1185B-K1-*14 TBC** 5.5 12.13
ZPV0631E-4E9 EVC1150B-K1-*14 TBC** 5.5 12.13
ZPV0631E-4E9 EVC1150B-L1-*14 TBC** 7.0 15.4
ZPV0662E-5E9 EVC1150B-J1-*24 TBC** 6.5 14.3
ZPV0662E-4E9 EVC1150B-K2-*24 TBC** 5.5 12.13
ZPV0662E-7E9 EVC1150B-K1-*24 TBC** 5.5 12.13
ZPV0662E-7E9 EVC1150B-L1-*24 TBC** 7.0 15.4
ZPV0962E-5E9 EVC1185B-J1-*24 TBC** 6.9 15.2
ZPV0962E-4E9 EVC1185B-K2-*24 TBC** 6.7 14.8
ZPV0962E-7E9 EVC1185B-K1-*24 TBC** 6.7 14.8
ZPV0962E-7E9 EVC1185B-L1-*24 TBC** 7.0 15.4
The external EMC filters for size 5 and 6 can be footprint or bookcase mounted, see Figure 3-21 and Figure 3-22. The external EMC filter for size 7 is
designed to be mounted above the drive as shown in Figure 3-23.
Mount the external EMC filter following the guidelines in section 4.6.5 Compliance with generic emission standards on page 54.
Figure 3-21 Figure 3-22 Figure 3-23

Footprint mounting the EMC filter (size 5 to 6) Bookcase mounting the EMC filter (size 5 to 6) Size 7 mounting of the EMC filter
34 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Figure 3-24 Size 5 to 6 external EMC filter

A
Y
Z
V
U1 V1 W1
PE U2 V2 W2
Netz / Line
Last / Load
L1'
W C X X L2' CS
L3'
Y
Z
D E Y Z
V: Ground stud X: Threaded holes for footprint mounting of the drive Y: Footprint mounting hole diameter
Z: Bookcase mounting slot diameter. CS: Cable size
Table 3-7 Size 5 external EMC filter dimensions

Part
A B C D E H W V X Y Z CS
number
10 mm2
395 mm 425 mm 106 mm 60 mm 33 mm 437 mm 143 mm 6.5 mm 6.5 mm (8 AWG)
TBC* M6 M6
(15.55 in) (16.73 in) (4.17 in) (2.36 in) (1.30 in) (17.2 in) (5.63 in) (0.26 in) (0.26 in) 2.5 mm2
(14 AWG)

Part
A B C D E H W V X Y Z CS
number
TBC*
TBC*
392 mm 420 mm 180 mm 60 mm 33 mm 434 mm 210 mm
M6 M6
6.5 mm 6.5 mm 16 mm2
(15.43 in) (16.54 in) (7.09 in) (2.36 in) (1.30 in) (17.09 in) (8.27 in) (0.26 in) (0.26 in) (6 AWG)
TBC*
Drive User Guide 35

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Figure 3-25 External EMC filter (size 7)
A
H
B
Z V Load Line
W C
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3

Part
A B C D E F H W V X Y Z
number
240 mm 255 mm 55 mm 150 mm 205 mm 270 mm 90 mm 6.5 mm
TBC* M10
(9.45 in) (10.04 in) (2.17 in) (5.90 in) (8.07 in) (10.63 in) (3.54 in) (0.26 in)
36 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
3.11 Electrical terminals

3.11.1 Location of the power and ground terminals
Figure 3-26 Location of the power and ground terminals (frame sizes 5 to 7)
Key
1. Control terminals 3. Additional ground connection 5. AC power terminals 7. External 24V connector
2. Relay terminals 4. Ground connections 6. Motor terminals
Drive User Guide 37

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
3.11.2 Terminal sizes and torque settings
To avoid a fire hazard and maintain validity of the UL listing, adhere to the specified tightening torques for the power and ground terminals.
Refer to the following tables.
WARNING
Table 3-10 Drive control and relay terminal data

Frame size Connection type Torque setting
All Plug-in terminal block 0.5 N m (0.4 lb ft)
Table 3-11 Drive power terminal data

AC and motor terminals Ground terminal
Frame size
Recommended Maximum Recommended Maximum
Plug-in terminal block M5 Nut (8 mm AF)
5
1.5 N m (1.1 lb ft) 1.8 N m (1.3 lb ft) 2.0 N m (1.4 Ib ft) 5.0 N m (3.7 Ib ft)
M6 Nut (10 mm AF) M6 Nut (10 mm AF)
6
6.0 N m(4.4 Ib ft) 8.0 N m(6.0 Ib ft) 6.0 N m(4.4 Ib ft) 8.0 N m(6.0 Ib ft)
M8 Nut (13 mm AF) M8 Nut (13 mm AF)
7
12 N m (8.8 Ib ft) 14 N m (10.0 Ib ft) 12 N m (8.8 Ib ft) 14 N m (10.0 Ib ft)
Table 3-12 Plug-in terminal block maximum cable sizes

Frame size Terminal block description Max cable size
11 way control connectors (terminals 1-11 and 21-31) 1.5 mm2 (16 AWG)
All
2 way relay connector (terminals 41 and 42) 2.5 mm2 (12 AWG)
3 way AC power connector (terminals L1, L2 and L3)
5
3 way motor connector (terminals U, V and W) 8 mm2 (8 AWG)
6
2 way external 24 V supply connector (terminals 51 and 52) 1.5 mm2 (16 AWG)
7
Table 3-13 External EMC filter terminal data

Power connections Ground connections
Part Max cable size Max torque Max torque
number Ground stud size
2 AWG Nm Ib ft Nm Ib ft
mm
TBC* 50 1/0 8 6 M10 18 13.3
TBC* 16 6 1.8 1.4 M6 5 3.7
TBC*
TBC* 16 6 2.3 1.70 M6 5 3.7
TBC*
38 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
3.12 Routine maintenance

The drive should be installed in a cool, clean, well ventilated location. Contact of moisture and dust with the drive should be prevented.
Regular checks of the following should be carried out, at least every 12 months, to ensure drive / installation reliability are maximized:
Environment
Ambient temperature Ensure the enclosure temperature remains at or below maximum specified
Ensure the drive remains dust free – check that the heatsink and drive fan are not gathering dust.
Dust The lifetime of the fan is reduced in dusty environments and might require an atypical fan replacement within 2 to 3
years.
Moisture Ensure the drive enclosure shows no signs of condensation
Enclosure
Enclosure door filters Ensure filters are not blocked and that air is free to flow
Electrical
Screw connections Ensure all screw terminals remain tight
Crimp terminals Ensure all crimp terminals remains tight – check for any discoloration which could indicate overheating
Cables Check all cables for signs of damage
While the drive is still powered up, set Pr 06.045 = 11 to turn the fans fully on. Listen for the fan to turn on and spool up.
Fan(s) The fan(s) should not sound labored or create any "grinding" noise when operating properly. Set Pr 06.045 = 10 after
the fan inspection is complete.
RTC Battery (if applicable) Check that the low battery symbol is not indicated.
3.12.1 Real time clock battery replacement

Those keypads which have the real time clock feature contain a battery to ensure the clock works when the drive is powered down. The RTC battery
has a long life time up to 15 years. Factors that decrease the lifetime of the RTC battery include elevated ambient temperatures and extended periods
of the drive being disconnected from either the AC mains or an optional user +24V supply.
Low battery voltage is indicated by low battery symbol on the keypad display.
Figure 3-27 KI-Keypad RTC (rear view)
Figure 3-27 above illustrates the rear view of the KI-Keypad RTC.
Replacing the RTC battery:
1. To remove the battery cover insert a flat head screwdriver into the slot as shown (1), push and turn anti-clockwise until the battery cover is
released. The battery will fall out once cover is removed.
2. Replace the battery (the battery type is: CR2032).
3. Reverse point 1 above to replace battery cover.
NOTE
Ensure the battery is disposed of correctly.
Drive User Guide 39

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
3.12.2 Fan removal procedure

Figure 3-28 Removal of the size 5 heatsink fan
5 5
• Ensure the fan cable is disconnected from the drive prior to attempting fan removal.
• Press the two tabs (1) inwards to release the fan from the drive frame.
• Using the central fan tab (2), withdraw the fan assembly from the drive housing.
Replace the fan by reversing the above instructions.
NOTE
If the drive is surface mounted using the outer holes on the mounting bracket, then the heatsink fan can be replaced without removing the drive from
the backplate.
Figure 3-29 Size 5 fan part numbers

Frame size Heatsink fan part number Auxiliary fan part number
Size 5 TBC* N/A
A: Press the tabs (1) inwards to release the fan assembly from the underside of the drive.
B: Use the tabs (1) to withdraw the fan by pulling it away from the drive.
C: Depress and hold the locking release on the fan cable lead as shown (2).
D: With the locking release depressed (2), take hold of the fan supply cable and carefully pull to separate the connectors.
40 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Figure 3-31 Removal of the size 6 auxiliary fan
2
3
• Press the tabs (1) inwards to release the fan assembly from the drive mid cover.
• Use the tabs (1) to withdraw the fan from the drive by pulling the fan assembly forward and tilting it at a slight angle (2).
• Pull the fan assembly up and away from the drive (3).
• Depress and hold the locking release on the fan cable lead.
• With the locking release depressed, take hold of the fan supply cable and carefully pull to separate the connectors.
Replace the fan by reversing the above instructions.

Size 6 TBC* TBC*
2 5
4
• Remove the terminal cover (1).
• Remove the finger guard (2).
• Disconnect the fan cables from the drive (making a note of the order) and push the grommets down prior to attempting fan removal (3).
• Remove the mounting screws using a T20 and T25 torque driver (4).
• Withdraw the fan housing from the drive (5).
After the fan(s) have been replaced, reverse the above steps to refit.
Drive User Guide 41

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Figure 3-34 Removal of the Size 7 auxiliary (capacitor bank) fan
• Disconnect the fan wiring connector shown (1).

• Slide the fan housing in the direction shown using the tongue, shown in the enlarged diagram of the fan (2).
• Withdraw the fan housing from the drive (3).
After the fan has been replaced, reverse the above steps to refit.
Size 7 TBC* TBC*
42 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
4 Electrical installation 4.1 Power connections

4.1.1 AC connections
Many cable management features have been incorporated into the
Figure 4-1 Size 5 power connections
product and accessories, this chapter shows how to optimize them. Key
features include:
• Safe Torque Off function
• Internal EMC filter
• EMC compliance with shielding / grounding accessories
• Product rating, fusing and cabling information
Electric shock risk

The voltages present in the following locations can cause
severe electric shock and may be lethal:
5
WARNING
• AC supply cables and connections
• DC cables and connections
• Output cables and connections
• Many internal parts of the drive, and external option units
Unless otherwise indicated, control terminals are single
insulated and must not be touched.
Isolation device
The AC and / or DC power supply must be disconnected 1 2
from the drive using an approved isolation device before any AC Connections Motor Connections
cover is removed from the drive or before any servicing work L1 L2 L3 PE U V W
WARNING is performed.
STOP function
Optional EMC
filter
The STOP function does not remove dangerous voltages
from the drive, the motor or any external option units. Optional
line reactor
WARNING
Safe Torque Off function Fuses
The Safe Torque Off function does not remove dangerous

voltages from the drive, the motor or any external option
WARNING
units.
Stored charge L1 L2 L3
Optional ground
The drive contains capacitors that remain charged to a Mains Supply connection
Supply Ground Compressor
potentially lethal voltage after the AC and / or DC power
supply has been disconnected. If the drive has been
WARNING energized, the AC and / or DC power supply must be
isolated at least ten minutes before work may continue. The upper terminal block (1) is used for AC supply connection.
Normally, the capacitors are discharged by an internal
The lower terminal block (2) is used for the Motor connection.
resistor. Under certain, unusual fault conditions, it is possible
that the capacitors may fail to discharge, or be prevented See Figure 4-4 for further information on ground connections.
from being discharged by a voltage applied to the output
terminals. If the drive has failed in a manner that causes the
display to go blank immediately, it is possible the capacitors
will not be discharged. In this case, consult Emerson Climate
Technologies.
Equipment supplied by plug and socket

Special attention must be given if the drive is installed in
equipment which is connected to the AC supply by a plug
and socket. The AC supply terminals of the drive are
WARNING connected to the internal capacitors through rectifier diodes
which are not intended to give safety isolation. If the plug
terminals can be touched when the plug is disconnected
from the socket, a means of automatically isolating the plug
from the drive must be used (e.g. a latching relay).
Permanent magnet motors

Permanent magnet motors generate electrical power if they
are rotated, even when the supply to the drive is
disconnected. If that happens then the drive will become
WARNING
energized through its motor terminals.
If the motor load is capable of rotating the motor when the
supply is disconnected, then the motor must be isolated from
the drive before gaining access to any live parts.
Drive User Guide 43

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Figure 4-2 Size 6 power connections Figure 4-3 Size 7 power connections
AC connections
Supply Mains
ground Supply
L1 L2 L3
6
Fuses
Optional
line reactor
Optional
EMC filter
AC Connections Motor Connections

L1 L2 L3 PE U V W L1 L2 L3
Optional EMC
filter PE
Optional
line reactor
Fuses
Optional ground
L1 L2 L3 connection
Compressor
7
Mains Supply
Supply Ground
Motor connections
U V W
Optional ground Compressor

connection
44 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
4.1.2 Ground connections Size 7

On size 7, the supply and motor ground connections are made using the
M8 studs located by the supply and motor connection terminals.
Electrochemical corrosion of grounding terminals
Ensure that grounding terminals are protected against Figure 4-6 Size 7 ground connections
corrosion i.e. as could be caused by condensation. 1
WARNING
Size 5
On size 5, the supply and motor ground connections are made using the
M5 studs located near the plug-in power connector. Refer to Figure 4-4
for additional ground connection.
Figure 4-4 Size 5 ground connections
1 7
1
2
1 1. Ground connection studs.
The ground loop impedance must conform to the

1. Ground connection studs. requirements of local safety regulations.
2. Additional ground connection.
The drive must be grounded by a connection capable of
Size 6
WARNING carrying the prospective fault current until the protective
On a size 6, the supply and motor ground connections are made using device (fuse, etc.) disconnects the AC supply.
the M6 studs located above the supply and motor terminals. Refer to
The ground connections must be inspected and tested at
Figure 4-5.
appropriate intervals.
Figure 4-5 Size 6 ground connections Table 4-1 Protective ground cable ratings
Input phase
Minimum ground conductor size
conductor size
Either 10 mm2 or two conductors of the
≤ 10 mm2 same cross-sectional area as the input
phase conductor
The same cross-sectional area as the input
> 10 mm2 and ≤ 16 mm2 phase conductor
> 16 mm2 and ≤ 35 mm2 16 mm2

Half of the cross-sectional area of the input
> 35 mm2 phase conductor
4.2 AC supply requirements

Voltage:
200 V drive: 200 V to 240 V ±10 %
400 V drive: 380 V to 480 V ±10 %
575 V drive: 500 V to 575 V ±10 %
Number of phases: 3
Maximum supply imbalance: 2 % negative phase sequence (equivalent
to 3 % voltage imbalance between phases).
Frequency range: 45 to 66 Hz
For UL compliance only, the maximum supply symmetrical fault current
must be limited to 100 kA
1. Ground connection studs.
Drive User Guide 45

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
4.2.1 Supply types

All drives are suitable for use on any supply type i.e TN-S, TN-C-S, TT and IT.
• Supplies with voltage up to 600 V may have grounding at any potential, i.e. neutral, centre or corner (“grounded delta”)
• Supplies with voltage above 600 V may not have corner grounding
Drives are suitable for use on supplies of installation category III and lower, according to IEC60664-1. This means they may be connected
permanently to the supply at its origin in a building, but for outdoor installation additional over-voltage suppression (transient voltage surge
suppression) must be provided to reduce category IV to category III.
Operation with IT (ungrounded) supplies:

Special attention is required when using internal or external EMC filters with ungrounded supplies, because in the event of a ground
(earth) fault in the motor circuit the drive may not trip and the filter could be over-stressed. In this case, either the filter must not be used
(removed), or additional independent motor ground fault protection must be provided.
WARNING
For instructions on removal, refer to section 4.6.2 Internal EMC filter on page 52. For details of ground fault protection contact the supplier
of the drive.
A ground fault in the supply has no effect in any case. If the motor must continue to run with a ground fault in its own circuit then an input isolating
transformer must be provided and if an EMC filter is required it must be located in the primary circuit.
Unusual hazards can occur on ungrounded supplies with more than one source, for example on ships. Contact the supplier of the drive for more
information.
4.2.2 Use of line reactors
If the supply has poor phase balance or is subject to severe disturbances on the supply network, then input line reactors may be fitted in order to
reduce the risk of damage to the drive.
Reactance values of approximately 2 % allows the drive to used with a supply unbalance of up to 3.5 % negative phase sequence (equivalent to 5 %
voltage imbalance between phases). Higher values may be used, but this may result in a loss of drive output (reduced torque at high speed) because
of the voltage drop across the line reactor.
Line reactors also help to mitigate the effects of the following types of disturbance:
• Power factor correction equipment connected close to the drive.
• Large DC drives having no or inadequate line reactors connected to the supply.
• Across the line (DOL) started motor(s) connected to the supply such that when any of these motors are started, the voltage dip exceeds 20 %.
These disturbances may cause excessive peak currents to flow in the input power circuit of the drive. This may cause nuisance tripping, or in extreme
cases, failure of the drive. Drives of low power rating may also be susceptible to disturbance when connected to supplies with a high rated capacity.
In cases where harmonic currents cause interference, remedial measures such as harmonic filters may be used, installed at the common supply
point. Harmonic currents from drives add approximately arithmetically.
Table 4-2 2 % Line reactors
Supply Line reactor Line reactor rated

Compressor Drive model Line reactor Line reactor part
voltage inductance current
Series number model number
(V) (µH) (A)
ZPV0631E-5E9 EVC1150B-J1-*14 200-240 150 56.6 INL2005 TBC**

ZPV0631E-4E9 EVC1185B-K1-*14 380-480 240 60.6 INL4008 TBC**
ZPV0631E-4E9 EVC1150B-L1-*14 500-575 720 29.4 INL5004 TBC**
46 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Compliance with EN/ IEC 61000-3-12

The standard EN/ IEC 61000-3-12 places limits on harmonic current emissions. Drives that need to comply with this standard need to be fitted with
line reactors as shown in
Table 4-3 Line reactors for compliance with EN 61000-3-12
series number model number
(V) (µH) (A)
ZPV0631E-5E9 EVC1150B-J1-*14 200-240 Not required
4.2.3 Input inductor calculation

To calculate the inductance required (at Y%), use the following equation:
Y V 1
L = ----------  -------  ------------
100 3 2fI
Where:
I = drive rated input current (A)
L = inductance (H)
f = supply frequency (Hz)
V = voltage between lines
4.3 Ratings
The input current is affected by the supply voltage and impedance.
Typical input current
The values of typical input current are given to aid calculations for power flow and power loss.
The values of typical input current are stated for a balanced supply.
Maximum continuous input current
The values of maximum continuous input current are given to aid the selection of cables and fuses. These values are stated for the worst case
condition with the unusual combination of stiff supply with bad balance.
The value stated for the maximum continuous input current would only be seen in one of the input phases. The current in the other two phases would
be significantly lower.
The values of maximum input current are stated for a supply with a 2 % negative phase-sequence imbalance and rated at the supply fault current
given in Table 4-4.
Table 4-4 Supply fault current used to calculate maximum input current
Model Symmetrical fault level
All 100
Fuses
The AC supply to the drive must be installed with suitable protection against overload and short-circuits. Table 4-5, Table 4-6 and Table 4-
7 shows recommended fuse ratings. Failure to observe this requirement will cause risk of fire.
WARNING
Drive User Guide 47

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Table 4-5 Drive fuse ratings - ZPV0631E Compressors
Maximum Maximum Fuse rating

Typical input
continuous overload input IEC UL / USA
Model current
input current current Nominal Maximum Nominal Maximum
Class Class
A A A A A A A
EVC1150B-J1-*14 49 56 85 63 63 60 60
EVC1185B-K1-*14 32 36 67 63 63 40 60 CC, J or
gG
EVC1150B-K1-*14 27 30 58 40 40 35 35 T**
EVC1150B-L1-*14 26 29 50 50 63 35 50
** These fuses are fast acting.
Fuse rating
Maximum Maximum
Typical input
Model current
input current current
Nominal Maximum Nominal Maximum
Class Class
A A A A A A A
EVC1150B-J1-*24 49 56 85 63 63 60 60
EVC1150B-K2-*24 27 30 58 40 40 35 35 CC, J or
gG
EVC1150B-K1-*24 27 30 58 40 40 35 35 T**
EVC1150B-L1-*24 26 29 50 50 63 35 35
Fuse rating
Maximum Maximum
Typical input
Model current
Class Class
A A A A A A A
EVC1185B-J1-*24 73 84 135 100 100 100 100
EVC1185B-K2-*24 54 60 90 63 63 60 60 CC, J or
gG
EVC1185B-K1-*24 54 60 90 63 63 60 60 T**
EVC1185B-L1-*24 41 47 76 63 63 50 50
NOTE
Ensure all cables used suit local wiring regulations
The nominal cable sizes below are only a guide. The mounting and grouping of cables affects their current-carrying capacity, in some cases
smaller cables may be acceptable but in other cases a larger cable is required to avoid excessive temperature or voltage drop. Refer to
local wiring regulations for the correct size of cables.
CAUTION
Table 4-8 Drive cable ratings - ZPV0631E compressors

Cable size (IEC) Cable size (UL)
mm2 AWG
Model
Input Output Input Output
Nominal Maximum Nominal Maximum Nominal Maximum Nominal Maximum
EVC1150B-J1-*14 25 25 25 25 3 3 3 3
EVC1185B-K1-*14 10 25 10 25 6 3 6 3
EVC1150B-K1-*14 6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8
EVC1150B-L1-*14 10 25 10 25 8 3 8 3
48 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics

mm2 AWG
Model
EVC1150B-J1-*24 25 25 25 25 3 3 3 3
EVC1150B-K2-*24 6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8
EVC1150B-K1-*24 6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8
EVC1150B-L1-*24 10 25 10 25 8 3 8 3

mm2 AWG
Model
EVC1185B-J1-*24 35 70 35 70 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0
EVC1185B-K2-*24 25 25 25 25 3 3 3 3
EVC1185B-K1-*24 25 25 25 25 3 3 3 3
EVC1185B-L1-*24 16 25 10 25 6 3 6 3
NOTE 4.4 Output circuit and motor protection

PVC insulated cable should be used. The output circuit has fast-acting electronic short-circuit protection which
limits the fault current to typically no more than five times the rated
NOTE
output current, and interrupts the current in approximately 20 µs. No
Cable sizes are from IEC60364-5-52:2001 table A.52.C with correction additional short-circuit protection devices are required.
factor for 40°C ambient of 0.87 (from table A52.14) for cable installation
method B2 (multicore cable in conduit). 4.4.1 Cable types and lengths
The maximum motor cable length is 100 m.
Installation class (ref: IEC60364-5-52:2001)
B1 - Separate cables in conduit. Use 105 °C (221 °F) (UL 60/75 °C temp rise) PVC-insulated cable with
B2 - Multicore cable in conduit. copper conductors having a suitable voltage rating, for the following
C - Multicore cable in free air. power connections:
Cable size may be reduced if a different installation method is used, or if • AC supply to external EMC filter (when used)
the ambient temperature is lower. • AC supply (or external EMC filter) to drive
• Drive to motor
NOTE N
The nominal output cable sizes assume that the motor maximum current
matches that of the drive. Where a motor of reduced rating is used the
cable rating may be chosen to match that of the motor. To ensure that
the motor and cable are protected against overload, the drive must be
programmed with the correct motor rated current.
A fuse or other protection must be included in all live connections to the
AC supply.
Fuse types
The fuse voltage rating must be suitable for the drive supply voltage.
Ground connections
The drive must be connected to the system ground of the AC supply.
The ground wiring must conform to local regulations and codes of
practice.
NOTE N
For information on ground cable sizes, refer to Table 4-1 Protective
ground cable ratings on page 45.
4.3.1 Main AC supply contactor

The recommended AC supply contactor type for size 5, 6 and 7 is AC1.
Drive User Guide 49

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
4.4.2 High-capacitance / reduced diameter cables

The maximum cable length is reduced from that shown in section
Only type B ELCB / RCD are suitable for use with 3 phase
4.4.1 Cable types and lengths on page 49 if high capacitance or reduced
inverter drives.
diameter motor cables are used.
WARNING
Most cables have an insulating jacket between the cores and the armor or
shield; these cables have a low capacitance and are recommended. If an external EMC filter is used, a delay of at least 50 ms should be
Cables that do not have an insulating jacket tend to have high capacitance; incorporated to ensure spurious trips are not seen. The leakage current
if a cable of this type is used, the maximum cable length is half that quoted is likely to exceed the trip level if all of the phases are not energized
in the tables, (Figure 4-7 shows how to identify the two types). simultaneously.
Figure 4-7 Cable construction influencing the capacitance 4.6 EMC (Electromagnetic compatibility)
The requirements for EMC are divided into three levels in the following
three sections:
Section4.6.3, General requirements for all applications, to ensure
reliable operation of the drive and minimise the risk of disturbing nearby
equipment. The immunity standards specified in Chapter 11 Technical
data on page 177 will be met, but no specific emission standards are
Normal capacitance High capacitance
Shield or armour Shield or armour close applied. Note also the special requirements given in Surge immunity of
separated from the cores to the cores control circuits - long cables and connections outside a building on
page 57 for increased surge immunity of control circuits where control
wiring is extended.
The maximum motor cable lengths specified in Section 4.4.1 Cable
Section 4.6.4, Requirements for meeting the EMC standard for
types and lengths , are shielded and contain four cores. Typical
power drive systems, IEC61800-3 (EN 61800-3:2004).
capacitance for this type of cable is 130 pF/m (i.e. from one core to all
others and the shield connected together). Section 4.6.5, Requirements for meeting the generic emission
standards for the industrial environment, IEC61000-6-4, EN 61000-6-
4.4.3 Output contactor 4:2007.
If the cable between the drive and the motor is to be The recommendations of section 4.6.3 will usually be sufficient to avoid
interrupted by a contactor or circuit breaker, ensure that the causing disturbance to adjacent equipment of industrial quality. If
drive is disabled before the contactor or circuit breaker is particularly sensitive equipment is to be used nearby, or in a non-
opened or closed. Severe arcing may occur if this circuit is industrial environment, then the recommendations of section 4.6.4 or
WARNING interrupted with the motor running at high current and low section 4.6.5 should be followed to give reduced radio-frequency
speed. emission. In order to ensure the installation meets the various emission
A contactor is sometimes required to be installed between the drive and standards described in:
motor for safety purposes. The recommended motor contactor is the • The EMC data sheet available from the supplier of the drive
AC3 type. • The Declaration of Conformity at the front of this manual
Switching of an output contactor should only occur when the output of • Chapter 11 Technical data on page 177
the drive is disabled. The correct external EMC filter must be used and all of the guidelines in
Opening or closing of the contactor with the drive enabled will lead to: section 4.6.3 General requirements for EMC on page 53 and section
1. OI ac trips (which cannot be reset for 10 s) 4.6.5 Compliance with generic emission standards on page 54 must be
2. High levels of radio frequency noise emission followed.
3. Increased contactor wear and tear Table 4-11 Drive and EMC filter cross reference
The Drive Enable terminal (T31) when opened provides a Safe Torque Compressor model Drive model Part number
Off function. This can in many cases replace output contactors. For
further information see section 4.10 Safe Torque Off (STO) on page 64. ZPV0631E-5E9 EVC1150B-J1-*14 TBC**
ZPV0631E-4E9 EVC1185B-K1-*14 TBC**
4.5 Ground leakage ZPV0631E-4E9 TBC**
EVC1150B-K1-*14
The ground leakage current depends upon whether the internal EMC
ZPV0631E-4E9 EVC1150B-L1-*14 TBC**
filter is installed or not. The drive is supplied with the filter installed.
ZPV0662E-5E9 EVC1150B-J1-*24 TBC**
Instructions for removing the internal filter are given in section
4.6.2 Internal EMC filter on page 52. ZPV0662E-4E9 EVC1150B-K2-*24 TBC**
ZPV0662E-7E9 EVC1150B-K1-*24 TBC**
When the internal filter is installed the leakage current is ZPV0662E-7E9 EVC1150B-L1-*24 TBC**
high. In this case a permanent fixed ground connection must ZPV0962E-5E9 EVC1185B-J1-*24 TBC**
be provided, or other suitable measures taken to prevent a ZPV0962E-4E9 EVC1185B-K2-*24 TBC**
safety hazard occurring if the connection is lost. ZPV0962E-7E9 TBC**
WARNING EVC1185B-K1-*24
ZPV0962E-7E9 EVC1185B-L1-*24 TBC**
4.5.1 Use of residual current device (RCD)
There are three common types of ELCB / RCD: * = 1 or 8 denoting OEM or Aftermarket drives respectively.
1. AC - detects AC fault currents ** Part numbers were not available at time of printing. Please contact
2. A - detects AC and pulsating DC fault currents (provided the DC your Emerson Climate Technologies application engineer when ordering
current reaches zero at least once every half cycle) parts.
3. B - detects AC, pulsating DC and smooth DC fault currents High ground leakage current
• Type AC should never be used with drives. When an EMC filter is used, a permanent fixed ground
• Type A can only be used with single phase drives connection must be provided which does not pass through a
• Type B must be used with three phase drives connector or flexible power cord. This includes the internal
WARNING EMC filter.
50 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
NOTE N Figure 4-9 Installation of grounding clamp (size 6)

The installer of the drive is responsible for ensuring compliance with the
EMC regulations that apply in the country in which the drive is to be
used.
4.6.1 Grounding hardware

The drive is supplied with a grounding bracket and grounding clamp to
facilitate EMC compliance. They provide a convenient method for direct
grounding of cable shields without the use of "pig-tails”. Cable shields
can be bared and clamped to the grounding bracket using metal clips or
clamps1 (not supplied) or cable ties. Note that the shield must in all
cases be continued through the clamp to the intended terminal on the
drive, in accordance with the connection details for the specific signal.
1
A suitable clamp is the Phoenix DIN rail mounted SK14 cable clamp
(for cables with a maximum outer diameter of 14 mm).
• See Figure 4-8 to Figure 4-9 for details on installing the grounding
clamp.
• See Figure 4-10 for details on installing the grounding bracket.
Figure 4-8 Installation of grounding clamp (size 5)
The grounding clamp is secured using the provided 2 x M4 x 10 mm

fasteners. The fasteners should be tightened with the maximum torque
of 2 N m (1.47 Ib ft).
Figure 4-10 Installation of grounding bracket (all sizes)
Loosen the ground connection nuts and slide the grounding clamp down
onto the pillars in the direction shown. Once in place, the ground
connection nuts should be tightened with a maximum torque of 2 N m
(1.47 lb ft).
Loosen the ground connection nuts and slide the grounding bracket in
the direction shown. Once in place, the ground connection nuts should
be tightened with a maximum torque of 2 N m (1.47 lb ft).
A faston tab is located on the grounding bracket for the purpose of
connecting the drive 0 V to ground should the user require to do so.
Drive User Guide 51

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
4.6.2 Internal EMC filter Figure 4-12 Removal of the size 6 internal EMC filter
It is recommended that the internal EMC filter be kept in place unless
there is a specific reason for removing it.
If the drive is used with ungrounded (IT) supplies, the
internal EMC filter must be removed unless additional motor
ground fault protection is installed.
For instructions on removal refer to section 4.6.2.
WARNING
For details of ground fault protection contact the supplier of
the drive.
The internal EMC filter reduces radio-frequency emission into the line
power supply. Where the motor cable is short, it permits the
requirements of EN 61800-3:2004+A1:2012 to be met for the second
environment - see section 4.6.4 Compliance with EN 61800-
3:2004+A1:2012 (standard for Power Drive Systems) on page 54 and
section 11.1.26 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) on page 186. For
longer motor cables the filter continues to provide a useful reduction in
emission levels, and when used with any length of shielded motor cable 1
up to the limit for the drive, it is unlikely that nearby industrial equipment To electrically disconnect the Internal EMC filter, remove the screw as
will be disturbed. It is recommended that the filter be used in all highlighted above (1).
applications unless the instructions given above require it to be
removed. See Figure 4-11 to Figure 4-13 on page 52 for details of Figure 4-13 Removal of the size 7 internal EMC filter and line to ground
removing the internal EMC filters. varistors
The supply must be disconnected before removing the

internal EMC filter.
WARNING
Figure 4-11 Removal of the size 5 internal EMC filter
3 2
2
1
To electrically disconnect the Internal EMC filter, remove the screw as

highlighted above (1).
To electrically disconnect the line to ground varistors, remove the screw
as highlighted above (2).
NOTE
The line to ground varistors should only be removed in special

circumstances.
Remove the three M5 terminal nuts (1). Lift away the cover (2) to expose
the M4 Torx internal EMC filter removal screw. Finally remove the M4
Torx internal EMC filter removal screw (3) to electrically disconnect the
internal EMC filter.
52 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
4.6.3 General requirements for EMC

Ground (earth) connections
The grounding arrangements should be in accordance with Figure 4-14, which shows a single drive on a back-plate with or without an additional
enclosure.
Figure 4-14 shows how to configure and minimise EMC when using unshielded motor cable. However shielded cable is a better option, in which case
it should be installed as shown in section 4.6.5 Compliance with generic emission standards on page 54.
Figure 4-14 General EMC enclosure layout showing ground connections
If ground connections are

made using a separate
cable, they should run
parallel to the appropriate
power cable to minimise
emissions
Metal backplate
Optional EMC
filter
If the control circuit 0V

is to be grounded, this External
should be done at the controller
system controller only to 0V PE
avoid injecting noise
currents into the 0V circuit
3 phase AC supply ~
PE
Use four core cable to

Grounding bar connect the compressor to the
The incoming supply ground drive. The ground conductor in
should be connected to a the cable must be connected
single power ground bus bar directly to the earth terminal of
or low impedance earth the drive and compressor.
terminal inside the cubicle. It must not be connected directly
This should be used as a Metal backplate to the power earth busbar.
common 'clean' ground for all safety bonded to
components inside the cubicle. power ground busbar
Optional ground
connection Compressor
Drive User Guide 53

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Cable layout The second environment typically includes an industrial low-

Figure 4-15 indicates the clearances which should be observed around
voltage power supply network which does not supply
the drive and related ‘noisy’ power cables by all sensitive control signals buildings used for residential purposes. Operating the drive in
/ equipment.
this environment without an external EMC filter may cause
Figure 4-15 Drive cable clearances CAUTION interference to nearby electronic equipment whose sensitivity
has not been appreciated. The user must take remedial
measures if this situation arises. If the consequences of
unexpected disturbances are severe, it is recommended that
the guidelines in Section 4.6.5 Compliance with generic
emission standards be adhered to.
Refer to section 11.1.26 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) on

page 186 for further information on compliance with EMC standards and
Do not place sensitive
definitions of environments.
(unscreened) signal circuits
in a zone extending Detailed instructions and EMC information are given in the EMC Data
300 mm (12”) all around the
Drive, motor cable, input
Sheet which is available from the supplier of the drive.
cable from EMC filter
(if used) 4.6.5 Compliance with generic emission standards
The following information applies to frame sizes 5 to 7.
Use the recommended filter and shielded motor cable. Observe the
layout rules given in Figure 4-16.
Figure 4-16 Supply and ground cable clearance (sizes 5 and 6)
300 mm
(12 in)
Optional ground
³100 mm
connection Compressor (4 in)
4.6.4 Compliance with EN 61800-3:2004+A1:2012

(standard for Power Drive Systems)
Meeting the requirements of this standard depends on the environment
that the drive is intended to operate in, as follows:
Operation in the first environment
Observe the guidelines given in section 4.6.5 Compliance with generic ³100 mm
emission standards on page 54. An external EMC filter will always be (4 in)
required.
Do not modify
This is a product of the restricted distribution class according the filter wires
to IEC 61800-3
In a residential environment this product may cause radio
CAUTION
interference in which case the user may be required to take
adequate measures. Optional ground
connection
Operation in the second environment Compressor
In all cases a shielded motor cable must be used, and an EMC filter is
required for all drives with a rated input current of less than 100 A.
The drive contains an in-built filter for basic emission control. In some
cases feeding the motor cables (U, V and W) once through a ferrite ring
can maintain compliance for longer cable lengths.
For longer motor cables, an external filter is required. Where a filter is
required, follow the guidelines in Section 4.6.5 Compliance with generic
emission standards .
Where a filter is not required, follow the guidelines given in section
4.6.3 General requirements for EMC on page 53.
54 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Figure 4-17 Supply and ground cable clearance (size 7) Figure 4-18 Sensitive signal circuit clearance
100mm (4in)
300 mm
100mm (4in) (12 in)
Sensitive
signal
cable
Avoid placing sensitive signal circuits in a zone 300 mm (12 in) in the
area immediately surrounding the power module. Ensure good EMC
grounding.
100 mm (4in)
Figure 4-19 Grounding the drive, motor cable shield and filter
Optional ground Compressor

connection
Ensure the AC supply and ground cables are at least 100 mm from the Ensure direct
metal contact
power module and motor cable. at drive and
filter mounting
points (any
paint must be
removed).
Motor cable shield

(unbroken) electrically
connected to and held
in place by grounding
clamp.
Drive User Guide 55

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Connect the shield of the motor cable to the ground terminal of the motor Alternatively, wiring may be passed through a ferrite ring. Contact
frame using a link that is as short as possible and not exceeding 50 mm Emerson Climate Technologies for ordering details.
(2 in) long. Figure 4-21 Grounding of signal cable shields using the
A complete 360° termination of the shield to the terminal housing of the grounding bracket
motor is beneficial.
From an EMC consideration it is irrelevant whether the motor cable
contains an internal (safety) ground core, or if there is a separate
external ground conductor, or where grounding is through the shield
alone. An internal ground core will carry a high noise current and
therefore it must be terminated as close as possible to the shield
termination.
Figure 4-20 Grounding the compressor cable shield
4.6.6 Variations in the EMC wiring

Interruptions to the motor cable
The motor cable should ideally be a single length of shielded or armored
Compressor cable having no interruptions. In some situations it may be necessary to
interrupt the cable, as in the following examples:
• Connecting the motor cable to a terminal block in the drive enclosure
• Installing a motor isolator / disconnect switch for safety when work is
done on the motor
connection In these cases the following guidelines should be followed.
If the control wiring is to exit the enclosure, it must be shielded and the Terminal block in the enclosure
shield(s) clamped to the drive using the grounding bracket as shown in If a drive is mounted in an enclosure where a terminal block is provided
Figure 4-21. Remove the outer insulating cover of the cable to ensure for easy access with customer connections, then this mounting method
the shield(s) make direct contact with the bracket, but keep the shield(s) should be used.
intact until as close as possible to the terminals.
The motor cable shields should be bonded to the back-plate using
uninsulated metal cable-clamps which should be positioned as close as
possible to the terminal block. Keep the length of power conductors to a
minimum and ensure that all sensitive equipment and circuits are at
least 0.3 m (12 in) away from the terminal block.
Figure 4-22 Connecting the motor cable to a terminal block in the
enclosure
From the Drive
Back-plate
Enclosure
To the motor
56 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Surge immunity of control circuits - long cables and 4.7 Communications connections
connections outside a building
The input/output ports for the control circuits are designed for general The drive offers a 2 wire 485 interface. This enables the drive set-up,
use within machines and small systems without any special precautions. operation and monitoring to be carried out with a PC or controller if
required.
These circuits meet the requirements of EN 61000-6-2:2005 (1 kV
surge) provided the 0 V connection is not grounded. Figure 4-25 Location of the comms connectors
In applications where they may be exposed to high-energy voltage
surges, some special measures may be required to prevent malfunction
or damage. Surges may be caused by lightning or severe power faults in
association with grounding arrangements which permit high transient
voltages between nominally grounded points. This is a particular risk
1 8 1 8
where the circuits extend outside the protection of a building.
As a general rule, if the circuits are to pass outside the building where
the drive is located, or if cable runs within a building exceed 30 m, some
additional precautions are advisable. One of the following techniques
should be used:
1. Galvanic isolation, i.e. do not connect the control 0V terminal to
ground. Avoid loops in the control wiring, i.e. ensure every control
wire is accompanied by its return (0V) wire.
2. Shielded cable with additional power ground bonding. The cable
shield may be connected to ground at both ends, but in addition the
ground conductors at both ends of the cable must be bonded
together by a power ground cable (equipotential bonding cable) with
cross-sectional area of at least 10 mm2, or 10 times the area of the
signal cable shield, or to suit the electrical safety requirements of the
plant. This ensures that fault or surge current passes mainly through
the ground cable and not in the signal cable shield. If the building or The 485 option provides two parallel RJ45 connectors are provided
plant has a well-designed common bonded network this precaution allowing easy daisy chaining. The drive only supports MODBUS RTU
is not necessary. protocol. See Table 4-12 for the connection details.
3. Additional over-voltage suppression - for the analog and digital NOTE
inputs and outputs, a zener diode network or a commercially Standard Ethernet cables are not recommended for use when
available surge suppressor may be connected in parallel with the connecting drives on a 485 network as they do not have the correct
input circuit as shown in Figure 4-23 and Figure 4-24. twisted pairs for the pinout of the serial comms port; Shielded cable
If a digital port experiences a severe surge its protective trip may operate should be used.
(I/O Overload trip). For continued operation after such an event, the trip Table 4-12 Serial communication port pin-outs
can be reset automatically by setting Pr 10.034 to 5.
Pin Function
Figure 4-23 Surge suppression for digital and unipolar inputs and
1 120  Termination resistor (internally linked to pin 2)
outputs
2 RX TX (Receive / transmit line - positive)
Signal from plant Signal to drive
3 Isolated 0 V
4 +24 V (100 mA)
30V zener diode
e.g. 2xBZW50-15 5 Isolated 0 V
6 TX enable
0V 0V
7 RX\ TX\ (Receive / transmit line - negative)
Figure 4-24 Surge suppression for analog and bipolar inputs and 8 RX\ TX\ (if termination resistors are required, link to pin 1)
outputs Shell Isolated 0 V
Signal from plant Signal to drive
Minimum number of connections are 2, 3, 7 and shield.
4.7.1 Isolation of the 485 serial communications port
The serial PC communications port is double insulated and meets the
2 x 15V zener diode requirements for SELV in EN 50178:1998.
e.g. 2xBZW50-15
In order to meet the requirements for SELV in IEC60950 (IT
equipment) it is necessary for the control computer to be
grounded. Alternatively, when a lap-top or similar device is
0V 0V used which has no provision for grounding, an isolation
WARNING device must be incorporated in the communications lead.
Surge suppression devices are available as rail-mounting modules, e.g.
from Phoenix Contact:
Unipolar TT-UKK5-D/24 DC
Bipolar TT-UKK5-D/24 AC
These devices are not suitable for fast digital data networks because the
capacitance of the diodes adversely affects the signal. For data
networks, follow the specific recommendations for the particular
network.
Drive User Guide 57

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
An isolated serial communications lead has been designed to connect the drive to IT equipment (such as laptop computers), and is available from the
supplier of the drive. See below for details:
Table 4-13 Isolated serial comms lead details
Part number Description
TBC* USB to 485 Comms cable
The “isolated serial communications” lead has reinforced insulation as defined in IEC60950 for altitudes up to 3,000 m.
4.7.2 2 wire EIA-RS485 network
The diagram below shows the connections required for a 2 wire EIA-RS485 network, using a master controller with an EIA-RS485 port.
Figure 4-26 2 wire EIA-RS485 network connections
Master Slave Slave

Term
0V /Rx Rx /Tx Tx 0V /TxRx TxRx 0V /TxRx /TxRx TxRx
Resistor
3 7 2 3 7 8 1 2
1 2 3 4 5
Termination resistor Link for termination

resistors (if required)
NOTE
If more than one drive is connected to a host computer / PLC etc, each drive must have a unique serial address see Section 10.3 Slave address and
section 5.11 Communications on page 71.
If using the USB to 485 adaptor to monitor a network of drives, then the enable pin might also need to be connected between the drives.
Any number in the permitted range 1 to 247 may be used.
4.7.3 Routing of the cable
A data communications cable should not run parallel to any power cables, especially ones that connect drives to motors. If parallel runs are
unavoidable, ensure a minimum spacing of 300 mm (1 ft) between the communications cable and the power cable.
Cables crossing one another at right-angles are unlikely to give trouble. The maximum cable length for a EIA-RS485 jumper (link) is 1200 metres
(4,000 ft).
4.7.4 Termination
When a long-distance multi-drop EIA-RS485 system is used, the transmit and receive pairs should have a 120  termination resistor installed across
them in order to reduce signal reflections. The drive has an integral 120  resistor which can be installed by modifying the comms cable on the last
slave drive so that connections 1 and 8 are shorted together. The Master device may or may not have an integral termination resistor. However, at the
lower data rates noise reflections are not so critical. When used, this resistor should be installed at both ends of the network.
For correct operation of the EIA-RS485 network, the master controller should be designed to polarize the network by biasing the data lines either to
+5 V (RX and TX) or to 0V (/RX and /TX). This will prevent spurious triggering when the data lines are inactive.
4.8 Control connections

4.8.1 General
Table 4-14 The control connections consist of:
Function Qty Control parameters available Terminal number
Differential analog input 1 Mode, offset, invert, scaling 5, 6
Single ended analog input 2 Mode, offset, invert, scaling, destination 7, 8
Analog output 2 Source, mode, scaling, 9, 10
Digital input 3 Destination, invert, logic select 27, 28, 29
Input / output mode select, destination / source, invert,
Digital input / output 3 24, 25, 26
logic select
Relay 1 Source, invert 41, 42
Drive enable (Safe Torque Off) 1 31
+10 V User output 1 4
+24 V User output 1 Source, invert 22
0V common 6 1, 3, 11, 21, 23, 30
+24V External input 1 Destination, invert 2
58 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Key:
Destination parameter: Indicates the parameter which is being controlled by the terminal / function
Source parameter: Indicates the parameter being output by the terminal
Analog - indicates the mode of operation of the terminal, i.e. voltage 0-10 V, current 4-20 mA etc.
Mode parameter: Digital - indicates the mode of operation of the terminal, i.e. positive / negative logic (the Drive Enable terminal
is fixed in positive logic), open collector.
All analog terminal functions can be programmed in menu 7.
All digital terminal functions (including the relay) can be programmed in menu 8.
The control circuits are isolated from the power circuits in the drive by basic insulation (single insulation) only. The installer must ensure
that the external control circuits are insulated from human contact by at least one layer of insulation (supplementary insulation) rated for
use at the AC supply voltage.
WARNING
If the control circuits are to be connected to other circuits classified as Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) (e.g. to a personal computer), an
additional isolating barrier must be included in order to maintain the SELV classification.
WARNING
If any of the digital inputs (including the drive enable input) are connected in parallel with an inductive load (i.e. contactor) then suitable
suppression (i.e. diode or varistor) should be used on the coil of the load. If no suppression is used then over voltage spikes can cause
CAUTION
damage to the digital inputs and outputs on the drive.
Ensure the logic sense is correct for the control circuit to be used. Incorrect logic sense could cause the motor to be started unexpectedly.
Positive logic is the default state for the drive.
CAUTION
NOTE N
The Safe Torque Off drive enable terminal is a positive logic input only. It is not affected by the setting of Input Logic Polarity (08.029).
NOTE N
The common 0V from analog signals should, wherever possible, not be connected to the same 0V terminal as the common 0V from digital signals.
Terminals 3 and 11 should be used for connecting the 0V common of analog signals and terminals 21, 23 and 30 for digital signals. This is to prevent
small voltage drops in the terminal connections causing inaccuracies in the analog signals.
4.9 Drive specific Input/Output and control

4.9.1 Analog signals
• Analog input 1: (Terminals 5 and 22) Suction pressure sensor (18 bar)
• Analog input 2: (Terminals 7 and 22) Discharge pressure sensor (50 bar)
• Analog input 3: (Terminals 4, 8 and 11) 0-10 V Speed reference
NOTE
Refer to section 7.1.2 Settings for Analog Speed Command with Envelope Control on page 96 for information on adjusting the analog inputs for use
with non-default pressure sensor values.
4.9.2 Digital signals

Digital signals are used in controlling and resetting the drive:
• Digital output 1: (Terminals 24 and 22) Compressor on indication
• Digital input 2: (Terminals 25 and 22) Drive reset
• Digital input 3: (Terminals 26 and 22) Start / controlled stop
• Digital input 4: (Terminals 27 and 22) Stator heating on
• Digital input 5: (Terminals 28 and 22) Defrost control
• Digital input 6: (Terminals 29 and 22) User trip
Drive User Guide 59

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
4.9.3 Control terminal configuration diagram

Figure 4-27 Default terminal functions
Polarized
connectors
1 11
41 42
21 31
1 0 V common
2 External 24 V supply
(not used)
Suction
3 0 V common
Pressure sensor Signal
4-20 mA, 18 Bar 5 +AI1
6 - AI1
Discharge
Signal
Pressure sensor 7 AI2
4-20 mA, 50 Bar
+10 V 4 +10 V
Speed signal 0-10 V 8 AI3
Signal
GND
Optional 9 AO1
Optional 10 AO2
11 0 V common
21 0 V common
22 +24 V
23 0 V common
Compressor On 24 Digital I/O 1
Drive reset 25 Digital I/O 2

Start / controlled stop 26 Digital I/O 3
Stator heating On 27 Digital I/O 4
Defrost control 28 Digital I5

User trip 29 Digital I6
30 0 V common
Drive enable * 31
Pressure switch*
41 Relay
Drive OK
42 (Over voltage
category II)
* The Drive enable /Pressure switch terminal is a positive logic input only.
NOTE
When the drive is configured for analog / digital control mode (i.e. Pr 00.006 bit 8=0), a logic high signal on the Start / Controlled Stop pin 26 will turn
on the compressor; a logic low signal on pin 26 will initiate the controlled shutdown sequence.
Refer to Chapter 7 Running the compressor on page 96 for additional information on terminal configuration and for running the compressor.
60 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
4.9.4 Control terminal specification Precision reference Analog input 1 (Pressure sensor)
1 0V common
5 Non-inverting input
Common connection for all external
Function 6 Inverting input
devices
Default function Suction pressure sensor
2 +24V external input Bipolar differential analog voltage or
Type of input
current, thermistor input
To supply the control circuit
Function without providing a supply to the Mode controlled by: Pr 07.007
power stage*
Operating in Voltage mode
Can be switched on or off to act as a digital
Programmability input by setting the source Pr 08.063 and Full scale voltage range ±10 V ±2 %
input invert Pr 08.053 Maximum offset ±10 mV
Nominal voltage +24.0 Vdc Absolute maximum
±36 V relative to 0 V
Minimum continuous operating voltage range
+19.2 Vdc
voltage Working common mode voltage
Maximum continuous operating range
+30.0 Vdc
voltage Input resistance 100 k
Minimum start-up voltage 21.6 Vdc Monotonic Yes (including 0 V)
Recommended power supply 40 W 24 Vdc nominal Dead band None (including 0 V)
Recommended fuse 3 A, 50 Vdc Jumps None (including 0 V)
* Refer to terminals 51 and 52 for supplying the power stage for 24V Maximum offset 20 mV
operation on size 6 and 7 drives. Maximum non linearity 0.3% of input
Maximum gain asymmetry 0.5 %
Input filter bandwidth single pole ~3 kHz
3 0V common
Operating in current mode
Common connection for all external 0 to 20 mA ±5 %, 20 to 0 mA ±5 %,
Function Current ranges
devices 4 to 20 mA ±5 %, 20 to 4 mA ±5 %
Maximum offset 250 A
Absolute maximum voltage
4 +10V user output (reverse biased)
Function Supply for external analog devices Equivalent input resistance 300 
Voltage 10.2 V nominal Absolute maximum current ±30 mA
Voltage tolerance 1 % Operating in thermistor input mode (in conjunction with analog input 3)
Nominal output current 10 mA Internal pull-up voltage 2.5 V
Protection Current limit and trip @ 30 mA Trip threshold resistance User defined in Pr 07.048
Short-circuit detection resistance 50  ± 40 %
Common to all modes
Resolution 12 bits (11 bits plus sign)
250 µs with destinations Pr 01.036 or
Sample / update period
Pr 01.037. 4 ms for all other destinations.
Drive User Guide 61

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
7 Analog input 2 (Pressure sensor) 9 Analog output 1 (Optional)

Default function Discharge pressure sensor 10 Analog output 2 (Optional)
Bipolar single-ended analog voltage or
Type of input Not used
unipolar current Terminal 9 default function
Mode controlled by... Pr 07.011 Terminal 10 default function Not used
Operating in voltage mode Type of output Bipolar single-ended analog voltage
Full scale voltage range ±10 V ±2 % Operating in Voltage mode (default)
Maximum offset ±10 mV Voltage range ±10 V ±5 %
Maximum offset ±120 mV

Absolute maximum voltage range ±36 V relative to 0 V
Maximum output current ±20 mA
Input resistance ≥100 k 
Load resistance ≥1 k 
Operating in current mode
Protection 20 mA max. Short circuit protection
0 to 20 mA ±5 %, 20 to 0 mA ±5 %,
Current ranges
4 to 20 mA ±5 %, 20 to 4 mA ±5 % Common to all modes
Maximum offset 250 A Resolution 10-bit
Absolute maximum voltage
±36 V relative to 0V 250 µs (output will only change at update
(reverse bias) Sample / update period
the rate of the source parameter if slower)
Absolute maximum current ±30 mA
Equivalent input resistance ≤ 300 

11 0V common
Common to all modes
Resolution 12 bits (11 bits plus sign) Function
devices
Sample / update
21 0V common
Function
devices
Analog input 3 (Speed signal) /
8
DLT (in Modbus control mode)
Default function Analog mode: Speed signal (0 - 10) 22 +24 V user output (selectable)
Bipolar single-ended analog voltage, or Terminal 22 default function +24 V user output
Type of input
thermistor input
Mode controlled by... Pr 07.015 Can be switched on or off to act as a fourth
digital output (positive logic only) by setting
Operating in Voltage mode (default) Programmability
the source Pr 08.028 and source invert
Voltage range ±10 V ±2 % Pr 08.018
Maximum offset ±10 mV

Nominal output current 100 mA combined with DIO3
Absolute maximum voltage range ±36 V relative to 0 V 100 mA
Maximum output current
200 mA (total including all Digital I/O)
Input resistance ≥100 k  Protection Current limit and trip
Operating in thermistor input mode 2 ms when configured as an output (output
Refer to Climate application engineering Sample / update period will only change at the update rate of the
Supported thermistor types source parameter if slower)
bulletin for additional information.
Internal pull-up voltage 2.5 V
Trip threshold resistance User defined in Pr 07.048 23 0V common

Reset resistance User defined in Pr 07.048 Function
devices
Short-circuit detection resistance 50  ± 40 %
Common to all modes

Resolution 12 bits (11 bits plus sign)

Sample / update period
62 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
24 Digital I/O 1 (Compressor On) 29 Digital Input 6 (User trip)
25 Digital I/O 2 (Drive reset) Terminal 29 default function User Trip

Type Negative or positive logic digital inputs
26 Digital I/O 3 (Start / Controlled stop)
Logic mode controlled by... Pr 08.029
Terminal 24 default function Compressor on
Terminal 25 default function Drive Reset Voltage range 0 V to +24 V
Terminal 26 default function Start / Controlled stop

Absolute maximum applied
-3 V to +30 V
voltage range
Positive or negative logic digital inputs,
Type >2 mA @15 V from IEC 61131-2, type 1,
positive logic voltage source outputs Impedance
6.6 k 
Input thresholds 10 V ±0.8 V from IEC 61131-2, type 1
Input / output mode controlled by... Pr 08.031, Pr 08.032 and Pr 08.033 Sample / Update period 2 ms when configured as an input.
Operating as an input
Logic mode controlled by... Pr 08.029 30 0V common
Absolute maximum applied Function
-3 V to +30 V devices
voltage range
Refer to section 4.10 Safe Torque Off (STO) on page 64 for further
>2 mA @15 V from IEC 61131-2, type 1, information.
Impedance
6.6 k 
31 Safe Torque Off function (drive enable)
Operating as an output Type Positive logic only digital input
100 mA (DIO1 & 2 combined) Voltage range 0 V to +24 V
Nominal maximum output current 100 mA (DIO3 & 24 V User Output
Absolute maximum applied
Combined) 30 V
voltage
100 mA Logic Threshold 10 V ± 5 V
Maximum output current
200 mA (total including all Digital I/O) Low state maximum voltage for
5V
disable to SIL3 and PL e
Common to all modes >4 mA @15 V from IEC 61131-2, type 1,
Impedance
Voltage range 0 V to +24 V 3.3 k 
Low state maximum current for
0.5 mA
disable to SIL3 and PL e
2 ms when configured as an output
Sample / Update period (output will only change at the update rate Nominal: 8 ms
Response time
of the source parameter). Maximum: 20 ms
The Safe Torque Off function may be used in a safety-related application in

preventing the drive from generating torque in the motor to a high level of
integrity. The system designer is responsible for ensuring that the complete
27 Digital Input 4 (Stator Heating ON) system is safe and designed correctly according to the relevant safety
standards. If the Safe Torque Off function is not required, this terminal is used
28 Digital Input 5 (Defrost Control) for enabling the drive.
Terminal 27 default function Stator Heating ON

Terminal 28 default function Defrost Control
41
Type Negative or positive logic digital inputs Relay contacts (Drive OK)
42
Default function Drive OK indicator
Logic mode controlled by... Pr 08.029
240 Vac, Installation over-voltage
Contact voltage rating
category II
Voltage range 0 V to +24 V
2 A AC 240 V
Absolute maximum applied Contact maximum current rating 4 A DC 30 V resistive load
-3 V to +30 V
voltage range 0.5 A DC 30 V inductive load (L/R = 40 ms)
>2 mA @15 V from IEC 61131-2, type 1, Contact minimum recommended

Impedance 12 V 100 mA
6.6 k  rating

Contact type Normally open
600 µs when configured as an input with

Sample / Update period destination Pr 06.029. 2 ms in all other Default contact condition Closed when power applied and drive OK
cases.
Update period 4 ms
Drive User Guide 63

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Safety Parameters as verified by TüV Rheinland:

51 0V
52 +24 Vdc* According to IEC 61508-1 to 07 / EN 61800-5-2 / EN 62061
Nominal operating voltage 24.0 Vdc Percentage of SIL

Type Value
3 allowance
Minimum continuous operating voltage 18.6 Vdc
Proof test interval 20 years
Maximum continuous operating voltage 28.0 Vdc
High demand or a continuous mode of operation
Minimum startup voltage 18.4 Vdc PFH (1/h) 4.21 x 10-11 1/h <1 %
Maximum power supply requirement 40 W Low demand mode of operation (not EN 61800-5-2)
Recommended fuse 4 A @ 50 Vdc

PFDavg 3.68 x 10-6 <1%
* An external 24V connection is required for 24V operation for size 6 and According to EN ISO 13849-1
7 drives. Type Value Classification
Category 4
To prevent the risk of a fire hazard in the event of a fault, a Performance Level (PL) e
fuse or other over-current protection must be installed in the MTTFD >2500 years High
relay circuit.
WARNING DCavg ≥99 % High
Mission time 20 years
4.10 Safe Torque Off (STO)
NOTE
The Safe Torque Off function provides a means for preventing the drive
from generating torque in the motor, with a very high level of integrity. It Logic levels comply with IEC 61131-2:2007 for type 1 digital inputs rated
is suitable for incorporation into a safety system for a machine. It is also at 24 V. Maximum level for logic low to achieve SIL3 and PL e 5 V and
suitable for use as a conventional drive enable input. 0.5 mA.
The safety function is active when the Safe Torque Off (STO) input is in The Safe Torque Off function can be used to eliminate electro-
the logic-low state as specified in the control terminal specification. The mechanical contactors, including special safety contactors, which would
function is defined according to EN 61800-5-2 and IEC 61800-5-2 as otherwise be required for safety applications.
follows. (In these standards a drive offering safety-related functions is For further information contact the supplier of the drive.
referred to as a PDS(SR)):
UL Approval
Power that can cause rotation (or motion in the case of a linear motor) is The Safe Torque Off function has been independently assessed by
not applied to the motor. The PDS(SR) will not provide energy to the Underwriters Laboratories (UL). The on-line certification (yellow card)
motor which can generate torque (or force in the case of a linear motor). reference is: FSPC.E171230.
This safety function corresponds to an uncontrolled stop in accordance Safety Parameters as verified by UL:
with stop category 0 of IEC 60204-1.
According to IEC 61508-1 to 7
The Safe Torque Off function makes use of the special property of an
Type Value
inverter drive with an induction motor, which is that torque cannot be
generated without the continuous correct active behaviour of the inverter Safety Rating SIL 3
circuit. All credible faults in the inverter power circuit cause a loss of SFF > 99 %
torque generation.
PFH (1/h) 4.43 x 10-10 1/h (<1 % of SIL 3
The Safe Torque Off function is fail-safe, so when the Safe Torque Off allowance)
input is disconnected the drive will not operate the motor, even if a HFT 1
combination of components within the drive has failed. Most component Beta Factor 2%
failures are revealed by the drive failing to operate. Safe Torque Off is
CCF Not applicable
also independent of the drive firmware. This meets the requirements of
the following standards, for the prevention of operation of the motor.
According to EN ISO 13849-1
Machinery Applications
Type Value
The Safe Torque Off function has been independently assessed by
Category 4
Notified Body, TüV Rheinland for use as a safety component of a
machine: Performance Level (PL) e
MTTFD 2574 years
Prevention of unintended motor operation: The safety function "Safe
Torque Off" can be used in applications up to Cat 4. PL e according to Diagnostic coverage High
EN ISO 13849-1, SIL 3 according to EN 61800-5-2/ EN 62061/ IEC CCF 65
61508, and in lift applications according to EN 81-1 and EN81-2.
Note on response time of Safe Torque Off, and use with safety
controllers with self-testing outputs:
Type examination
Date of issue Models Safe Torque Off has been designed to have a response time of greater
certificate number
than 1 ms so that it is compatible with safety controllers whose outputs
01.205/5270.01/14 11-11-2014 EVC are subject to a dynamic test with a pulse width not exceeding 1 ms.
This certificate is available for download from the TüV Rheinland website
at: http://www.tuv.com
64 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
When the drive is disabled through Safe Torque Off, a possible (although
highly unlikely) failure mode is for two power devices in the inverter
circuit to conduct incorrectly.
The design of safety-related control systems must only be

done by personnel with the required training and experience.
The Safe Torque Off function will only ensure the safety of a
machine if it is correctly incorporated into a complete safety
WARNING
system. The system must be subject to a risk assessment to
confirm that the residual risk of an unsafe event is at an
acceptable level for the application.
Safe Torque Off does not provide electrical isolation.

The supply to the drive must be disconnected by an approved
isolation device before gaining access to power connections.
WARNING
With Safe Torque Off there are no single faults in the drive which can
permit the motor to be driven. Therefore it is not necessary to have a
second channel to interrupt the power connection, nor a fault detection
circuit.
It is important to note that a single short-circuit from the Safe Torque Off
input to a DC supply of > 5 V could cause the drive to be enabled. This
can be excluded under EN ISO 13849-2 by the use of protected wiring.
The wiring can be protected by either of the following methods:
• By placing the wiring in a segregated cable duct or other enclosure.
or
• By providing the wiring with a grounded shield in a positive-logic

grounded control circuit. The shield is provided to avoid a hazard from
an electrical fault. It may be grounded by any convenient method; no
special EMC precautions are required.
It is essential to observe the maximum permitted voltage of

5 V for a safe low (disabled) state of Safe Torque Off. The
connections to the drive must be arranged so that voltage
drops in the 0V wiring cannot exceed this value under any
WARNING
loading condition. It is strongly recommended that the Safe
Torque Off circuit be provided with a dedicated 0V conductor
which should be connected to terminal 30 at the drive.
Safe Torque Off over-ride
The drive does not provide any facility to over-ride the Safe Torque Off
function, for example for maintenance purposes.
Drive User Guide 65

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
5 Getting started Table 5-2 Active action icon

Row Priority
This chapter introduces the user interfaces, menu structure and security Active action icon Description
(1=top) in row
levels of the drive.
Accessing non-volatile
1 1
5.1 Understanding the display media card
The keypad can only be mounted on the drive. Alarm active 1 2

5.1.1 KI-Keypad
The KI-Keypad display consists of two rows of text. The upper row Keypad real-time clock
1 3
shows the drive status or the menu and parameter number currently battery low
being viewed. The lower row of the display line shows the parameter or Drive security active and
value or the specific trip type. The last two characters on the first row 1 4
locked or unlocked
may display special indications. If more than one of these indications is
active then the indications are prioritized as shown in Table 5-2.
When the drive is powered up the lower row will show the power up 5.2 Keypad operation
parameter defined by Parameter Displayed At Power-Up (11.022).
Figure 5-1 KI-Keypad
5.2.1 Control buttons
The keypad consists of:
• Navigation Keys - Used to navigate the parameter structure and
change parameter values.
• Enter / Mode button - Used to toggle between parameter edit and
view mode.
• Escape / Exit button - Used to exit from parameter edit or view
mode. In parameter edit mode, if parameter values are edited and
the exit button pressed the parameter value will be restored to the
value it had on entry to edit mode.
• Auxiliary button 2 - Not used.
• Auxiliary button 1 - Not used.
• Stop / Reset button - Used to reset the drive. In keypad mode can be
used for 'Stop'.
NOTE
Low battery voltage is indicated by low battery symbol on the keypad

display. Refer to section 3.12.1 Real time clock battery replacement on
page 39 for information on battery replacement.
Figure 5-2 overleaf shows an example on moving between menus and

editing parameters.
1. Escape button
2. Auxiliary button 1
3. Auxiliary button 2
4. Navigation keys (x4)
5. Stop / Reset (red) button
6. Enter button
NOTE
The red stop button is also used to reset the drive.
The parameter value is correctly displayed in the lower row of the

keypad display, see table below.
Table 5-1 Keypad display formats
Display formats Value
IP Address 127.000.000.000
MAC Address 01ABCDEF2345
Time 12:34:56
Date 31-12-11 or 12-31-11
Version number 01.02.02.00
Character ABCD
32 bit number with decimal point 21474836.47
16 bit binary number 0100001011100101
66 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Figure 5-2 Display modes
Status
Mode
Timeout Timeout Timeout

To enter Parameter or
Mode, press key or Press key
To return to Status Mode,
Press key
Parameter
When returning
Mode
to Parameter
Mode use the
Temporary
Parameter
Mode
To select parameter
Press
keys to select
another parameter
to change, if
required
To return to Parameter Mode,
Press key to keep the new parameter value
Press key to ignore the new parameter value and return
the parameter to the pre-edited value
To enter Edit Mode,

press key,
RO R/W
parameter parameter
Edit Mode
( is displayed)
(Character to be edited in lower line of display flashing)
Change parameter values using keys.
NOTE
The navigation keys can only be used to move between menus if Pr 00.077 has been set to show 'All Menus'. Refer to section 5.8 Parameter access
level and security on page 70.
5.2.2 Quick access mode 5.2.3 Keypad shortcuts
The quick access mode allows direct access to any parameter without In ‘parameter mode’:
scrolling through menus and parameters.
• If the up and down keypad buttons are pressed
To enter the quick access mode, press and hold the Enter button together, then the keypad display will jump to the start of the
on the keypad while in ‘parameter mode’. parameter menu being viewed, i.e. Pr 05.005 being viewed, when
Figure 5-3 Quick access mode the above buttons pressed together will jump to Pr 05.000.
• If the left and right keypad buttons are pressed together,
then the keypad display will jump to the last viewed parameter in
Menu 0.
Go to parameter
In ‘parameter edit mode’:
• If the up and down keypad buttons are pressed

together, then the parameter value of the parameter being edited will
be set to 0.
• If the left and right keypad buttons are pressed together, the
least significant digit (furthest right) will be selected on the keypad
display for editing.
Drive User Guide 67

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Figure 5-4 Mode examples 5.3 Menu structure

The drive parameter structure consists of menus and parameters.
1 2
The drive initially powers up so that only Menu 0 can be viewed. The up
and down arrow buttons are used to navigate between parameters and
once Pr 00.077 has been set to 'All Menus' the left and right buttons are
used to navigate between menus. For further information, refer to
section 5.8 Parameter access level and security on page 70
Figure 5-5 Parameter navigation
* *
3 4
* Can only be used to move between menus if all menus have

been enabled (Pr 00.077). Refer to section 5.8 Parameter
access level and security on page 70.
The menus and parameters roll over in both directions.

i.e. if the last parameter is displayed, a further press will cause the
display to rollover and show the first parameter.
When changing between menus the drive remembers which parameter
was last viewed in a particular menu and thus displays that parameter.
1. Parameter view mode: Read write or Read only Figure 5-6 Menu structure
2. Status mode: Drive OK status
If the drive is ok and the parameters are not being edited or viewed, the
upper row of the display will show one of the following:
• ‘Inhibit’, ‘Ready’ or ‘Run’.
3. Status mode: Trip status Menu 41
Menu 0 Menu 1 M
enu 2
When the drive is in trip condition, the upper row of the display will
....MM.000....
indicate that the drive has tripped and the lower row of the display will 41.029
01.050
show the trip code. For further information regarding trip codes. refer to 41.028 00.050
00.049 01.049
41.027
Table 12-10 Trip indications on page 195. 41.026 00.048 01.048
41.025 00.047 01.047
4. Status mode: Alarm status 00.046 01.046
Option module menus (S.mm.ppp)*
During an ‘alarm’ condition the upper row of the display flashes between
the drive status (Inhibit, Ready or Run, depending on what is displayed)
and the alarm. Moves
between
parameters
Do not change parameter values without careful

consideration; incorrect values may cause damage or a
safety hazard.
WARNING
NOTE 41.005
00.005 01.005
When changing the values of parameters, make a note of the new 41.004
41.003 00.004 01.004
values in case they need to be entered again. 41.002 00.003 01.003
41.001 00.002 01.002
00.001 01.001
NOTE
For new parameter-values to apply after the line power supply to the
drive is interrupted, new values must be saved. Refer to section
5.6 Saving parameters on page 70. Moves between Menus
* The option module menus (S.mm.ppp) are only displayed if option

modules are installed. Where S signifies the option module slot number
and the mm.ppp signifies the menu and the parameter number of the
option module's internal menus and parameter.
68 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
5.4 Menu 0 5.5.1 KI-Keypad set-up menu

Menu 0 is used to bring together various commonly used parameters for To enter the keypad set-up menu press and hold the escape
basic easy set up of the drive. The parameters displayed in Menu 0 can button on the keypad from status mode. All the keypad parameters are
be configured in Menu 22. saved to the keypad non-volatile memory when exiting from the keypad
Appropriate parameters are copied from the advanced menus into Menu set-up menu.
0 and thus exist in both locations.
To exit from the keypad set-up menu press the escape or or
For further information, refer to Chapter 6 Compressor specific
functions on page 73. button. Below are the keypad set-up parameters.
Figure 5-7 Menu 0 copying
Table 5-4 KI-Keypad set-up parameters
Menu 2 Parameters Range Type
Keypad.01 Language selection English (1) RW
02.021 5 Keypad.02 Show parameter units OFF (0), On (1) RW
Menu 0 Keypad.03 Backlight level 0 to 100 % RW
01.01.10 to
Menu 1 Keypad.04* Keypad real-time clock date RO
00.004 5 31.12.99
00.005 0
00.006 150 00:00:00 to
Keypad.05* Keypad real-time clock time RO
01.014 0 23:59:59
00.00.00.00 to
Menu 4 Keypad.06 Keypad software version RO
99.99.99.99
* These parameters are only displayed on the KI-Keypad RTC.
04.007 150
NOTE
It is not possible to access the keypad parameters via any
communications channel.
5.5 Advanced menus 5.5.2 Display messages

The advanced menus consist of groups or parameters appropriate to a The following tables indicate the various possible mnemonics which can
specific function or feature of the drive. Menus 0 to 41 can be viewed on be displayed by the drive and their meaning.
the KI-Keypad. The option module menus (S.mm.ppp) are only Table 5-5 Status indications
displayed if option modules are installed. Where S signifies the option
Drive
module slot number and the mm.ppp signifies the menu and parameter Upper row
Description output
number of the option module’s internal menus and parameter. string
stage
Table 5-3 Advanced menu descriptions
The drive is inhibited and cannot be run.
Menu Description The Safe Torque Off signal is not applied to
Commonly used basic set up parameters for quick / easy Safe Torque Off terminals or Pr 06.015 is
0 Inhibit Disabled
programming set to 0. The other conditions that can
prevent the drive from enabling are shown
1 Frequency / Speed reference
as bits in Enable Conditions (06.010)
2 Ramps
The drive is ready to run. The drive enable
3 Speed feedback and speed control
Ready is active, but the drive inverter is not active Disabled
4 Torque and current control because the final drive run is not active
5 Motor control Stop The drive is stopped / holding zero speed Enabled
6 Sequencer and clock Run The drive is active and running Enabled
7 Analog I/O Supply Loss Supply loss condition has been detected Enabled
8 Digital I/O
The motor is being decelerated to zero
10 Status and trips Deceleration speed / frequency because the final drive Enabled
11 Drive set-up and identification, serial communications run has been deactivated
15 Option module slot 1 set-up menu The drive has tripped and no longer
16 Option module slot 2 set-up menu Trip controlling the motor. The trip code Disabled
17 Option module slot 3 set-up menu appears in the lower display
18 Reserved menu The Regen unit is enabled and
Active Enabled
19 Reserved menu synchronized to the supply
20 Reserved menu Under The drive is in the under voltage state
Disabled
Voltage either in low voltage or high voltage mode
22 Menu 0 set-up
21 Reserved menu Heat The motor pre-heat function is active Enabled
23 Reserved menu
28 Reserved menu
29 Compressor specific functions
Slot 1 Slot 1 option menus*
*Only displayed when the option modules are installed.
Drive User Guide 69

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
5.5.3 Alarm indications 5.6 Saving parameters

An alarm is an indication given on the display by alternating the alarm When changing a parameter in Menu 0, the new value is saved when
string with the drive status string on the upper row and showing the
alarm symbol in the last character in the upper row. Alarms strings are pressing the Enter button to return to parameter view mode from
not displayed when a parameter is being edited, but the user will still see parameter edit mode.
the alarm character on the upper row. If parameters have been changed in the advanced menus, then the
change will not be saved automatically. A save function must be carried
Table 5-6 Alarm indications out.
Alarm string Description
Regen inductor overload. Inductor Protection
5.7 Restoring parameter defaults
Accumulator (04.019) in the drive has reached Restoring parameter defaults by this method saves the default values in
Ind Overload
75.0 % of the value at which the drive will trip and the drives memory. User Security Status (00.077) and User security
the load on the drive is >100 %. code (11.030) are not affected by this procedure).
Drive over temperature. Percentage Of Drive Procedure
Drive Overload Thermal Trip Level (07.036) in the drive is greater 1. Ensure the drive is not enabled, i.e. terminal 31 is open or Pr 06.015
than 90 %. is OFF (0)
Limit switch active. Indicates that a limit switch is 2. Select 'Reset 50 Hz Defs' or 'Reset 60 Hz Defs' in Pr mm.000.
Limit Switch (alternatively, enter 1233 (50 Hz settings) or 1244 (60 Hz settings) in
active and that is causing the motor to be stopped.
Pr mm.000).
3. Either:
Table 5-7 Option module and NV media card and other status • Press the red reset button
indications at power-up • Toggle the reset digital input or cycle drive power
First row Carry out a drive reset through serial communications by setting
Second row string Status Pr 10.038 to 100.
string
This method of saving parameters will not work if the drive is in any
Booting Parameters Parameters are being loaded tripped state (i.e. when the red status LED is blinking). To save
parameters when the drive is in a tripped state write '1001' into MM.000
Drive parameters are being loaded from a NV Media Card
5.8 Parameter access level and security
Booting User Program User program being loaded
The parameter access level determines whether the user has access to
Menu 0 only or to all the advanced menus (Menus 1 to 41) in addition to
User program is being loaded from a NV Media Card to the drive
Menu 0.
Option The User Security determines whether the access to the user is read
Booting User program being loaded
Program only or read write.
User program is being loaded from a NV Media Card to the option Both the User Security and Parameter Access Level can operate
module in slot X independently of each other as shown in table Table 5-8.
Data being written to NV Media
Writing To NV Card Table 5-8 Parameter access level and security
Card
Data is being written to a NV Media Card to ensure that its copy of the User
drive parameters is correct because the drive is in Auto or Boot mode security User Menu 0 Advanced
Access level
status security status menu status
Waiting For Power System Waiting for power stage (11.044)
The drive is waiting for the processor in the power stage to respond Open RW Not visible
0 Menu 0
after power-up. Verify that external 24V is connected to terminals 51 & Closed RO Not visible
52 on size 6 and 7 drives. Open RW RW
1 All Menus
Waiting For Options Waiting for an option module Closed RO RO
Read-only Open RO Not visible
2
The drive is waiting for the options modules to respond after power-up Menu 0 Closed RO Not visible
Uploading Open RO RO
Options Loading parameter database 3 Read-only
From Closed RO RO
At power-up it may be necessary to update the parameter database Open Not visible Not visible
4 Status only
held by the drive because an option module has changed or because Closed Not visible Not visible
an applications module has requested changes to the parameter Open Not visible Not visible
structure. This may involve data transfer between the drive an option 5 No access
Closed Not visible Not visible
modules. During this period ‘Uploading From Options’ is displayed
The default settings of the drive are Parameter Access Level Menu 0
and user Security Open i.e. read / write access to Menu 0 with the
advanced menus not visible.
70 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
5.8.1 User Security Level / Access Level 5.9 Displaying parameters with non-
The drive provides a number of different levels of security that can be set
by the user via User Security Status (11.044); these are shown in the
default values only
table below. By selecting 'Show non-default' in Pr mm.000 (Alternatively, enter 12000
in Pr mm.000), the only parameters that will be visible to the user will be
User Security those containing a non-default value. This function does not require a
Status Description drive reset to become active. In order to deactivate this function, return
(Pr 11.044) to Pr mm.000 and select 'No action' (alternatively enter a value of 0).
All writable parameters are available to be edited Please note that this function can be affected by the access level
Menu 0 (0) enabled, refer to section 5.8 Parameter access level and security on
but only parameters in Menu 0 are visible
All parameters are visible and all writable page 70 for further information regarding access level.
All menus (1)
parameters are available to be edited
5.10 Displaying destination parameters only
Read- only Access is limited to Menu 0 parameters only. All
Menu 0 (2) parameters are read-only By selecting 'Destinations' in Pr mm.000 (Alternatively enter 12001 in
Pr mm.000), the only parameters that will be visible to the user will be
All parameters are read-only however all menus
Read-only (3) destination parameters. This function does not require a drive reset to
and parameters are visible
become active. In order to deactivate this function, return to Pr mm.000
The keypad remains in status mode and no
Status only (4) and select 'No action' (alternatively enter a value of 0).
parameters can be viewed or edited
Please note that this function can be affected by the access level
The keypad remains in status mode and no
enabled, refer to section 5.8 Parameter access level and security on
parameters can be viewed or edited. Drive
No access (5) page 70 for further information regarding access level.
parameters cannot be accessed via a comms/
fieldbus interface in the drive or any option module
5.11 Communications
5.8.2 Changing the User Security Level /Access
The drive offers a 2 wire EIA 485 interface. This enables the drive set-
Level
up, operation and monitoring to be carried out with a PC or controller if
The security level is determined by the setting of Pr 00.077 {11.044}.
required.
The Security Level can be changed through the keypad even if the User
Security Code has been set. 5.11.1 EIA-485 Serial communications
The EIA-485 option provides two parallel RJ45 connectors allowing easy
5.8.3 User Security Code
daisy chaining. The drive only supports MODBUS RTU protocol.
The User Security Code, when set, prevents write access to any of the
parameters in any menu. The serial communications port of the drive is a RJ45 socket, which is
Setting User Security Code isolated from the power stage and the other control terminals (see
Enter a value between 1 and 2147483647 in Pr 11.030 and press the section 4.7 Communications connections on page 57 for connection and
isolation details).
button; the security code has now been set to this value. In order
to activate the security, the Security level must be set to desired level in The communications port applies a 2 unit load to the communications
Pr 00.077. When the drive is reset, the security code will have been network.
USB/EIA-232 to EIA-485 Communications
activated and the drive returns to Menu 0 and the symbol is
An external USB/EIA-232 hardware interface such as a PC cannot be
displayed in the right hand corner of the keypad display. The value of used directly with the 2-wire EIA-485 interface of the drive. Therefore a
Pr 11.030 will return to 0 in order to hide the security code. suitable converter is required.
Unlocking User Security Code Suitable USB to EIA-485 and EIA-232 to EIA-485 isolated converters are
Select a parameter that need to be edited and press the button, available as follows:
the upper display will now show ‘Security Code’. Use the arrow buttons • USB to 485 Comms cable (Part No. TBC*)
to set the security code and press the button. With the correct • EIA-232 Comms cable (Part No. TBC*)
security code entered, the display will revert to the parameter selected in * Part numbers were not available at time of printing. Please contact
edit mode. your Emerson Climate Technologies application engineer when ordering
parts.
If an incorrect security code is entered, the following message ‘Incorrect
security code’ is displayed, then the display will revert to parameter view NOTE
mode. When using the EIA-232 Comms cable the available baud rate is limited
to 19.2 k baud.
Disabling User Security
Unlock the previously set security code as detailed above. Set Pr 11.030 When using one of the above converters or any other suitable converter
to 0 and press the button. The User Security has now been with the drive, it is recommended that no terminating resistors be
disabled, and will not have to be unlocked each time the drive is connected on the network. It may be necessary to 'link out' the
powered up to allow read / write access to the parameters. terminating resistor within the converter depending on which type is
used. The information on how to link out the terminating resistor will
normally be contained in the user information supplied with the
converter.
Drive User Guide 71

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Serial communications set-up parameters Serial Baud Rate (Pr 11.025)

The following parameters need to be set according to the system This parameter defines the baud rate used by the serial comms
requirements.
interface.
Serial Address (Pr 11.023)
Value Text
This parameter defines the serial address and an addresses between 1
and 247 are permitted. 0 300
Changing the parameters does not immediately change the serial 1 600
communications settings. See note below for more details. 2 1200
Serial Mode (Pr 11.024) 3 2400
This parameter defines the data format used by the EIA485 comms port 4 4800
5 9600
on the drive.
6 (Default) 19200
Value Text
7 38400
0 (Default) 8 2 NP
8 57600
1 8 1 NP
9 76800
2 8 1 EP
10 115200
3 8 1 OP
Changing the parameters does not immediately change the serial
4 8 2 NP M
communications settings. See note below for more details.
5 8 1 NP M
Minimum Comms Transmit Delay (Pr 11.026)
6 8 1 EP M
There will always be a finite delay between the end of a message from
7 8 1 OP M
the host (master) and the time at which the host is ready to receive the
8 7 2 NP response from the drive (slave). The drive does not respond until at least
9 7 1 NP 1ms after the message has been received from the host allowing 1ms for
10 7 1 EP the host to change from transmit to receive mode. This initial delay can
be extended using Minimum Comms Transmit Delay (Pr 11.026) if
11 7 1 OP
required.
12 7 2 NP M
13 7 1 NP M Value Action
14 7 1 EP M The transmitters are turned on and data transmission
0
15 7 1 OP M begins immediately after the initial delay (≥1 ms)
The transmitters are turned on after the initial delay
The bits in the value of Serial Mode (Pr 11.024) define the data format as 1
(≥1ms) and data transmission begins 1ms later
follows.: The transmitters are turned on after a delay of at least
Bits 3 2 1 and 0 2 or more the time specified by Minimum Comms Transmit Delay
(Pr 11.026) and data transmission begins 1ms later
Stop bits and Parity
Number of The drive holds its own transmitters active for up to 1 ms after it has
Register mode 0 = 2 stop bits, no parity
data bits transmitted data before switching to the receive mode; the host should
Format 0 = Standard 1 = 1 stop bit, no parity
0 = 8 bits not send any data during this time.
1 = Modified 2 = 1 stop bit, even parity
1 = 7 bits
3 = 1 stop bit, odd parity Changing the parameters does not immediately change the serial
communications settings See note below for more details.
Bit 3 is always 0 in the core product as 8 data bits are required for
MODBUS RTU. Silent Period (Pr 11.027)
Bit 2 selects either standard or modified register mode. The menu and The silent period defines the idle time required to detect the end of a
parameter numbers are derived for each mode as given in the table received data message. If Silent Period (Pr 11.027) = 0 then the silent
below. Standard mode is the default setting and allows up to 99 period is at least 3.5 characters at the selected baud rate. This is the
parameters to be accessed within a menu. Modified mode is provided to standard silent period for MODBUS RTU. If Silent Period (Pr 11.027) is
non-zero it defines the minimum silent period in milliseconds.
allow register numbers up to 255 to be addressed.
Register mode Register address communications settings. See note below for more details.
Standard (mm x 100) + ppp - 1 where mm ≤ 162 and ppp ≤ 99 NOTE
Modified (mm x 256) + ppp - 1 where mm ≤ 63 and ppp ≤ 255 When Serial Address (Pr 11.023), Serial Mode (Pr 11.024), Serial Baud
This parameter can be changed via the drive keypad, or via the comms Rate (Pr 11.025), Minimum Comms Transmit Delay (Pr 11.026) or Silent
interface itself. Changing the parameters does not immediately change Period (Pr 11.027) are modified the changes do not have an immediate
the serial communications settings. See note below for more details. effect on the serial communications system. The new values are used
after the next power-up or if Reset Serial Communications (Pr 11.020) is
set to one. Reset Serial Communications (Pr 11.020) is automatically
cleared to zero after the communications system is updated.
This does not save any changes made and a separate parameter save
is required.
72 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics

6.1 Menu 0 - compressor specific parameters
Menu 0 is used to bring together all the compressor specific parameters for easy basic setup of the drive. All of the parameters in menu 0 appear in
other menus in the drive (denoted by {…}). Where control is via 485 serial communications, refer to Chapter 10 MODBUS RTU on page 169.
Table 6-1 Menu 0: Compressor specific parameters
Data size
Parameter Range Default Mapping
(bits)
00.001 Enable conditions 06.010 16
00.002 Software system state 0 - 65535 29.060 16
00.003 Condition alerts 0 - 255 0 29.003 16
00.004 Condition warnings 0 - 255 0 29.004 16
00.005 Compressor Specific Trip 0 - 255 0 29.002 16
00.006 Configuration control parameter 0 - 32767 0 29.011 16
00.007 System control word 0 - 32767 0 29.012 16
00.008 User speed reference 0 - 7200 rpm 1800 rpm 29.017 16
00.009 Speed reference after envelope control 0 - 7200 rpm 0 rpm 29.018 16
00.010 Final Speed reference {03.001} 0 - 7200 rpm 0 rpm 29.019 16
00.011 Speed feedback (estimated) {03.002} 1 - 10000 rpm 1 rpm 29.020 16
00.013 Condenser pressure 0 - 650 250 29.043 16
00.014 Evaporator pressure 0 - 650 80 29.044 16
00.015 DC Bus Voltage ±VM_DC_VOLTAGE V 05.005 16
00.016 Drive output frequency {05.001} ±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF 05.001 16
00.017 Drive output voltage ±VM_AC_VOLTAGE V 05.002 16
00.018 Drive output power {05.003} ±VM_POWER kW 29.055 16
±VM_DRIVE_CURRENT_
00.019 Total Current {04.001} 29.056 16
UNIPOLAR A
00.020 Torque producing current {04.002} ±VM_DRIVE_CURRENT A 29.057 16
00.021 Accumulated Energy kW ±99.99 kWh 06.026 16
00.022 Accumulated Energy MW -999.9 to 999.0 MWh 06.025 16
00.023 DLT (Discharge line temperature) -40 to 330 °F 0 °F 29.045 16
00.024 Inverter temperature ±250 °C 07.034 16
00.025 DLT over temperature fault count 0-4 0 29.047 16
00.026 Locked Rotor Failure start count 30 - 400 100 29.054 16
00.027 Number of soft-start attempts 0-3 0 29.016 16
00.028 Short cycle count 0-4 0 29.040 16
00.029 Trip 0 0 - 255 10.020 16
00.030 Last trip time {10.042} 0 - 2359 0 29.008 16
00.031 Last trip date {10.041} 0 - 3112 29.009 16
00.032 Soft-start speed {01.021} 1500 - 7200 rpm 3600 rpm 29.013 16
00.033 Soft start acceleration {02.011} 1 - 3 s/1000 rpm 1.0 rpm 29.014 16
00.034 Soft-start dwell time 60 - 300 s 120 s 29.015 16
5.00 s/1000
00.035 Normal running acceleration {02.012} 5 - 1000 s/1000 rpm 29.021 16
rpm
5.00 s/1000
00.036 Normal running deceleration {02.022} 5 - 1000 s/1000 rpm 29.022 16
rpm
5.0 s/1000
00.037 Shutdown deceleration {02.023} 2 - 20 s/1000 rpm 29.024 16
rpm
00.038 Shutdown hold speed {01.023} 0 - 7200 rpm 3600 rpm 29.023 16
00.039 Controlled shutdown dwell time 0 - 300 s 120 s 29.025 16
00.040 Stop deceleration 2 - 20 s/1000 rpm 2 s/1000 rpm 29.026 16
00.041 Oil boost threshold speed 1800 - 3600 rpm 1800 rpm 29.027 16
00.042 Oil boost threshold time 1 - 120 min 120 min 29.029 16
5.0 s/1000
00.043 Oil boost acceleration rate {02.016} 2 - 20 s/1000 rpm 29.031 16
rpm
Drive User Guide 73

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Data size
Parameter Range Default Mapping
(bits)
5.0 s/1000
00.044 Oil boost deceleration rate {02.026} 2 - 20 s/1000 rpm 29.032 16
rpm
00.045 Oil boost speed {01.026} 3600 - 7200 rpm 3600 29.028 16
00.046 Oil boost solution time 5 - 30 min 5.0 min 29.030 16
00.047 Oil Boost timer 0 - 120 min 0 min 29.033 16
00.048 Stator heating wattage 10 - 150 W 100 W 29.039 16
00.049 Skip Reference 1 0 - 7200 rpm 0.0 rpm 01.029 16
00.050 Skip reference band 1 0 - 250 rpm 0.0 rpm 01.030 16
2.0 s/1000
00.055 Defrost deceleration rate {02.025} 2 - 20 s/1000 rpm 29.036 16
rpm
2.0 s/1000
00.056 Defrost acceleration rate {02.015} 2 - 20 s/1000 rpm 29.035 16
rpm
00.057 User defrost speed reference 1500 - 7200 rpm 1500 rpm 29.037 16
00.058 Defrost cycle end dwell time 30 - 300 s 60 s 29.034 16
00.059 DLT check delay time 0 - 60 s 5s 29.046 16
00.060 Locked rotor Idle time 0 - 1800 s 600 s 29.051 16
Lost rotor ride-through dynamic
00.061 30 - 300 rpm 35 rpm 29.052 16
threshold
Lost rotor ride-through constant
00.062 30 - 400 rpm 200 rpm 29.053 16
threshold
00.063 Short cycle limit 1 - 144 48 29.041 16
00.064 Short cycle time 60 - 600 s 60 s 29.042 16
00.065 Envelope Profile Selection 0 to 3 * 29.048 16
00.066 Serial address 1 - 247 1 11.023 16
8 2 NP (0), 8 1 NP (1), 8 1 EP (2),
8 1 OP (3), 8 2 NP M (4),
8 1 NP M (5), 8 1 EP M (6),
00.067 Serial mode 8 1 OP M (7), 7 2 NP (8), 8 2 NP (0) 11.024 16
7 1 NP (9), 7 1 EP (10), 7 1 OP (11),
7 2 NP M (12), 7 1 NP M (13),
7 1 EP M (14), 7 1 OP M (15)
300 (0), 600 (1), 1200 (2), 2400 (3),
4800 (4), 9600 (5), 19200 (6), 38400
00.068 Serial Baud rate 19200 (6) 11.025 16
(7), 57600 (8), 76800 (9),
115200 (10)
00.069 Fieldbus Monitor trigger time 0 - 200 s 0s 29.058 16
00.070 Unassigned
None (0), Read (1), Program (2),
00.071 Clone parameters 0 11.042 16
Auto (3), Boot (4)
00.072 Reset comms 0-1 0 11.020 16
00.073 Reset drive 0-1 0 10.033 16
00.074 Running log of alerts entry number 0 - 20 0 29.006 16
Running log alert ID number and days
00.075 0 - 65535 0 29.007 16
and hours
00.076 Unassigned
Menu 0 (0), All Menus (1),
Read-only Menu 0 (2),
00.077 Security level 11.044 16
Read-only (3), Status Only (4),
No Access (5)
00.078 Derivative software version 00.00.00.00 0 29.059 16
00.079 Out of envelope trip delay time 0 - 600 s 600 s 29.049 16
Out of envelope trip delay time for low
00.080 0 -1800 s 600 s 29.050 16
condensing at power up
* Dependant on compressor.
74 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
6.2 Detailed compressor function descriptions

6.2.1 Configuration parameter
Pr 00.006 {29.011}, containing the configuration control word, is used to control the drive in both analog / digital control mode and in Modbus control
mode. To allow for simple drive configurations in Modbus control mode, all drive and compressor functions are enabled/disabled using this single
bitwise parameter: Pr 00.006 {29.011}.
For example:
Table 6-2 Key to the configuration parameter
Pr 00.006
Decimal value Name Function Default
{Pr 29.011} Bit
0 1 Variable switching frequency 0: Disable, 1: Enable 0 (Disable)
1 2 Single phase AC input detection 0: Disable, 1: Enable 0 (Disable)
2 4 Short cycle protection 0: Enable, 1: Disable 0 (Enable)
3 8 Envelope control 0: Enable, 1: Disable 0 (Enable)
4 16 DLT Temperature unit 0: Fahrenheit, 1: Celsius 0 (°F)
5 32 Envelope Pressure unit 0: Psig, 1: Bar 0 (Psig)
6 64 Oil control 0: Enable, 1: Disable 0 (Enable)
7 128 Defrost cycle control 0: Disable, 1: Enable 0 (Disable)
Control source for Start/run and 0: From Terminal digital input
8 256 0 (Digital)
stator heater 1: From Modbus or Keypad
9 512 DLT protection 0: Disable, 1: Enable 0 (Disable)
10 1024 Locked rotor detection on start 0: Enable, 1: Disable 0 (Enable)
11 N/A Reserved N/A N/A
12 4096 Lost rotor ride-through protection 0: Enable, 1: Disable 0 (Enable)
0: From Modbus or Keypad,
13 8192 DLT temperature source 0 (From OEM)
1: From Terminal Analog Input
NOTE
Note when digital inputs are used as the control source (Pr 00.006 bit 8=0), if the logic level returns to zero, the drive will move to the controlled
shutdown state if currently in the normal running state. When the system control word is selected (Pr 00.006 bit 8=1), the start bit starts the drive but
the drive will not stop the motor if the bit is reset. To stop using a controlled shutdown, a separate control word bit is used.
6.2.2 System control word parameter
Pr 00.007, containing the system control word, is used to control the drive only in Modbus control mode. To allow for simple drive configurations in
Modbus control mode, all drive and compressor functions are enabled/disabled using this single bitwise parameter: Pr 00.007.
Table 6-3 Key to the System Control Word Parameter
Pr 00.007 Bit Decimal value Name Function Default

1: Start
0 1 Start 0
0: No action
1: Shutdown the compressor
1 2 Controlled shutdown 0
0: No action
1: Turn on the stator heater
2 4 Stator heating control 0
0: No action
1: Trigger the defrost cycle on transition
3 8 Defrost cycle trigger 0
0: No action
1: Reset trips on transition
4 16 Reset trips if possible 0
0: No action
1: Enable the communication watchdog
5 32 Trip on communication loss 0
0: No action
Bits 6 to 15 N/A Reserved N/A N/A
Drive User Guide 75

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
6.2.3 Preset speeds

The preset speed parameters and acceleration/deceleration rates are defaulted to basic values but can be modified and saved by the user.
Drive preset speed Default speed value Drive acceleration Drive deceleration Default accel/decel
Function
parameter (rpm) parameter parameter value (s/1000 rpm)
Soft-start Pr 00.032 {29.013} 3600.0 Pr 00.033 {29.014} N/A 1.000
Pr 00.008 {29.017} User
Normal running 1500 Pr 00.035 {29.012} Pr 00.036 {2.022} 5.000 / 5.000
speed reference
Controlled 3600 (or envelope
Pr 00.038 {029.023} N/A Pr 00.037 {29.024} 5.000
shutdown minimum)
Stop N/A 0 N/A Pr 00.040 {29.026} 2.000
Pr 00.057 {29.037}
Defrost speed User defrost speed 1500 Pr 00.056 {29.035} Pr 00.055 {29.036} 2.000 / 2.000
reference
Pr 00.045 {29.028}
Oil boost solution Final oil boost speed
1500.0 Pr 00.043 {29.031} Pr 00.044 {29.032} 5.000 / 5.000
speed reference controlled by
the software
6.2.4 State machine

The drive software operates as a state machine in which each state provides a specific set of functions. This approach permits the sequencing of
functions to be presented in a simple manner.
Table 6-4 Key to the software system state
Function active
Max load and low voltage fold back
Envelope control & protection

Discharge line temperature
Locked rotor detection
Short cycle detection
Controlled shutdown
Fieldbus monitoring
Motor over current
Miswire detection
Skip frequencies
Defrost control
Missing phase
Stator heating
Numerical state
Lost rotor
Oil boost
shown in Name
Pr 00.002 {29.060}
0 IDLE X X X X X
IDLE WITH STATOR
1 X X X X X X
HEATING
2 SOFT-START X X X X X X X X X X
3 NORMAL RUNNING X X X X X X X
4 DEFROST CYCLE X X X X X X X
5 OIL BOOST X X X X X X X
CONTROLLED
6 X X X X X X X
SHUTDOWN
7 TRIPPED
76 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
The software structural diagram below presents the top level groups of functions and how they are sequenced from the time of power up of the drive.
Details of the individual groups of tasks and functions are given later in this section.
Figure 6-1 Software structure:
Default and set up

the drive if required
Enforce parameter
100 ms cycle limits
State machine
Interface with drive

speed loop
React to drive
firmware trips
The state machine is a top level block within the software structural diagram and numerically represents the drive specific functions. Figure 6-2 shows
the process flow through the state machine and thus how the individual drive specific software functions are sequenced.
Figure 6-2 Drive software state machine (main states shown in boxes and additional functions in ovals)
Idle · Some functions will be

Is heating bypassed if disabled
required?
IDLE WITH STATOR IDLE
HEATING
DRIVE INTERFACE
TRIP
Is Drive
run/enabled?
YES
TRIPPED
Start-up Drive firmware asserted trip

TRIP MISSING PHASE
TRIPPED TEST ON START
Missing phase NO TRIP
DLT PROTECTION
TRIP
TRIP
LOCKED ROTOR
TRIPPED
DETECTION
Locked rotor
NO TRIP TRIPPED
Discharge line temperature
Running
ENVELOPE CONTROL
TRIPPED SOFT START TRIP
Too many short cycles
Is oil boost
required?
TRIPPED
Out of envelope
OIL BOOST NORMAL RUNNING
LOST ROTOR
TRIP
COMPLETE
CONTROLLED SHUT DEFROST CYCLE

COMPLETE DOWN TRIPPED
Lost rotor
Drive User Guide 77

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
The states are arranged in three groups:

• Idle
This group includes stator heating and occurs when the compressor is not active.
• Start-up
This state includes the motor/compressor wiring and direction checks.
• Running
This group contains the running, defrost, oil boost and the controlled shutdown functions. The envelope and lost rotor protection is run in all of the
states contained in this group.
The drive interface function and the discharge line protection functions are running all of the time irrespective of the current state or group of states.
6.2.5 Speed reference
The main reference signal flow diagram below defines how the speed reference is modified/limited/controlled within the drive software - from receipt
from the OEM controller to the speed demand passed to the standard drive speed loop and motor control.
Figure 6-3 Main reference signal flow
User speed reference
Pr 00.008 {29.017}
Speed reference after

envelope control
Pr 00.009 {29.018}
Lost rotor prevention
Discharge line
temperature protection
Normal running final

reference Pr 01.022
NOTE
In the case of the drive, the envelope override function can limit the speed reference before it enters the state machine functions and that the final
modification is under the control of the discharge line temperature protection function.
6.2.6 Housekeeping functions
Parameter Parameter name Description Units Range Default
00.078 Application specific

Displays the drive software version where V01.12 = 112 none 00.00.00.00 0
{29.059} software version
00.002
Software system state Current software state none 0 to 20 0 [Idle]
{29.060}
The drive software version and the system state can be viewed.
6.2.7 Motor over current

Motor over current protection is provided by the drive protection. The over current trip is provided to prevent motor demagnetization. This trip cannot
be reset during the first 10 s after the trip occurred.
• A power cycle or reset command, via MODBUS keypad or digital input is required to clear the lockout.
NOTE
The motor over current protection is similar to CoreSense 1379 Alert/Lockout Code 9 - Over-Current Protection
78 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
6.2.8 Missing motor phase connection on VFD output
Function runs in the following state(s): Description
Soft-start Missing phase on start
Parameter Parameter name Function area Description Units Range Default
Output phase loss Indicates that a phase loss has been

06.059 Compressor missing a phase None 0 to 1 1
detection enable detected at the input to the compressor
Compressor missing a Increments with every missing phase

29.010 Compressor missing a phase None 0 to 10 0
phase counter event detected up to 10 in 24 hrs
This feature is set up by the drive application software and implemented in the standard drive firmware.
• The standard drive firmware will trip Out Phase Loss.1. The drive application software will trip "Compressor Missing Phase" and move to the
TRIPPED state.
• After 5 minutes the trip is automatically reset.
• The system will lockout after 10 trips within 24 hours [the count of trips is reset on lock-out].
• A power cycle or reset command, via MODBUS keypad or digital input is required to clear the lockout.
NOTE
The missing phase detection is similar to CoreSense 1384 Alert/Lockout Code 6 - Missing Phase
Figure 6-4 Missing phase detection function block
Voltage demand Trip

Missing phase
detection
Current measurement Lockout
Sub-trip Reason
1 U phase detected as disconnected when drive enabled to run
2 V phase detected as disconnected when drive enabled to run
3 W phase detected as disconnected when drive enabled to run
6.2.9 Locked rotor condition

Soft-start Locked rotor detection
Table 6-5 Parameters associated with the locked rotor detection function:
00.026 Locked Rotor Failure Records number of failed starts due to Locked
Locked Rotor Indicator none 0 to 10 0
{29.054} start count Rotor protection
After a failed start, the drive has to wait for a
00.060 30 to
Locked rotor idle time Locked Rotor Indicator period of idle time before attempting to start the s 35
{29.051} 300
motor again
Drive User Guide 79

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Figure 6-5 Locked rotor condition
Locked rotor
torque Trip Locked rotor condition
Flood
start Subsequent liquid plugs
torque due to system pipework
Normal torque
required
Speed
profile Speed
error
Time
Initial Dwell
ramp
• The locked rotor condition is detected if the speed is less than 20% of the target speed at the end of the initial soft-start ramp.
During the detection phase the "locked rotor" condition warning flag is set.
After a failed start, the drive will wait for a default idle time of 35 s before restarting the compressor. After 10 consecutive Locked Rotor Starts have
occurred, the drive will disable itself and produce a "locked rotor" condition trip and the software state is set to TRIPPED.
NOTE
A power cycle is required before the next batch of restarts is attempted (This is to satisfy the UL requirement for a manual reset device).
Figure 6-6 Power cycle
Reset the count to zero.
Begin speed demand

ramp as part of soft-
start
After 12 seconds or until the start

of the soft-start dwell time
NO => continue the soft-start.

Reset the alarm if set.
Check if the
speed is less than 20 % Reset the count.
of the target
YES =>Set the alarm
Remove the motor supply
YES => Lockout trip.

Reset the alarm.
Check if count Reset the count.
is above 9
NO => Increment the count
Wait for a default time

of 35 seconds
NOTE
The locked rotor detection function is similar to CoreSense 1379 Alert/Lockout Code 4 - Locked Rotor Trips
Figure 6-7 Locked rotor detection function block diagram
Speed demand Alarm
Lock rotor detection
Torque required Lockout
Standard drive trips ‘Phasing Error and Overspeed.1’ will be latched, requiring the user to power-cycle the drive. These trips can be caused by the
drive being unable to synchronize to the motor due to the locked rotor condition. UL requires a power-cycle reset to permit the UL test to be the ‘50
test’ method rather than the ‘15 day test’ method.
80 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
6.2.10 Lost Rotor Trip Prevention, Detection, Retry and Ride-Through Control
Normal running Lost rotor condition management
00.061
Lost rotor ride-through dynamic threshold Lost rotor ride-through Speed error seconds 30 to 300 35
{29.051}
00.062
Lost rotor ride-through constant threshold Lost rotor ride-through Speed error rpm 30 to 400 rpm 100
{29.053}
• The aim is to avoid nuisance trips by either riding through, or by dealing with the issue and then automatically restarting.
• Operates in the RUNNING state not during soft-start or controlled stop.
The lost rotor detection system detects conditions where the speed error is greater than expected which could be due to a locked or stalling rotor
while running. The detection method must not trip during normal operation when speed error would be expected. During dynamic drive output
frequency demand change the expected speed error is higher than during constant drive output frequency demand so two sets of limits are used.
The limits during dynamic drive output frequency demand change must permit the completion of flood starting (after the soft-start is complete) where
there is liquid in the scroll rather than vapor. The limits during constant drive output frequency demand, must allow for small slugs of liquid produced
by isolated cooling in the system pipe work, to pass through the compressor.
• Constant drive output frequency demand is defined as less than a 2 % rated frequency change in the last 10 s.
Limits during dynamic drive output frequency demand change:
The "lost rotor" condition is detected if the modulus of the speed error (Pr 03.003) is greater than 100 rpm [user configurable] for longer than 4 s. The
aim is to keep the compressor running.
Limits during constant drive output frequency demand:
The "lost rotor" condition is detected if the modulus of the speed error (Pr 03.003) is greater than 50 rpm [user configurable] for longer than 4 s.
Action if lost rotor detected
If a lost rotor condition is detected the speed demand is lowered by 200 rpm (at the normal running deceleration rate where it remains for a 10 s dwell
while the lost rotor condition is again checked. The "lost rotor" alert is set.
This is repeated until the speed demand is at the minimum envelope speed or 1000 rpm if the envelope protection is not enabled. The supply is
removed and the drive waits for 60 s before the "lost rotor" alert is reset and the soft-start begins again.
If the lost rotor condition is not detector during one of the 10 s dwell periods, the speed demand is increased by 200 rpm or to the OEM speed
demand level (which every is lowest) at 200 rpm per s. The "lost rotor" alert is reset.
Drive User Guide 81

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Figure 6-8 Lost rotor alert
Reset both timers to zero

and reset the alarm
Check every 100ms

In the running state
YES => use

Check if the
“dynamic demand”
output frequency has
thresholds
Changed by more than 2% in
the last 10
seconds
NO => use “constant
demand” thresholds
NO => Reset
detector timer
NO => Reset detector Check if Check if
timer speed error is speed error is
greater than greater than
20% 30%
YES
YES
Is detector Is dwell
timer greater NO timer greater NO
than 4 than 10
seconds seconds
YES => Set the alarm YES
Reduce the speed by 200rpm Increase the speed by 200rpm

Reset all timers Reset all timers
NO Is speed Is speed
less than the Equal to NO
minimum OEM demand
YES YES => reset

the alarm.
Remove motor supply
Wait 60 seconds
Figure 6-9 Lost rotor function block

Speed demand Alarm
Lost rotor ride
through
Speed error Speed reduction
6.2.11 Max-load and Low-Voltage fold back management

The aim of Pr 04.016 is to avoid nuisance trips and keep the motor running.
• No values for user configuration.
• Uses the drives standard motor current/load and dc bus voltage foldback/limit method.
Fold back the current/torque and speed under the following circumstances:
• Reaching the motor current limit
• If the drive thermal protection is active
• Reaching the motor voltage limit
• Operating with a low voltage supply
82 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
6.2.12 Single input phase detection

The drive is designed to detect when a single phase input is used or when one of the three phases is lost. This is achieved by monitoring the DC
voltage ripple. This feature can be enabled by setting Pr 00.006 (bit 1) = 1.
Figure 6-10 Monitoring the DC voltage ripple
Soft Start
Detection Enabled? N Normal Soft

Start
Y
Limit soft start velocity to3600 rpm
(Pr 00.032)
Measure bus voltage ripple during the soft

start dwell time (it takes around 23 s )
Adjust ripple threshold based on load level
Restore original soft start speed

(Pr 00.032)
Y Trip
Ripple > threshold? (Pr 29.005 = 32)
N
Continue normal Soft

Start Procedure
6.2.13 Variable switching frequency

The Variable switching frequency feature will reduce the switching frequency of the drive, and therefore reduce the switching losses, as compressor
speed is reduced. This feature can be enabled by setting Pr 00.006 (bit 0) = 1.
The flow chart below outlines how the switching frequency is determined after the soft start is complete.
Compressor speed Switching frequency

7200 to 4000 rpm 6 kHz
3999 to 1500 rpm 4 kHz
1499 to 1000 rpm 3 kHz
Figure 6-11 Variable switching frequency
Variable fsw enabled ?

Y
N
Soft Start ? Y fsw = 6 kHz
N
Thermal limitation active ? N
Speed < 1500 ? Y fsw = 3 kHz

Y
Pr 07.035 < 85 ? N N
N Pr 07.035 < 95 ?
Speed < 4000 ? Y fsw = 4 kHz
Y Y
N
1. Set “thermal limitation 1. Disable “thermal limitation fsw = 6 kHz
active” active”
2. fsw = 3 kHz 2. fsw = 6 kHz
Continue
Operation
Drive User Guide 83

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
6.3 Compressor protection

The system protection heading brings together all of the compressor system protection functions.
6.3.1 Anti short cycling (Short cycle prevention)

Soft-start Short cycle detection
00.028
Short cycle count Anti-short cycle Number of short cycles that have occurred none 0 to 4 0
{29.040}
00.063
Short cycle limit Anti-short cycle Maximum allowed short cycles in a day none 1 to 144 48
{29.041}
00.064
Short cycle time Anti-short cycle Short cycle duration seconds 60-600 60
{29.042}
Excessive short duration cycles can cause damage to the compressor. The short-cycle prevention scheme detects if there have been too many short-
cycles. It will then alert the user and impose a restart lockout time to prevent further short-cycles.
Short cycling can occur if control limits are set too tight. This can cause damage to the compressor as correct oil lubrication may not be achieved. This
can also occur as a result of problems with the system control: for example, fluctuating loads and sensor faults.
• A short cycle is defined by a start to stop time of less than the setting of Pr 00.064 {29.042}.
• The start time begins when the system starts the soft-start.
The short-cycle prevention scheme uses an accumulator to detect if there have been too many short-cycles and an alert and restart lockout time to
manage and thus prevent further short-cycles.
Detection of the short-cycle event
A timer is started at the beginning of the soft-start and is checked when the compressor next shuts down.
• If the time between the beginning of the start-up and completion of the shut-down is less than the short cycle duration Pr 00.064 {29.042} an
event has been detected.
Accumulator
• The accumulator is incremented whenever a short-cycle event has been detected.
• The accumulator is decremented every "minimum time between short-cycles" which is the 24 hours divided by the user parameter "maximum
allowed short cycles in a day".
• The accumulator is never permitted to go negative.
Minimum time between "short-cycles" = 24hours / (Pr 00.063 "maximum allowed short cycles in a day")
If the time between short-cycles is greater than or equal to the "minimum time between short-cycles", the accumulator value will reduce to zero. If
however, the time between short-cycles is less than the "minimum time between short-cycles", the accumulator will increase.
84 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Management of the short cycle event

• If the accumulator is equal to or greater than Pr 29.041 the prevention management is activated.
• The value of Pr 29.041 has been chosen to permit a number of short-cycles to take place in the short term while providing protection long term.
• While the prevention management is active, the next start is delayed until the accumulator value has reduced from Pr 29.041. The accumulator is
reduced every "minimum time between short-cycles", and thus the starts are restricted to the "minimum time between short-cycles".
• The short-cycle prevention alert is set when the accumulator value is equal to Pr 29.041 and reset when the accumulator value is equal to
Pr 29.041
Figure 6-12 Management of the short cycle event
Soft start requested

Check every 1
second
YES Is
accumulator
>= Pr 29.041? Has min
NO time between
short-cycles
NO elapsed?
YES => decrement the
Soft start dwell completes accumulator and reset the
Start the “time between” timer
short-cycle timer
Motor supply removed Is alert YES
Stop the active?
short cycle timer
Is time NO
NO difference less
than “short cycle Is
duration Pr 00.064 NO
accumulator
>= Pr 29.041?
YES
YES
Increment
the accumulator Set the alert
NO Is
accumulator
>= Pr 29.041?
YES
Reset the alert
Figure 6-13 Short cycle prevention block
Run command Alarm

Short cycle
prevention
Speed demand Restart lock-out time
6.3.2 Discharge Line Temperature (DLT)

Idle and all running states Over temperature protection
00.023 DLT (Discharge line

{29.045} temperature)
Discharge line temperature Temperature protection/control F -40 to 330 0
00.025 DLT over temperature

Discharge line temperature Number of over temperature faults none 0 to 4 0
{29.047} fault count
00.059
DLT check delay time Discharge line temperature Configurable DLT off delay time s 0 to 60 5
{29.046}
If configuration parameter bit 13 (14th) is set to zero, the DLT signal is measured directly by the drive with a range check to detect if the signal is short
circuit.
If configuration parameter bit 13 (14th) is set to one, the DLT temperature (inF) is written to the drive by the OEM controller.
Refer to section 7.1.3 DLT Thermistor Set-up on page 97 for details on setting up the DLT sensor.
Drive User Guide 85

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
This function is designed to prevent the compressor from running in an over-temperature situation. This situation can occur anywhere, but the key
area is at the top left of the operating envelope. An over-temperature event can also be indicative of system transients / faults: locked rotor, blocked
suction, blocked discharge, condensing fan failure, system loss of refrigerant charge, improper field charging of the system.
Over temperature protection
• The temperature is checked every 1 second.
• If the temperature is above the fault level, an alert is set.
• If the DLT temperature is below the trip level, the alert is reset.
• If the temperature is above the trip level for more than 3 samples each taken at 60 second intervals, the drive is disabled, the "DLT" trip set
(Pr 00.021 = 42) and the software state set to TRIPPED.
• The trips will automatically be cleared if the DLT temperature is below the trip level for 10 minutes. The trip log will still log that the trip has
occurred.
• The DLT over temperature feature can be disabled using the disable function flag for field charging, system setup and commissioning.
Figure 6-14 Over temperature protection
Reset the count and the alarm
Check every 1s
In the running state
NO => Reset the

count and the alarm Is the DLT temp
greater than
275degF
YES => Set the alarm
Increment the count
Is the count YES => set Trip

greater than
2
NO
Wait 5 seconds; Pr 00.059
Figure 6-15 DLT protection function block

Run command Alarm
DLT protection
DLT measurement Trip
6.3.3 Envelope control

Running states Envelope control
00.013
Condenser pressure Envelope control Condenser pressure (in tenths of a unit) psig/10 0 to 6500 0
{29.043}
00.014
Evaporator pressure Envelope control Evaporator pressure (in tenths of a unit) psig/10 0 to 6500 0
{29.044}
00.009 Speed reference after

Envelope control Speed reference after envelope control rpm 0 to 7200 0
{29.018} envelope control
• If the envelope is not enabled, the frequency minimum is 1000 rpm for ZPV0631E and ZPV0662E compressors and 1200 rpm for ZPV0962E
compressors.
This functionality will prevent the compressor from being used outside of its design limits (Envelope). The benefit to the customer of this functionality
is a control simplification for the OEM (design time). Contact an application engineer for details on the compressor envelope.
86 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
• Pressure out to the Condenser Pc (Pr 00.013)

• Pressure in from the Evaporator Pe (Pr 00.014)
The control system has two stages:-

• Out of outer envelope detection
• Speed limits within an envelope sub-region
Out of outer envelope detection
The outer envelope is defined based on a set of points which are used within a straight line formula to detect whether a pressure point is in or out of
the outer envelope. The quantisation is to 1psig. When rounding is required, this is performed "into" the envelope (so round down if the value is just
above, and round up if the value is just below) to avoid rogue trips.
• The drive will trip "out of envelope" if the pressure point is out of the outer envelope for more than 10 minutes. If the pressures are within the
envelope for 10 minutes, the trip is cleared automatically.
• If Condensing / Evaporation pressures are out of envelope for 15 s, an alert is set.
Speed limits within an envelope sub-region
The sub-region is determined if the pressure points are within the outer envelope
Given the two pressure inputs, this function will provide a maximum range for the speed which is applied to the reference.
The software will set the "Envelope Override Active" alert flag when the speed reference is being limited by this function.
The drive will act as an override on the speed reference signal, preventing over/under speed at the operating envelope point. The envelope override
limits both the minimum and maximum speed. Envelope override is only active during the running group of states and affects the input speed
reference before the other functions modify the reference.
Figure 6-16 Envelope protection function block
Tevap/Pevap Warning
Envelope protection
Tcond/Pcond Max/Min output speed
6.3.4 Stator heating

IDLE WITH STATOR HEATING Controlled stator heating if there is a sump/outdoor sensor
00.048
Stator heating wattage Stator heating Controls the heating current [Default to 100 W] Watts 10 to 150 100
{29.039}
Analog / digital control mode:

• With Pr 00.006 (bit 8) = 0 (default)
• Adjust Pr 00.048 for desired stator heat wattage
• The Stator Heating is activated while applying +24 V (terminal 22) to Stator Heating On (terminal 27).
Modbus control mode:
• With Pr 00.006 (bit 8) = 1
• Adjust Pr 00.048 for desired stator heat wattage
• The Stator Heating is activated by setting Pr 00.007 (bit 2) = 1; deactivated by setting Pr 00.007 (bit 2) = 0.
Drive User Guide 87

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
6.3.5 Oil boost

Oil boost
Function
area
00.045 3600 to
Oil return speed Boost speed used if oil boost required rpm 3600
{29.028} 7200
00.043 s per 1000

Oil boost acceleration rate Oil boost acceleration rate 2 to 20 5
{29.031} rpm
00.044 s per 1000

Oil boost deceleration rate Oil boost deceleration rate 2 to 20 5
{29.032} rpm
Oil boost
00.041 1800 to
Oil boost threshold speed Oil boost threshold speed rpm 1800
{29.027} 3600
00.042
Oil boost threshold time Period of time for oil boost mode to be entered minutes 1 to 120 120
{29.029}
00.046 Period of time that the motor will be run at the

Oil boost solution time minutes 5 to 30 5
{29.030} oil boost speed if oil boost mode is entered
If the compressor is running at a speed that is insufficient to guarantee lubrication (for a defined time), oil boost mode is entered. During oil boost, the
motor speed is increased for a period of time to ensure the compressor is correctly lubricated.
The function is active in all run conditions except for soft-start. The function's logic is as follows:
• If the motor speed is higher than the user configured threshold for 5 minutes, reset the timing.
• Otherwise start timing.
• If the compressor is turned off, stop the counter and store the value ready for when the compressor turns on again.
• If the threshold time (user configurable) has elapsed, ramp to the oil boost speed (user defined in Pr 00.045 {29.028} but can only be higher than
the default) at 200 rpm per second default. Set the oil boost warning.
• Hold for the solution time (user defined in Pr 00.046 {29.030})
• Once the time has elapsed, return to the previous state ramping if necessary at 200 rpm per s. Reset the oil boost warning.
The purpose of the oil boost is to ensure adequate lubrication of the compressor components, and to return oil from the system to the compressor.
Figure 6-17 Reset oil boost warning
Check every 1
second
NO => reset
timer Is compressor
active?
YES
YES => reset

timer Output speed
greater than
threshold?
NO
NO
Has time
elapsed?
YES
Ramp to solution
speed
Control
the output
speed
Hold for solution time
Reset the timer
88 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
6.4 System control

This section heading brings together all of the control functions provided by the drive software.
6.4.1 Start and Shutdown procedures
Soft-start
• The soft-start and controlled stop modes override the OEM speed reference.

SOFT-START Start-up
Function
area
00.032
User soft-start dwell speed User soft-start dwell speed rpm 1500 to 7200 3600
{29.013}
00.033
Soft-start acceleration rate Soft-start acceleration rate s per 1000 rpm 1 to 3 1
{29.014}
Soft-start
00.034
Soft-start dwell time Soft-start dwell time seconds 60 to 300 120
{29.015}
00.027 Number of soft-start
Number of soft-start attempts none 0 to 3 0
{29.016} attempts
The drive controls the starting routine of the variable speed scroll compressor. The routine allows soft-starting, an advantage over traditional on-off
control of non variable speed compressors.
• On a call for operation from the system controller, the drive will start the compressor and ramp its speed up to the soft start dwell speed (default
3600 rpm). The default acceleration rate is 1000 rpm per second. This acceleration rate can be set using the soft start acceleration parameter-
Pr 00.033 {29.014} but it should be noted that the initial acceleration rate up to a speed of 300 rpm is fixed at 1000 rpm per second.
• The final motor speed may be affected by the loading conditions and fold back. The speed estimation is checked 1 second after the soft-start
demand should have reached 3600 rpm. If the torque loading (Pr 04.020) is greater than 90 %, the soft-start demand is reduced to zero at
1000rpm per second and an alert is set. When the demand has reached 0 rpm the system waits for 1 s (for the rotor speed to meet the demand)
before the motor supply is removed. The system waits 10 s before re-starting the soft-start.
• If there are three consecutive soft-start failures, the drive will trip and lockout the compressor. A power cycle, MODBUS reset command, reset
signal to T25 or keypad reset is required to clear the lockout.
• The drive will maintain the 3600 rpm command for a user defined time (range 60 to 300 seconds; with a default of 120 seconds) and then ramp
the speed up or down to the speed requested by the system controller at a rate of 200 rpm per second. This applies to all start up conditions.
Figure 6-18 Soft start sequence
Soft start
NormalTorque
required
Speed
profile
Time
Initial ramp Dwell
Figure 6-19 Soft start function block
Run command Alarm

Speed demand Soft start
Speed error
Lockout
Drive User Guide 89

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Figure 6-20 Soft start function flow chart
Reset the count and the alert
Entering the running

states
Ramp to 3600rpm at
1000rpm per second
Wait for 1 second for

speed to stabilise
Is torque demand NO => remove alert

> 90%
YES => set Alert and Hold 3600rpm for the
increment the count user defined time
Ramp to 0rpm at
1000rpm per second
Change at 200rpm
per second to
Wait for 1 second for
demand speed
speed to stabilise
Normal running
Have there
NO
Wait for 10 seconds been three
consecutive
frails?
YES
LOCK OUT
6.4.2 Normal running

During normal running, the change in the OEM speed reference is internally limited to +/-200 rpm.
Speed reference
00.009 Reference after limits
after envelope Set by the software rpm 0 to 7200 0
{29.018} and protection
control
00.035 Normal running
Normal running Normal running acceleration rate s per 1000 rpm 5 to 1000 5
{29.021} acceleration rate
00.036 Normal running
Normal running Normal running deceleration rate s per 1000 rpm 5 to 1000 5
{29.022} deceleration rate
00.008 User speed From OEM controller via Analog
Reference rpm 0 to 7200 1500
{29.017} reference in RPM Input 3
6.4.3 Controlled shutdown

CONTROLLED SHUTDOWN Shutdown

Controlled
00.038 Controlled shutdown final 3600 or envelope
shutdown hold Controlled shutdown rpm 0 to 7200
{29.023} reference minimum
speed
00.010 Final speed
Controlled shutdown Held at zero rpm 0 to 7200 0
{29.019} reference
Controlled
00.037 s per
shutdown Controlled shutdown Controlled stop deceleration rate 2 to 20 5
{29.024} 1000 rpm
deceleration rate
00.040 Stop deceleration s per
Controlled shutdown Stop reference deceleration rate 2 to 20 2
{29.026} rate 1000 rpm
Controlled
00.039
shutdown dwell Controlled shutdown Controlled shutdown dwell time seconds 0 to 300 120
{29.025}
time
90 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
This function requires the compressor to complete a shutdown and stop before starting up again. When the system controller signals for the
compressor to stop, by sending controlled shutdown command, the controlled shutdown is triggered.
If the envelope protection is active:
• If 70 % of the final speed reference, Pr 00.010 (which is the OEM reference subjected to the acceleration and deceleration limits) is still higher
than the minimum operating speed envelope condition, reduce the speed by 30 % to 70 % of the final speed reference.
• Else, stay at the current speed.
• Hold for a period specified in Pr 00.039 {29.025} and then check the reference.
• If the command is no longer there, go back to normal running state.
• Else decelerate towards zero speed. Remove motor power when motor speed is less than 700 rpm.
• After 10 s go to the idle state.
If the envelope control is not active:
• If the estimated speed is above Pr 00.038 {29.023}, ramp down to Pr 00.038 {29.023} at 200 rpm per second.
• Else if the estimated speed is below Pr 00.038 {29.023}, remain at the current speed.
The controlled transition from the operating speed to the minimum speed will result in reducing the excess internal pressure difference inside the
compressor due to leakage across the compressor elements at the lower speeds. At this point the residual pressure difference in the compressor may
cause a limited amount of reverse rotation of the motor.
If a minor fault condition occurs during operation the drive will perform a controlled shutdown triggered by the OEM controller.
Figure 6-21 Entering controlled shut-down
Entering the
controlled shut-down
Is envelope NO
enabled?
YES
Is 70% Is
NO OEM demand NO output speed
speed within above
envelope? 3600rpm?
YES YES
Ramp to 70% Speed defined

demand by Pr 00.038
Period defined Period defined

by Pr 00.039 /s by Pr 00.039 /s
NO
Normal NO Is command Is command Normal
running state still received? still received? running state
Ramp to zero speed
Remove motor
supply when less
than 700 rpm
Wait 10 seconds
Idle state
Drive User Guide 91

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Figure 6-22 Controlled shut-down function block
Command
Speed demand Controlled shut- Compressor off
Minimum envelope speed down
6.4.4 Defrost control/procedure

DEFROSTCYCLE Defrosting

00.057 User defrost User defrost speed
Defrost cycle rpm 1500 to 7200 1500
{29.037} speed reference reference
00.056 Defrost s per
Defrost cycle Defrost acceleration rate 2 to 20 2
{29.035} acceleration rate 1000 rpm
00.055 Defrost s per
Defrost cycle Defrost deceleration rate 2 to 20 2
{29.036} deceleration rate 1000 rpm
00.058 Defrost cycle end Defrost cycle end dwell
Defrost cycle seconds 30 to 300 60
{29.034} dwell time time
Once triggered, through the System control word Pr 00.007 {29.012}, the defrost cycle will operate until complete. During operation the defrost active
flag is set high in the condition warnings parameter Pr 00.004 {29.004} bit 4.
• If the envelope protection is active, the minimum speed is used. If envelope protection is not active 1500 rpm (default - user defined by Pr 00.057
{29.037}) is used as the minimum speed.
• The drive will slow the compressor to 1500 rpm (user defined by Pr 00.057 {29.037}) (or the minimum speed from the envelope condition) at a
default rate of 2 s per 1000 rpm - user defined by Pr 00.055 {29.036}.
• The compressor will remain at this speed for 60 s (default- user defined in Pr 00.057 {29.037}) to let the suction and discharge pressures
stabilize.
• After the hold time, the system will return to the normal running state, changing the speed at a default rate of 2 s per 1000 rpm (user defined by
Pr 00.056 {29.035}).
Figure 6-23 Defrost command
Defrost command
received
Set the Defrost warning
Is envelope NO
enabled?
YES
Is user
defrost speed NO
lower than minimum
envelope speed?
YES
Ramp down to
Ramp down to
minimum envelope
User defrost speed
speed
Note: The user defrost

Hold for the speed is limited to a
Hold time minimum of 1500rpm
Reset the Defrost warning
Normal running
92 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
6.4.5 Resonance avoidance

Use the standard skip frequencies function
Running states
available in the drive firmware

00.049 {01.029} Skip Reference 1 Resonance avoidance Skip Reference rpm 0 to 7200 0 rpm [no filter]
Defines the range
00.050 {01.030} Skip Reference Band 1 Resonance avoidance rpm 0 to 250 0 rpm
either side of Pr 00.049
Defines the range
Defines the range
This function is provided to avoid running at motor speeds which cause mechanical resonance effects. In the default state no filter is applied, however
it can be configured if required.
Skip Reference Band 1 (00.050) defines the range either side of Skip Reference 1 over which references are rejected in either direction. The actual
rejection band is therefore twice that defined by Skip Reference Band 1 (00.050) with Skip Reference 1 (00.049) as the centre of the band. When the
selected reference is within the rejection band the lower limit of the band is passed through the filter so that reference is always less than demanded.
6.4.6 Fieldbus (MODBUS) over RS485

The OEM controller can read all of the available standard drive parameters. Certain trips and lock out conditions are resettable through the Fieldbus
link using the System control word Pr 00.007 {29.012}.
If zero [default] the comms
00.069 {29.058} Fieldbus comms monitor Fieldbus comms monitor none 0 to 300 0
monitoring is disabled.
If this parameter is set to 0 (default) Fieldbus comms monitoring is disabled.

If a value greater than 1 is written by the OEM to this parameter, the software will begin to increment the parameter every 1 second. If the parameter
reaches a value larger than 300 (5 minutes), the system will move to the trip state (Pr 00.021 = 45) and stop the compressor using a controlled stop.
This parameter is therefore designed to be periodically reset to a non zero value (in a watchdog type fashion) by the OEM controller. If a Fieldbus
communication problem occurs, this reset will not occur and the system will trip within 300 s. It should be noted that the OEM can select the timeout:
for example writing 1 to the parameter provides the full five minutes, writing 240 would give 1 minute.
NOTE
This function is similar to CoreSense 1384 Warning Code 1 - [Loss of Communication].
Drive User Guide 93

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
6.5 Parameter descriptions

6.5.1 Pr mm.000
Pr mm.000 is available in all menus, commonly used functions are provided as text strings in Pr mm.000 shown in Table 6-6.
Table 6-6 Commonly used functions in xx.000
Value Equivalent value String Action
0 0 [No Action]
1000 1 [Save parameters] Save parameters when under voltage is not active and low voltage threshold is not active
6001 2 [Load file 1] Load the drive parameters or user program file from NV media card file 001
4001 3 [Save to file 1] Transfer the drive parameters to parameter file 001
12000 8 [Show non-default] Displays parameters that are different from defaults
12001 9 [Destinations] Displays parameters that are set
1233 10 [Reset 50Hz Defs] Load parameters with standard (50 Hz) defaults
1244 11 [Reset 60Hz Defs] Load parameters with US (60 Hz) defaults
1070 12 [Reset modules] Reset all option modules
NOTE
There is currently no difference between a [Reset 50Hz defaults] and a [Reset 60Hz defaults].
94 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Table 6-7 Functions in Pr mm.000

Value Action
Save parameters when Under Voltage Active (Pr 10.016) is not active and Low Under Voltage Threshold Select mode (Pr 06.067 = Off)
1000
is not active.
1001 Save parameter under all conditions
1070 Reset all option modules
1233 Load standard (50 Hz) defaults
1244 Load US (60 Hz) defaults
1256 Change drive mode and load US (60 Hz) defaults except for menus 15 to 20 and 24 to 28
1299 Reset {Stored HF} trip.
2001* Create a boot file on a non-volatile media card based on the present drive parameters including all Menu 20 parameters
4yyy* NV media card: Transfer the drive parameters to parameter file xxx
6yyy* NV media card: Load the drive parameters from parameter file xxx or the onboard user program from onboard user program file xxx
7yyy* NV media card: Erase file xxx
8yyy* NV Media card: Compare the data in the drive with file xxx
9555* NV media card: Clear the warning suppression flag
9666* NV media card: Set the warning suppression flag
9777* NV media card: Clear the read-only flag
9888* NV media card: Set the read-only flag
9999* NV media card: Erase and format the NV media card
12000** Only display parameters that are different from their default value. This action does not require a drive reset.
12001** Only display parameters that are used to set-up destinations (i.e. DE format bit is 1). This action does not require a drive reset.
* See Chapter 8 NV Media Card Operation on page 106 for more information on these functions.
** These functions do not require a drive reset to become active. All other functions require a drive reset to initiate the function.
To allow easy access to some commonly used functions, refer to the table overleaf. Equivalent values and strings are also provided in the table
above.
NOTE
There is currently no difference between a [Reset 50Hz defaults] and a [Reset 60Hz defaults].
Drive User Guide 95

Issue Number: 6
Safety Product Mechanical Electrical Getting Compressor specific Running the NV Media Card Advanced MODBUS Technical UL listing
Diagnostics
information information installation installation started functions compressor Operation parameters RTU data information
7 Running the compressor

This chapter takes the new user through all the essential steps to running a motor for the first time.
NOTE
Motor parameters are pre-configured to suit an individual compressor, hence no setting of these parameters or motor auto tuning is required.
Ensure that no damage or safety hazard could arise from the motor starting unexpectedly.
WARNING
If the intended maximum speed affects the safety of the machinery, additional independent over-speed protection must be used.
WARNING
7.1 Quick start connections

7.1.1 Basic requirements for analog / digital control mode
This section shows the basic connections which must be made for the drive to run. When the basic connections shown in Figure 7-4 Minimum
connections to get the motor running in Analog / digital control mode (size 5) on page 100 have been made, the drive is started as described below.
Analog / Digital
The drive is set up to run in analog / digital control mode by default. The following connections are the preferred connections to run the drive (as
illustrated in Figure 4-27 Default terminal functions on page 60):
• Drive Enable (between terminals 22 and 31)
• Run/Stop (between terminals 22 and 26)
• Drive Reset (between terminals 22 and 25)
• Compressor On (indicated from terminal 24)
• Speed Reference 0 to 10 V (between terminals 4, 8 and 11)
• Pressure Sensors 2 x 4 -20 mA (between terminals 5 and 22, 7 and 22)
• Stator Heating (between terminals 22 and 27)
• Defrost Control (between terminals 22 and 28)
• User Trip e.g. OEM emergency stop (between terminals 22 and 29)
• Drive OK on Relay (between terminals 41 and 42)
The following connections are used at a minimum to put the drive in to a basic test mode:
• Drive Enable (between terminals 22 and 31)
• Run/Stop (between terminals 22 and 26)
• Drive Reset (between terminals 22 and 25)
• Speed Reference 0 to 10 V (between terminals 4, 8 and 11)
• Set Pr 00.006 bit 3 = 1 to disable Envelope Control
7.1.2 Settings for Analog Speed Command with Envelope Control

Table 7-1 lists the parameters and corresponding values that need to be configured before the drive will operate in analog / digital control mode using
envelope control. The following parameters are the default values for the drive assuming that an 18 bar sensor is used for suction and a 50 bar sensor
is used for discharge.
Table 7-1 Settings for Analog Speed Command with Envelope Control
Modbus
Parameter Description Value Device
setting
Analog Input 1 4 (4-20 mA)
07.007 AI1 Control 4 (4-20 mA)
Suction Pressure 6 (0 - 10 V)
07.008 Scaling 0.398 (4-20 mA) 1.000
Or
07.010 Destination Address 0.014 Analog Reference 01.036
Analog Input 2 4 (4-20 mA)
07.011 AI2 Control 4 (4-20 mA)
Discharge Pressure 6 (0 - 10 V)
07.012 Scaling 1.106 (4-20 mA) 1.000
Or
07.014 Destination Address 0.013 Analog Reference 01.037
07.015 AI3 Control 6 (Volt) 6 (Volt)

Analog input 3
07.016 Scaling 1.000 0-10 V Speed Reference (Volt) 1.000
07.018 Destination Address 0.008 0.000
NOTE
If source or destination parameters are changed, such as Pr 07.010, Pr 07.014 or Pr 07.018, then the drive must be reset (by pressing the button)
before any changes will take effect. It is also good practice to save parameters after being adjusted so that new values will not be lost when drive
power cycled.
96 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
The drive assumes that the pressure transducer is rated in [bar]. However, the drive is configured to display the measured suction and discharge
pressure in [PSIG]. The drive can be configured to display the pressures in [bar] by adjusting Pr 00.006 [bit 5]=1.
The scaling values for Pr 07.008 and Pr 07.012 in Table 7-1 will need to be recalculated under the following scenarios:
1. The suction transducer is not rated for 18 [bar] and/or the discharge transducer is not rated for 50 [bar].
2. The user wants to view the pressure in [bar] units.
Example 1:
Calculating the scaling values for an 18 bar (suction) transducer and for a 50 bar (discharge) transducer; displaying units in [bar].
Set Pr 00.006 bit 5 = 1.
18[bar]  100
Pr 07.008 = ------------------------------------ = 0.027
65535
50[bar]  100
Pr 07.012 = ------------------------------------ = 0.076
65535
Example 2: (drive default values)
Calculating the scaling values for an 18 bar (suction) transducer and for a 50 bar (discharge) transducer; displaying units in [PSIG].
Set Pr 00.006 bit 5 = 0. Note that a factor of 14.5 [PSIG] per 1 [bar] is added in to the equation below.
18[bar]  100  14.5  PSIG per bar 

Pr 07.008 = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ = 0.398
65535
50[bar]  100  14.5  PSIG per bar 

Pr 07.012 = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ = 1.106
65535
In summary, use the following equations to calculate the scaling values for Table 7-1.
 FullBarValue   100
scale[PSIG] = -------------------------------------------------------------- = 1.106
65535
 FullBarValue   100  14.5

scale[bar] = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
65535
7.1.3 DLT Thermistor Set-up

The drive must be configured to Keypad / Modbus Control Mode before the drive will accept a DLT thermistor input. The reason being is that AI3 can
only be used as a speed command input when in Analog/Digital Control Mode. Using a DLT thermistor requires the sensor and a 10 k 1 % resistor
to be connected to drive terminals 4, 8, and 11 according to Figure 7-1. Contact an Emerson Climate Technologies application engineer to discuss
appropriate thermistor types.
Figure 7-1 DLT Thermistor Set-up
4 + 10 V
10 kW 1 % resistor
8 AI 3
Thermistor
11 0V common
The following drive parameters must be configured before the drive will accept an input from a DLT thermistor.
• Set Pr 00.006 [bit 8] = 1: to enable Keypad / Modbus Control Mode.
• Set Pr 00.006 [bit 13] = 0: to set DLT from Modbus source (default), or 1: to set DLT from AI3 source.
• Set Pr 00.006 [bit 9] = 0: to disable DLT protection (default) or 1: to enable DLT protection.
• Set Pr 00.006 [bit 4] = 0: for Fahrenheit (default), or 1: for Celsius.
• Ensure that Pr 07.015 = 6 (Volt)
• Ensure that Pr 07.016 = 1.000
• Ensure that Pr 07.018 = 0.000; toggle drive reset before change will take effect.
• Read DLT values from Pr 00.023 to ensure that the setup is complete.
• Save drive parameters.
Drive User Guide 97

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
7.1.4 Basic requirements for Modbus control mode

This section will guide you through the steps to configure the drive to run in Modbus control mode.
• Drive Enable/Pressure Switch (between terminals 22 and 31)
• Connection to OEM controller via RJ485 port
Once the appropriate control connections have been made to the drive then adjust the following parameters to configure the drive into Modbus control
mode:
Set the following parameters:
• Pr 00.006 bit 8 = 1 (default is 0)
• Adjust other features in Pr 00.006 as required
• Adjust Pr 07.010 = 0.0
• Adjust Pr 07.014 = 0.0
• Adjust Pr 07.018 = 0.0
• Set desired speed with Pr 00.008
• Control drive operation from PLC via adjusting the bits in Pr 00.007 as required
• Set Pr 00.006 bit 3 = 1 to disable Envelope Control (if required)
NOTE
If source or destination parameters are changed, such as Pr 07.010, Pr 07.014 or Pr 07.018, then the drive must be reset (by pressing the button)
before any changes will take effect. It is also good practice to save parameters after being adjusted so that new values will not be lost when drive
power cycled.
Details on Pr 00.006 and Pr 00.007 can be found in section 6.2 Detailed compressor function descriptions on page 75.
If the drive has previously been configured to run in Modbus control mode then there are two ways to configure the drive back into analog / digital
control mode.
1. The simplest option is to reset the drive back to factory defaults. The drawback to this method is that ALL parameters are defaulted. If other drive
parameters have been customized then they will be lost.
• Position the keypad to any "zero" parameter (i.e. Pr MM.000); press enter.
• Scroll up to "Reset 60 Hz defs", press enter.
2. The second option is to manually configure the drive back into the analog / digital control mode. This method will retain all other parameter
modifications previously made to the drive.
Set the following parameters:
• Pr 00.006 bit 8 = 0
• Adjust other features in Pr 00.006 as required
• Verify that Pr 00.007 = 0
• Reconfigure analog inputs according to Table 7-1
• Control drive operation via I/O switch on pins 26 and 31
Details on Pr 00.006 and Pr 00.007 can be found in section 6.2 Detailed compressor function descriptions on page 75.
7.2 Control mode configurations

7.2.1 Analog I/O configurations
The following drive parameters will need to be configured via HVAC Connect or a temporary snap on keypad before the remote keypad will begin to
function (as illustrated in Figure 7-2):
• Adjust Serial Baud Rate Pr 00.068 = 115200
• Adjust Serial Address Pr 00.066 = 1
• Adjust Serial Mode Pr 00.067 = 8 2 NP
• Set Pr 11.020 = 'On' (this parameter will then turn back to 'Off' automatically)
• Save the drive parameters
Adjusting the drive parameters can be accomplished in one of three ways:
1. Temporarily use a clip on keypad to make the changes.
2. Download and install the HVAC Connect software to communicate with the drive via an optional USB-to-RJ485 adaptor.
3. Use a pre-configured smart card and adaptor to "clone" the drive parameters.
The remote keypad can be connected to either of the RJ485 ports on the drive via a RJ45 cable.
Alternatively, if none of the three the items above are available to make changes to the drive parameters, a KI-485 Adaptor can be purchased. This
alternative method will allow the remote keypad to function without having to change ANY drive parameters. Refer to section 7.2.2 for additional
details.
98 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Figure 7-2 Remote keypad via 485 port
Snap on Keypad
(optional)
Or
Remote Keypad
(optional)
RJ45 cable
NOTE
The snap on keypad and the remote keypad can both be used simultaneously in this configuration.
7.2.2 Modbus configurations

When the drive is configured for Modbus control mode, an OEM controller is communicating as the master to the drive. Subsequently, the optional
remote keypad is also a 485 master device. And while the drive has two RJ485 ports, they make up a single 485 channel. Therefore the second 485
port cannot be used for any other reason except to "daisy chain" the OEM controller to additional drives if the application requires. Therefore, the only
way to connect an optional remote keypad to the drive would be through the use of a KI-485 Adaptor (as illustrated in Figure 7-3).
Figure 7-3 Remote keypad via KI-485 Adaptor
Snap on Keypad
(optional)
OEM
controller
Or
4
RJ45 cable Remote Keypad
(optional)
KI-485 Adaptor
One benefit of using the KI-485 Adaptor, in either analog / digital control mode or in Modbus control mode, is that no parameter changes are required
before the remote keypad will function with the drive.
Drive User Guide 99

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Figure 7-4 Minimum connections to get the motor running in Analog / digital control mode (size 5)
1
2
3
+10 V
4 Suction
Pressure Sensor
5 4-20 mA, 18 Bar
6 Discharge
Pressure Sensor
7 4-20 mA, 50 Bar
8 Speed signal 0-10 V
9
10
11
GND
21
22 24V
23
24 Compressor On Drive
25 Reset
26 Start/Controlled Stop
27 Stator Heater On
28 Defrost Control
L1 L2 L3 29 User Trip
30
31
U V W Safe Torque Off
(drive enable)
Safety Pressure Switch
Fuses
Compressor L1 L2 L3
Optional ground
connection
100 Drive User Guide

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Figure 7-5 Minimum connections to get the motor running in Modbus control mode (size 5)
1
2
3
+10 V
4
RS485 5
6
7
Discharge line
Communications 8 temperature
port
(optional)
9
10
11
OEM 0V common
Controller
21
22 24V
23
24
25
26
27
28
L1 L2 L3 29
30
31
U V W Safe Torque Off
(drive enable)
Fuses
Compressor
L1 L2 L3
Optional ground
connection
Drive User Guide 101

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
1
2
3
+10 V
4 Suction
Pressure Sensor
5 4-20 mA, 18 Bar
6 Discharge
Pressure Sensor
7 4-20 mA, 50 Bar
9
10
11
GND
21
22 24V
23
25 Reset
26 Start/Controlled stop
27 Stator Heater On
28 Defrost Control
29 User Trip
30
31
Safe Torque Off
L1 L2 L3 U V W (drive enable)
Fuses
L1 L2 L3
Compressor
Optional ground
connection

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
L3 L2 L1
Fuses
1
2
L1 L2 L3 3
+10 V
4 Suction
Pressure Sensor
5 4-20 mA, 18 Bar
6 Discharge
Pressure Sensor
7 4-20 mA, 50 Bar
9
10
11
GND
7
21
22 24 V
23
25 Reset
26 Start / Controlled stop
27 Stator Heating On
28 Defrost Control
29 User Trip
U V W
30
31
Safe Torque Off
(Drive Enable)
Compressor
Optional ground
connection

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
L3 L2 L1
Fuses
1
2
L1 L2 L3 3
+10 V
4
5
6
7 Discharge line
8 temperature
(optional)
9
Communications
port 10
11
0V common
7
OEM Controller 21
22 24 V
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
U V W
30
31
Safe Torque Off
(Drive Enable)
Compressor
Optional ground
connection

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
8 NV Media Card Operation Figure 8-2 Basic NV Media Card operation
8.1 Introduction
The Non-Volatile Media Card feature enables simple configuration of
parameters, parameter back-up, storing / reading PLC programs and
drive copying using a SMARTCARD or SD card storing / reading PLC Drive reads all
programs. parameters from
the NV Media Card
The NV Media Card can be used for:
• Parameter copying between drives
• Saving drive parameter sets
• Saving an onboard user program
The NV Media Card is located at the top of the module under the drive Pr 00.071 = Read +
display (if installed) on the left-hand side.
Ensure the NV Media Card is inserted with the contacts facing the left-
hand side of the drive.
The drive only communicates with the NV Media Card when Programs all drive
commanded to read or write, meaning the card may be "hot swapped". parameters to the
NV Media Card
NOTE
Beware of possible live terminals when installing the NV Overwrites any
Media Card. data already in
data block 1
WARNING
Figure 8-1 Installation of the NV Media Card Pr 00.071 = Program +
Drive automatically
writes to the
NV Media Card
when a parameter Auto
save is performed Save
Pr 00.030 = Auto +
Boot Drive boots from the

NV Media Card on
power up and
automatically writes
to the NV Media Card
when a parameter
1. Installing the NV Media Card Auto Save save is performed
2. NV Media Card installed
NV Media Card Part number Pr 00.071 = Boot +

SD Card Adaptor (memory card not included) TBC*
8 kB SMARTCARD TBC*
64 kB SMARTCARD TBC* The whole card may be protected from writing or erasing by setting the
* Part numbers were not available at time of printing. Please contact read-only flag as detailed in section 8.3.9 9888 / 9777 - Setting and
your Emerson Climate Technologies application engineer when ordering clearing the NV Media Card read only flag on page 108.
parts. The card should not be removed during data transfer, as the drive will
produce a trip. If this occurs then either the transfer should be
8.2 NV Media Card support reattempted or in the case of a card to drive transfer, default parameters
should be loaded.
The NV Media Card can be used to store drive parameter sets from the
drive in data blocks 001 to 499 on the card.

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
8.3 Transferring data

Data transfer, erasing and protecting the information is performed by entering a code in Pr mm.000 and then resetting the drive as shown in Table 8-1.
Table 8-1 SMARTCARD and SD card codes
Code Operation SMARTCARD SD card

Transfer the drive parameters to parameter file 001 and sets the block as bootable. This will include the
2001  
parameters from attached option modules.
Transfer the drive parameters to parameter file yyy. This will include the parameters from attached option
4yyy  
modules.
6yyy Load the drive parameters from parameter file yyy.  
7yyy Erase file yyy.  
Compare the data in the drive with file yyy. If the files are the same then Pr mm.000 (mm.000) is simply
8yyy reset to 0 when the compare is complete. If the files are different a ‘Card Compare’ trip is initiated. All  
other NV media card trips also apply.
9555 Clear the warning suppression flag  
9666 Set the warning suppression flag  
9777 Clear the read-only flag  
9888 Set the read-only flag  
9999 Erase and format the NV media card 
Where yyy indicates the block number 001 to 999. Pr 05.009 Rated Voltage
NOTE
Pr 05.017 Stator Resistance
Pr 05.018 Maximum Switching Frequency
If the read only flag is set then only codes 6yyy or 9777 are effective.
Pr 05.024 Ld
8.3.1 Writing to the NV Media Card Pr 06.048 Supply Loss Detection Level
4yyy - Writes defaults differences to the NV Media Card Pr 06.065 Standard Under Voltage Threshold
The data block only contains the parameter differences from the last
time default settings were loaded. Pr 06.066 Low Under Voltage Threshold
All parameters except those with the NC (Not copied) coding bit set are Reading a parameter set from the NV Media Card (Pr 11.042
transferred to the NV Media Card. = Read (1))
Setting Pr 11.042 to Read (1) and resetting the drive will transfer the
Writing a parameter set to the NV Media Card (Pr 11.042 = parameters from the card into the drive parameter set and the drive
Program (2))
EEPROM, i.e. this is equivalent to writing 6001 to Pr mm.000.
Setting Pr 11.042 to Program (2) and resetting the drive will save the
parameters to the NV Media Card, i.e. this is equivalent to writing 4001 All NV Media Card trips apply. Once the parameters are successfully
to Pr mm.000. All NV Media Card trips apply except 'Card Change'. If copied this parameter is automatically reset to None (0). Parameters are
the data block already exists it is automatically overwritten. When the saved to the drive EEPROM after this action is complete.
action is complete this parameter is automatically reset to None (0).
8.3.3 Auto saving parameter changes (Pr 11.042 =
8.3.2 Reading from the NV Media Card Auto (3))
6yyy - Reading from NV Media Card This setting causes the drive to automatically save any changes made to
When the data is transferred back to the drive, using 6yyy in Pr mm.000, menu 0 parameters on the drive to the NV Media Card. The latest menu
it is transferred to the drive RAM and the EEPROM. A parameter save is 0 parameter set in the drive is therefore always backed up on the NV
not required to retain the data after-power down. Set up data for any Media Card. Changing Pr 11.042 to Auto (3) and resetting the drive will
option modules installed stored on the card are transferred to the drive. If immediately save the complete parameter set from the drive to the card,
the option modules installed are different between source and i.e. all parameters except parameters with the NC coding bit set. Once
destination drives, the menus for the option module slots where the the whole parameter set is stored only the individual modified menu 0
option module categories are different are not updated from the card and parameter setting is updated.
will contain their default values after the copying action. The drive will Advanced parameter changes are only saved to the NV Media Card
produce a 'Card Option' trip if the option module installed to the source when Pr mm.000 is set to 'Save Parameters' or a 1000 and the drive
and the destination drives are different or are in different slots. If the data reset.
is being transferred to the drive with different voltage or current rating a
All NV Media Card trips apply, except 'Card Change'. If the data block
'Card Rating' trip will occur.
already contains information it is automatically overwritten.
The following drive rating dependant parameters (RA coding bit set) will
If the card is removed when Pr 11.042 is set to 3 Pr 11.042 is then
not be transferred to the destination drive by a NV Media Card when the
automatically set to None (0).
voltage rating of the destination drive is different from the source drive
and the file is a parameter file. When a new NV Media Card is installed Pr 11.042 must be set back to
Auto (3) by the user and the drive reset so the complete parameter set is
However, drive rating dependent parameters will be transferred if only
rewritten to the new NV Media Card if auto mode is still required.
the current rating is different. If drive rating dependant parameters are
not transferred to the destination drive they will contain their default When Pr 11.042 is set to Auto (3) and the parameters in the drive are
values. saved, the NV Media Card is also updated, and therefore the NV Media
Card becomes a copy of the drives stored configuration.
Pr 02.008 Standard Ramp Voltage
Pr 04.005 to Pr 04.007 Motoring Current Limits
Pr 04.024, User Current Maximum Scaling
Pr 05.007 Rated Current

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
At power up, if Pr 11.042 is set to Auto (3), the drive will save the 8.3.9 9888 / 9777 - Setting and clearing the NV Media
complete parameter set to the NV Media Card. The drive will display Card read only flag
'Card Write' during this operation. This is done to ensure that if a user The NV Media Card may be protected from writing or erasing by setting
puts a new NV Media Card in during power down the new NV Media the read only flag. If an attempt is made to write or erase a data block
Card will have the correct data. when the read only flag is set, a 'Card Read Only' trip is initiated. When
NOTE
the read only flag is set only codes 6yyy or 9777 are effective.
When Pr 11.042 is set to Auto (3) the setting of Pr 11.042 itself is saved • Setting 9888 in Pr mm.000 will set the read only flag
to the drive EEPROM but not the NV Media Card. • Setting 9777 in Pr mm.000 will clear the read only flag
8.3.4 Booting up from the NV Media Card on every 8.4 Data block header information
power up (Pr 11.042 = Boot (4))
When Pr 11.042 is set to Boot (4) the drive operates the same as Auto Each data block stored on a NV Media Card has header information
mode except when the drive is powered-up. The parameters on the NV detailing the following:
Media Card will be automatically transferred to the drive at power up if • NV Media Card File Number (11.037)
the following are true: • NV Media Card File Type (11.038)
• A card is inserted in the drive • NV Media Card File Version (11.039)
• Parameter data block 1 exists on the card • NV Media Card File Checksum (11.040)
• The data in block 1 is type 1 to 4 (as defined in Pr 11.038) The header information for each data block which has been used can be
• Pr 11.042 on the card set to Boot (4) viewed in Pr 11.038 to Pr 11.040 by increasing or decreasing the data
block number set in Pr 11.037. If there is no data on the card Pr 11.037
The drive will display 'Booting Parameters during this operation. If the
can only have a value of 0.
drive mode is different from that on the card, the drive gives a 'Card
Drive Mode' trip and the data is not transferred. 8.5 NV Media Card parameters
If 'Boot' mode is stored on the copying NV Media Card this makes the Table 8-2 Key to parameter table coding
copying NV Media Card the master device. This provides a very fast and
efficient way of re-programming a number of drives. RW Read / Write ND No default value
RO Read only NC Not copied
NOTE
Num Number parameter PT Protected parameter
'Boot' mode is saved to the card, but when the card is read, the value of
Pr 11.042 is not transferred to the drive. Bit Bit parameter RA Rating dependant
Txt Text string US User save
8.3.5 Booting up from the NV Media Card on every
Bin Binary parameter PS Power-down save
power up (Pr mm.000 = 2001)
It is possible to create a bootable parameter data block by setting FI Filtered DE Destination
Pr mm.000 to 2001 and initiating a drive reset. This data block is created
in one operation and is not updated when further parameter changes are 11.036 {00.029} NV Media Card File Previously Loaded
made. RO Num NC PT
Setting Pr mm.000 to 2001 will overwrite the data block 1 on the card if it  0 to 999  0
already exists.
This parameter shows the number of the data block last transferred from
8.3.6 8yyy - Comparing the drive full parameter set a NV Media Card to the drive. If defaults are subsequently reloaded this
with the NV Media Card values parameter is set to 0.
Setting 8yyy in Pr mm.000, will compare the NV Media Card file with the
data in the drive. If the compare is successful Pr mm.000 is simply set to 11.037 NV Media Card File Number
0. If the compare fails a 'Card Compare' trip is initiated. RW Num NC PT
8.3.7 7yyy / 9999 - Erasing data from the NV Media  0 to 999  0
Card values
This parameter should have the data block number which the user would
Data can be erased from the NV Media Card either one block at a time
or all blocks in one go. like the information displayed in Pr 11.038, Pr 11.039 and Pr 11.040.
• Setting 7yyy in Pr mm.000 will erase NV Media Card data block yyy
• Setting 9999 in Pr mm.000 will erase all the data blocks on a
11.038 NV Media Card File Type
SMARTCARD, but not on an SD Card.
RO Txt ND NC PT
8.3.8 9666 / 9555 - Setting and clearing the NV Media  RFC-S (3) 
Card warning suppression flag
If the option modules installed to the source and destination drive are Displays the type/mode of the data block selected with Pr 11.037.
different or are in different slots the drive will produce a 'Card Option' trip.
If the data is being transferred to a drive of a different voltage or current Pr 11.038 String Type / mode
rating a 'Card Rating' trip will occur. It is possible to suppress these trips 3 RFC-S RFC-S mode parameter file
by setting the warning suppression flag. If this flag is set the drive will not
trip if the option module(s) or drive ratings are different between the
source and destination drives. The options module or rating dependent
11.039 NV Media Card File Version
parameters will not be transferred.
RO Num ND NC PT
• Setting 9666 in Pr mm.000 will set the warning suppression flag
• Setting 9555 in Pr mm.000 will clear the warning suppression flag  0 to 9999 
Displays the version number of the file selected in Pr 11.037.

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
8.6 NV Media Card trips

11.040 NV Media Card File Checksum After an attempt to read, write or erase data from a NV Media Card a trip
is initiated if there has been a problem with the command.
RO Num ND NC PT
See Chapter 12 Diagnostics on page 189 for more information on NV
 --2147483648 to 2147483647 
Media Card trips.
Displays the checksum of the data block selected in Pr 11.037.
11.042 Parameter Cloning

RW Txt NC US*
None (0), Read (1), Program (2),
 Auto (3), Boot (4)
 None (0)
* Only a value of 3 or 4 in this parameter is saved.

NOTE
If Pr 11.042 is equal to 1 or 2, this value is not transferred to the drive or
saved to the EEPROM. If Pr 11.042 is set to 3 or 4 the value is saved to
the EEPROM
None (0) = Inactive
Read (1) = Read parameter set from the NV Media Card
Program (2) = Program a parameter set to the NV Media Card
Auto (3) = Auto save
Boot (4) = Boot mode
11.073 NV Media Card Type

RO Txt ND NC PT
None (0),
 SMART Card (1), 
SD Card (2)
This will display the type of media card inserted; it will contain one of the
following values:
"None" (0) - No NV Media Card has been inserted.
"SMART Card" (1) - A SMARTCARD has been inserted.
"SD Card" (2) - A FAT formatted SD card has been inserted.
11.075 NV Media Card Read-only Flag

RO Bit ND NC PT
 Off (0) or On (1) 
NV Media Card Read-only Flag (11.075) shows the state of the read-
only flag for the currently installed card.
11.076 NV Media Card Warning Suppression Flag

RO Bit ND NC PT
 Off (0) or On (1) 
NV Media Card Warning Suppression Flag (11.076) shows the state of
the warning flag for the currently installed card.
11.077 NV Media Card File Required Version

RW Num ND NC PT
 0 to 9999 
The value of NV Media Card File Required Version (11.077) is used as
the version number for a file when it is created on an NV Media Card. NV
Media Card File Required Version (11.077) is reset to 0 when the file is
created or the transfer fails.

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
9 Advanced parameters Table 9-2 Key to parameter table coding
Coding Attribute
This is a quick reference to all parameters in the drive showing units,
ranges limits etc, with block diagrams to illustrate their function. Full RW Read/Write: can be written by the user
descriptions of the parameters can be found in the Parameter Reference RO Read only: can only be read by the user
Guide. Bit 1 bit parameter. ‘On’ or ‘Off’ on the display
These advanced parameters are listed for reference Num Number: can be uni-polar or bi-polar
purposes only. The lists in this chapter do not include Txt Text: the parameter uses text strings instead of numbers.
sufficient information for adjusting these parameters. Bin Binary parameter
Incorrect adjustment can affect the safety of the system,
WARNING IP IP Address parameter
and damage the drive and or external equipment. Before
attempting to adjust any of these parameters, refer to Mac Mac Address parameter
the Parameter Reference Guide. Date Date parameter
Time Time parameter
Table 9-1 Menu descriptions Filtered: some parameters which can have rapidly changing
FI values are filtered when displayed on the drive keypad for
Menu Description easy viewing.
Commonly used basic set up parameters for quick / easy Destination: This parameter selects the destination of an
0 DE
programming input or logic function.
1 Frequency / Speed reference Rating dependent: this parameter is likely to have different
2 Ramps values and ranges with drives of different voltage and
3 Speed feedback and speed control current ratings. Parameters with this attribute will be
4 Torque and current control transferred to the destination drive by non-volatile storage
5 Motor control RA media when the rating of the destination drive is different
from the source drive and the file is a parameter file.
6 Sequencer and clock
However, the values will be transferred if only the current
7 Analog I/O rating is different and the file is a difference from default
8 Digital I/O type file.
10 Status and trips No default: The parameter is not modified when defaults are
ND
11 Drive set-up and identification, serial communications loaded
15 Option module slot 1 set-up menu Not copied: not transferred to or from non-volatile media
NC
16 Option module slot 2 set-up menu during copying.
17 Option module slot 3 set-up menu PT Protected: cannot be used as a destination.
18 Reserved menu User save: parameter saved in drive EEPROM when the
US
19 Reserved menu user initiates a parameter save.
20 Reserved menu Power-down save: parameter automatically saved in drive
PS
22 Menu 0 set-up EEPROM when the under volts (UV) trip occurs.
21 Reserved menu
23 Reserved menu
28 Reserved menu
* Only displayed when the option modules are installed.

Operation mode abbreviations:
RFC-S Sensorless: Synchronous Rotor Flux Sensorless Control for
synchronous motors including permanent magnet motors.
Default abbreviations:
Standard default value (50 Hz AC supply frequency)
USA default value (60 Hz AC supply frequency)
NOTE
Parameter numbers shown in brackets {...} are the equivalent Menu 0
parameters. Some Menu 0 parameters appear twice since their function
depends on the operating mode.
In some cases, the function or range of a parameter is affected by the
setting of another parameter. The information in the lists relates to the
default condition of any parameters affected in this way.

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
9.1 Parameter ranges and Variable minimum/maximums:

Some parameters in the drive have a variable range with a variable minimum and a variable maximum values which is dependent on one of the
following:
• The settings of other parameters
• The drive rating
• The drive mode
• Combination of any of the above
The tables below give the definition of variable minimum/maximum and the maximum range of these.
VM_AC_VOLTAGE Range applied to parameters showing AC voltage

Units V
Range of [MIN] 0
Range of [MAX] 0 to the value listed below
VM_AC_VOLTAGE[MAX] is drive voltage rating dependent. See Table 9-3
Definition
VM_AC_VOLTAGE[MIN] = 0
VM_AC_VOLTAGE_SET Range applied to the AC voltage set-up parameters

Units V
Range of [MIN] 0
VM_AC_VOLTAGE[MAX] is drive voltage rating dependent. See Table 9-3
Definition
VM_AC_VOLTAGE[MIN] = 0
VM_ACCEL_RATE Maximum applied to the ramp rate parameters

Units s / 1000 rpm
Range of [MIN] 0.000
Range of [MAX] 0.000 to 3200.000
VM_ACCEL_RATE[MAX] = 3200.000
Definition
VM_ACCEL_RATE[MIN] = 0.000
VM_DC_VOLTAGE Range applied to parameters showing DC voltage

Units V
Range of [MIN] 0
VM_DC_VOLTAGE[MAX] is the full scale d.c. link voltage feedback (over voltage trip level) for the drive. This level is
drive voltage rating dependent. See Table 9-3
Definition
VM_DC_VOLTAGE[MIN] = 0
VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET Range applied to DC voltage reference parameters

Units V
Range of [MIN] 0
VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET[MAX] is drive voltage rating dependent. See Table 9-3
Definition
VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET[MIN] = 0

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
VM_DRIVE_CURRENT Range applied to parameters showing current in A

Units A
Range of [MIN] -99999.999 to 0.000
Range of [MAX] 0.000 to 99999.999
VM_DRIVE_CURRENT[MAX] is equivalent to the full scale (over current trip level) or Kc value for the drive and is given
by Full Scale Current Kc (11.061).
Definition
VM_DRIVE_CURRENT[MIN] = - VM_DRIVE_CURRENT[MAX]
VM_DRIVE_CURRENT_UNIPOLAR Unipolar version of VM_DRIVE_CURRENT

Units A
Range of [MAX] 0.000 to 99999.999
VM_DRIVE_CURRENT_UNIPOLAR[MAX] = VM_DRIVE_CURRENT[MAX]
Definition
VM_DRIVE_CURRENT_UNIPOLAR[MIN] = 0.000
VM_HIGH_DC_VOLTAGE Range applied to parameters showing high DC voltage

Units V
Range of [MIN] 0
Range of [MAX] 0 to 1500
VM_HIGH_DC_VOLTAGE[MAX] is the full scale d.c. link voltage feedback for the high d.c. link voltage measurement
which can measure the voltage if it goes above the normal full scale value. This level is drive voltage rating dependent.
Definition See Table 9-3
VM_HIGH_DC_VOLTAGE[MIN] = 0
VM_LOW_UNDER_VOLTS Range applied the low under-voltage threshold

Units V
Range of [MIN] 24
If Back-up Mode Enable (06.068) = 0:
VM_LOW_UNDER_VOLTS[MAX] = VM_STD_UNDER_VOLTS[MIN]
If Back-up Mode Enable (06.068) = 1:
Definition
VM_LOW_UNDER_VOLTS[MAX] = VM_STD_UNDER_VOLTS[MIN] / 1.1.
VM_LOW_UNDER_VOLTS[MIN] = 24.
VM_MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT
Range applied to current limit parameters
VM_MOTOR2_CURRENT_LIMIT
Units %
Range of [MIN] 0.0
Range of [MAX] 0.0 to 1000.0
VM_MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT[MIN] = 0.0
VM_MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT[MAX] = (IMaxRef / Pr 05.007) x 100 %

Definition Where:
It is the lower of 0.9 x Pr 11.061 or 1.1 x Pr 11.060
For VM_MOTOR2_CURRENT_LIMIT[MAX] use Pr 21.007 instead of Pr 05.007 and Pr 21.010 instead of Pr 05.010.

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
VM_POWER Range applied to parameters that either set or display power

Units kW
Range of [MIN] -99999.999 to 0.000
Range of [MAX] 0.000 to 99999.999
VM_POWER[MAX] is rating dependent and is chosen to allow for the maximum power that can be output by the drive
with maximum a.c. output voltage, at maximum controlled current and unity power factor.
Definition
VM_POWER[MAX] = 3 x VM_AC_VOLTAGE[MAX] x VM_DRIVE_CURRENT[MAX] / 1000
VM_POWER[MIN] = -VM_POWER[MAX]
VM_RATED_CURRENT Range applied to rated current parameters

Units A
Range of [MIN] -99999.999 to 0.000
Range of [MAX] 0.000 to 99999.999
VM_RATED_CURRENT [MAX] = Maximum Rated Current (11.060) and is dependent on the drive rating.
Definition
VM_RATED_CURRENT [MIN] = 0.00
VM_SPEED Range applied to parameters showing speed

Units rpm or mm/s
Range of [MIN] -50000.0 to 0.0
This variable minimum/maximum defines the range of speed monitoring parameters. To allow headroom for overshoot
the range is set to twice the range of the speed references.
Definition
VM_SPEED[MAX] = 2 x VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MAX]
VM_SPEED[MIN] = 2 x VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MIN]
VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF Range applied to the frequency or speed reference parameters

Units rpm or mm/s
If Pr 01.008 = 0: VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MAX] = Pr 01.006
If Pr 01.008 = 1: VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MAX] = Pr 01.006 or |Pr 01.007|, whichever is larger.
Definition
VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MIN] = -VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MAX].
VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF_UNIPOLAR Unipolar version of VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF

Units rpm or mm/s
Range of [MIN] 0.0
VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF_UNIPOLAR[MAX] = VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MAX]
Definition
VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF_UNIPOLAR[MIN] = 0.0

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
VM_SPEED_FREQ_USER_REFS Range applied to some Menu 1 reference parameters

Units rpm or mm/s
Range of [MIN] -50000.0 to 50000.0
VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF_UNIPOLAR[MAX] = VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MAX]
Negative Reference Bipolar Reference

VM_SPEED_FREQ_USER_REFS [MIN]
Clamp Enable (01.008) Enable (01.010)
Definition 0 0 Pr 01.007
0 1 -VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MAX]
1 0 0.0
1 1 -VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MAX]
VM_STD_UNDER_VOLTS Range applied the standard under-voltage threshold

Units V
Range of [MIN] 0 to 1150
VM_STD_UNDER_VOLTS[MAX] = VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET / 1.1
Definition
VM_STD_UNDER_VOLTS[MIN] is voltage rating dependent. See Table 9-3
VM_SUPPLY_LOSS_LEVEL Maximum applied to the ramp rate parameters

Units s / 100 Hz, s / 1000 rpm, s / 1000 mm/s
Range of [MAX] 0.000 to 3200.000
VM_SUPPLY_LOSS_LEVEL[MAX] = VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET[MAX]
Definition
VM_SUPPLY_LOSS_LEVEL[MIN] is drive voltage rating dependent. See Table 9-3
VM_SWITCHING_FREQUENCY Range applied the switching frequency parameters

Units
Range of [MIN] 0
Range of [MAX] 6
VM_SWITCHING_FREQUENCY[MAX] = Power stage dependent
Definition
VM_SWITCHING_FREQUENCY[MIN] = 0
VM_TORQUE_CURRENT Range applied to torque and torque producing current parameters

Units %
Definition VM_TORQUE_CURRENT[MIN] = -VM_TORQUE_CURRENT[MAX]
VM_TORQUE_CURRENT_UNIPOLAR Unipolar version of VM_TORQUE_CURRENT

Units %
Range of [MIN] 0.0
VM_TORQUE_CURRENT_UNIPOLAR[MAX] = VM_TORQUE_CURRENT[MAX]
Definition
VM_TORQUE_CURRENT_UNIPOLAR[MIN] =0.0

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
VM_USER_CURRENT Range applied to torque reference and percentage load parameters with one decimal place
Units %
VM_USER_CURRENT[MAX] = User Current Maximum Scaling (04.024)
Definition
VM_USER_CURRENT[MIN] = -VM_USER_CURRENT[MAX]
Range applied to torque reference and percentage load parameters with two decimal
VM_USER_CURRENT_HIGH_RES
places
Units %
Range of [MIN] -1000.00 to 0.00
VM_USER_CURRENT_HIGH_RES[MAX] = User Current Maximum Scaling (04.024) with an additional decimal place
Definition
VM_USER_CURRENT_HIGH_RES[MIN] = -VM_USER_CURRENT_HIGH_RES[MAX]
Table 9-3 Voltage ratings dependant values
Voltage level (V)

Variable min/max
200 V 400 V 575 V
VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET(MAX] 400 800 955
VM_DC_VOLTAGE(MAX] 415 830 990
VM_AC_VOLTAGE_SET(MAX] 240 480 575
VM_AC_VOLTAGE[MAX] 325 650 780
VM_STD_UNDER_VOLTS[MIN] 175 330 435
VM_SUPPLY_LOSS_LEVEL{MIN] 205 410 540
VM_HIGH_DC_VOLTAGE 1500 1500 1500

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
9.2 Menu 1: Frequency / speed reference

Figure 9-1 Menu 1 logic diagram
0
Compressor Control Menu 29 Preset References
Analog Input 3
8 29.017 29.013 01.021 1
User Speed Soft Start Preset Reference 1 Preset Reference

Reference Speed
Preset Reference
Reference
Selector
Selected
29.018 01.022 2 01.015 Indicator
1.20
Speed Reference Preset Reference 2
01.049
After Envelope Control
29.023 01.023 +
3
Shutdown Preset Reference 3 +

Hold Speed
Zero Speed 01.024 4 01.038 01.001

Percentage
Preset Reference 4 01.050 Trim Reference
Selected
Preset
29.037 01.025 5 Selected Indicator
User Defrost Preset Reference 5

Speed Reference
29.028 01.026 6
Oil Return Speed Preset Reference 6
Key
X Input Read-write (RW)

X terminals mm.ppp
parameter
X Output mm.ppp Read-only (RO)

X
terminals parameter
The parameters are all shown in their default settings

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Start / Controlled
stop
26
Menu 8
Compressor control (Menu 29)
Sequencer (Menu 6) Reference in skip

freq./speed band
indicator
Reference 01.035
01.011 enabled
indicator Pre-ramp
reference
Pre-filter
01.002 reference 01.003
[01.006]
[01.007]
Menu 2
01.006
Maximum
freq./speed
"clamp"
01.007
Minimum
freq./speed
"clamp"
01.029 01.031 01.033

Skip freq./ Skip freq./ Skip freq./
speed 1 speed 2 speed 3
01.030 01.032 01.034

Skip freq./ Skip freq./ Skip freq./
speed band speed band speed band
1 2 3
Resonance Avoidance

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Parameter Range() Default() Type

01.001 Reference Selected VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF rpm RO Num ND NC PT
01.002 Pre-Skip Filter Reference VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF rpm RO Num ND NC PT
01.003 Pre-Ramp Reference VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF rpm RO Num ND NC PT
01.006 Maximum Reference Clamp 7200 rpm 7200 rpm RW Num US
01.007 Minimum Reference Clamp 1000 rpm 1000 rpm RW Num US
01.008 Negative Reference Clamp Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
01.010 Bipolar Reference Enable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
01.011 Reference On Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
A1 A2 (0), A1 Preset (1), A2 Preset (2), Preset (3),
01.014 Reference Selector Preset (3) RW Txt ND US
Keypad (4), Precision (5), Keypad Ref (6)
01.015 Preset Selector 0 to 9 4 RW Num US
01.016 Preset Selector Time 0.0 to 400.0 s 10.0 s RW Num US
01.017 Keypad Control Mode Reference VM_SPEED_FREQ_KEYPAD_REF RO Num NC PT PS
0.0
01.018 Precision Reference Coarse VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF RW Num US
01.019 Precision Reference Fine 0.000 to 0.099 rpm 0.000 rpm RW Num us
01.020 Precision Reference Update Disable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
Preset Reference 1 (Soft Start Speed -
01.021 VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF 3600.0 RW Num US
Pr 29.013)
Preset Reference 2 (Speed Reference After
Envelope Control - Pr 29.018)
Preset Reference 3 (Shutdown Hold Speed -
Pr 29.023)
01.024 Preset Reference 4 (Zero Speed) VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF 0.0 RW Num US
Preset Reference 5 (User Defrost Speed
Reference - Pr 29.037)
Preset Reference 6 (Oil Return Speed -
Pr 29.028)
01.027 Preset Reference 7 VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF 0.0 RW Num US
01.028 Preset Reference 8 VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF 3600.0 RW Num US
01.029 Skip Reference 1 0 to 7200 rpm 0 rpm RW Num US
01.030 Skip Reference Band 1 0.0 to 250 rpm 0 rpm RW Num US
01.035 Reference In Rejection Zone Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
01.036 Analog Reference 1 RO Num NC
VM_SPEED_FREQ_USER_REFS rpm 1000.0 rpm
01.037 Analog Reference 2 RO Num NC
01.038 Percentage Trim ±100.00 % 0.00 % RW Num NC
01.039 Speed Feed-forwards VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF RO Num ND NC PT
01.040 Speed Feed-forwards Select Off (0) or On (1) RW Bit ND NC PT
01.041 Reference Select Flag 1 Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit ND NC PT
01.045 Preset Select Flag 1 Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit ND NC PT
01.048 Preset Selector Timer Reset Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit ND NC PT
01.049 Reference Selected Indicator 1 to 6 RO Num ND NC PT
01.050 Preset Selected Indicator 1 to 8 RO Num ND NC PT
01.051 Power-up Keypad Control Mode Reference Reset (0), Last (1), Preset (2) Reset (0) RW Txt US
RW Read / Write RO Read only Num Number parameter Bit Bit parameter Txt Text string Bin Binary parameter FI Filtered
ND No default value NC Not copied PT Protected parameter RA Rating dependent US User save PS Power-down save DE Destination

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
9.3 Menu 2: Ramps

Key

X terminals mm.ppp
parameter

X
terminals parameter
Acceleration rates 1 ~ 8
0
02.011 Acceleration Rate 1 (Soft Start Accel - Pr 29.014) 1
02.012 Acceleration Rate 2 (Normal Run Accel - Pr 29.021) 2 Acceleration
02.030
Rate Selected
02.013 Acceleration Rate 3 3

02.015 Acceleration Rate 5 (Defrost Accel - Pr 29.035) 5
02.016 Acceleration Rate 6 (Oil Boost Accel - Pr 29.031) 6
Preset Selected 01.050

Indicator
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7 Forward
8 8 Accel. Rate
N
Acceleration
Ramp Control
02.004 Ramp Mode
Pre-Ramp Speed Standard Ramp Voltage

01.003 02.008
Reference

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Deceleration Rates 1 ~ 8
0
1 02.021 Deceleration Rate 1

Deceleration
Rate Selected 02.031 2 02.022 Deceleration Rate 2 (Normal Run Decel - Pr 29.022)
3 02.023 Deceleration Rate 3 (Shut Down Decel - Pr 29.024)
4 02.024 Deceleration Rate 4 (Stop Decel - Pr 29.026)
5 02.025 Deceleration Rate 5 (Defrost Decel - Pr 29.036)
6 02.026 Deceleration Rate 6 (Oil Boost Decel - Pr 29.032)
Preset
01.050 Selected
Indicator
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
Forward 7 7
Decel. rate 8 8
N
Deceleration
Post-Ramp
Reference
02.001

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics

02.001 Post Ramp Reference VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF rpm RO Num ND NC PT
02.002 Ramp Enable Off (0) or On (1) On (1) RW Bit US
02.004 Ramp Mode Fast (0), Standard (1) Standard (1) RW Txt US
02.005 Disable Ramp Output Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
200 V drive : 375 V
02.008 Standard Ramp Voltage 0 to VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET V 400 V drive : 750 / 775 V RW Num RA US
575 V drive : 895 V
Acceleration Rate 1 (Soft Start Acceleration -
02.011 1.000 s/1000 rpm RW Num US
Pr 29.014)
Acceleration Rate 2 (Normal Run Acceleration -
02.012 5.000 s/1000 rpm RW Num US
Pr 29.021)
02.013 Acceleration Rate 3 5.000 s/1000 rpm RW Num US
0.000 to VM_ACCEL_RATE s/1000 rpm
Acceleration Rate 5 (Defrost Acceleration Rate -
02.015 2.000 s/1000 rpm RW Num US
Pr 29.035)
Acceleration Rate 6 (Oil Boost Acceleration Rate
02.016 5.000 s/1000 rpm RW Num US
- Pr 29.031)
02.020 Deceleration Rate Selector 0 to 9 9 RW Num US
02.021 Deceleration Rate 1 1.000 s/1000 rpm RW Num US
Deceleration Rate 2 (Normal Run Deceleration -
02.022 5.000 s/1000 rpm RW Num US
Pr 29.022)
Deceleration Rate 3 (Shut Down Deceleration -
02.023 5.000 s/1000 rpm RW Num US
Pr 29.024)
Deceleration Rate 4 (Stop Deceleration -
02.024 2.000 s/1000 rpm RW Num US
Pr 29.026) 0.000 to VM_ACCEL_RATE s/1000 rpm
Deceleration Rate 5 (Defrost Deceleration Rate -
02.025 2.000 s/1000 rpm RW Num US
Pr 29.036)
Deceleration Rate 6 - (Oil Boost Deceleration
02.026 5.000 s/1000 rpm RW Num US
Rate - Pr 29.032)
02.030 Acceleration Rate Selected 0 to 8 RO Num ND NC PT
02.031 Deceleration Rate Selected 0 to 8 RO Num ND NC PT

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
9.4 Menu 3: Speed feedback and Speed control

Post-Ramp VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MAX] Final Speed

Reference Reference
02.001 03.001
VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MIN]
7
03.080 d/dt 03.079

Sensorless
Mode Filter
Sensorless
Position
Key

X terminals mm.ppp
parameter

X
terminals parameter

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Speed
Speed Controller
Speed Loop Gains
Error Output
+ + 03.010 (Kp1)
03.003 03.004 Menu 4
03.011 (Ki1)
_ _
Speed Controller
03.012 Differential
Feedback Gains (Kd1)
Estimated
Speed Feedback
03.002
Zero Speed Bipolar Reference

Threshold Zero Speed Enable
03.005 + 01.010
10.003
_ Running At Or
Below Minimum
Speed
Min Reference Clamp 1
01.007 +5min-1 + 10.004
0
_
+
Max Reference Clamp Over Speed Trip
01.006 +20% 0 _
Overspeed Threshold 1
03.008
03.008 >0
Below Set Speed

At Speed
Lower Limit 03.006 +
10.005
_
Pre Ramp At Speed
Reference _ 1
NOR 10.006
+
01.003 0
+
10.007
03.007
_
03.009
At Speed Above Set Speed
Absolute
Upper Limit
At-Speed
Select

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics

03.001 Final Speed Reference VM_SPEED RO Num ND NC PT FI
03.002 Speed Feedback (estimated) VM_SPEED RO Num ND NC PT FI
03.003 Speed Error VM_SPEED RO Num ND NC PT FI
03.004 Speed Controller Output VM_TORQUE_CURRENT % RO Num ND NC PT FI
03.005 Zero Speed Threshold 0 to 200 rpm RW Num US
03.006 At Speed Lower Limit 0 to 33,000 rpm 5 rpm RW Num US
03.007 At Speed Upper Limit 0 to 33,000 rpm RW Num US
03.008 Over Speed Threshold 0 to 40,000 rpm 0 rpm RW Num US
03.009 Absolute At Speed Select Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
03.010 Speed Controller Proportional Gain Kp1 0.0000 to 200.0000 s/rad RW Num US
*
03.011 Speed Controller Integral Gain Ki1 0.00 to 655.35 s2/rad RW Num US
Speed Controller Differential Feedback Gain
03.012 0.00000 to 0.65535 1/rad 0.00000 1/rad RW Num US
Kd1
Feedback (0), Sensorless (1),

03.024 RFC Feedback Mode Feedback NoMax (2), Sensorless NoMax (3) RW Txt US
Sensorless NoMax (3)
03.078 Sensorless Mode Active Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT

03.079 Sensorless Mode Filter 4 (0), 8 (1), 16 (2), 32 (3), 64 (4) ms 16 (2) ms RW Txt US
03.080 Sensorless Position -2147483648 to 2147483647 RO Num ND NC PT
* Set to suit individual compressors.


Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
9.5 Menu 4: Torque and current control

Speed Estimation Algorithm
Compressor
Current
Rated Rated
Reference
Current Speed
Filter 1 Time
Estimated 05.007 05.008 Constant
Speed 03.002 04.012
Feedback
Speed Loop Torque Final Current

_ Current controller
Output Demand Reference
Current Loop
Final + + 04.013
00.010 P Gain
Speed {29.019} 03.004 04.003 04.004
Reference Current Loop
_ 04.014 I Gain
Filter
User Current
Maximum
Percentage Scaling
Load Torque
04.020 04.024 04.002 Producing
Current
Current limits Over-Riding

Drive Rated Current Limit
04.005 Motoring
Continuous 11.032
Current 04.018
04.006 Regenerating
Motor Rated
05.007
Current 04.007 Symmetrical
Overload detection
Key
X Input Read-write (RW) 10.008 10.009

X terminals mm.ppp
parameter
At 100% Current Limit
X Output mm.ppp Read-only (RO) Load Active
X
terminals parameter Indicator Indicator

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics

0.000 to VM_DRIVE_CURRENT_
04.001 Current Magnitude RO Num ND NC PT FI
UNIPOLAR A
04.002 Iq VM_DRIVE_CURRENT A RO Num ND NC PT FI
04.003 Final Torque Reference VM_TORQUE_CURRENT % RO Num ND NC PT FI
04.004 Final Current Reference VM_TORQUE_CURRENT % RO Num ND NC PT FI
04.005 Motoring Current Limit 0.0 to VM_MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT * RW Num RA US
04.006 Regenerating Current Limit 0.0 to VM_MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT * RW Num RA US
04.007 Symmetrical Current Limit 0.0 to VM_MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT * RW Num RA US

04.012 Current Reference Filter 1 Time Constant 0.0 to 25.0 ms 4.0 ms RW Num US
04.013 Current Controller Kp Gain 0 to 30000 * RW Num US
04.014 Current Controller Ki Gain 0 to 30000 * RW Num US

04.015 Reserved
04.016 Reserved
04.017 Id VM_DRIVE_CURRENT A RO Num ND NC PT FI
04.018 Final Current Limit VM_TORQUE_CURRENT % RO Num ND NC PT
04.019 Reserved
04.020 Percentage Load VM_USER_CURRENT % RO Num ND NC PT FI
04.021 Current feedback filter disable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
0.0 to
04.024 User Current Maximum Scaling
VM_TORQUE_CURRENT_UNIPOLAR %
* RW Num RA US
04.025 Reserved
04.026 Percentage Torque 0.0 to VM_USER_CURRENT % RO Num ND NC PT FI
04.041 Rated Torque 0.00 to 50000.00 Nm 0.00 Nm RW Num US
04.049 Magnetising Current Limit 0.0 to 100.0 % 100 % RW Num US


Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
9.6 Menu 5: Motor control

Output
Frequency
05.001
Flux Calculator
Estimated Rated
Speed 05.007 Current 05.072 No Load Lq
Estimated
Feedback Number Of Iq Test Current For
Position 05.011 Motor Poles Flux
Feedback 05.075 Inductance Reference
angle
03.002
ò 05.017 Stator
Resistance Measurement
Phase Offset At Iq
frame
transformation
05.024 Transient
Inductance
05.077 Test Current
Sensorless Mode 05.078 Lq At The Defined lq
05.063 Current Ramp Test Current
RFC Low Speed Id Test Current For
05.064 Mode 05.082
Inductance
Required Over Measurement
05.067 Current Trip Level
Actual Over- 05.084 Lq At The Defined ld
05.068 Current Trip Level Test Current
Inverted Saturation 05.088 Estimated Lq
05.070 Charateristic
Low Speed
05.071 Sensorless Current
Limit
Current Flux
References Magnitude
Current control
Menu 4
Speed
controller 03.004 Current limits
output Overload detection
Current loop gains
Current demand filter
Torque reference
Current
feedback
Key

X terminals mm.ppp
parameter

X
terminals parameter

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
DC Bus
Voltage
05.005
Voltage reference
Modulator U
Maximum Switching
05.018 Frequency V
Auto Switching W
05.037 05.035 Frequency Change
Disable
Switching
Frequency
Flux Controller Output

05.002
Voltage
Rated
05.009 Voltage Output
Power
05.022 Enable High
Speed Mode
Power Calculation (Ö3 xV x I) 05.003
Current
Magnitude
Iq
04.002 04.001
04.017
Id
Compressor
Compressor

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics

05.001 Output Frequency ±2000.0 Hz RO Num ND NC PT FI
05.002 Output Voltage 0 to VM_AC_VOLTAGE V RO Num ND NC PT FI
05.003 Output Power VM_POWER kW RO Num ND NC PT FI
05.005 D.C. Bus Voltage 0 to VM_DC_VOLTAGE V RO Num ND NC PT FI
05.007 Rated Current 0.000 to VM_RATED_CURRENT A * RW Num RA US
05.008 Rated Speed 0.00 to 33, 000.00 rpm 6000.00 rpm RW Num US
05.009 Rated Voltage 0 to VM_AC_VOLTAGE_SET V * RW Num RA US
05.011 Number Of Motor Poles Automatic (0) to 480 Poles (240) 6 Poles (3) RW Txt US
05.012 Reserved
05.017 Stator Resistance 0.000000 to 1000.000000 Ω * RW RA US
2 kHz (0), 3 kHz (1), 4 kHz (2), 6 kHz (3),
05.018 Maximum Switching Frequency 6 kHz (3) RW Txt RA US
8 kHz (4), 12 kHz (5), 16 kHz (6)
05.021 Mechanical Load Test Level 0 to 100 % 0% RW Num US
05.022 Enable High Speed Mode Limit (-1), Disable (0), Enable (1) Enable (1) RW Txt US
05.023 D.C. Bus Voltage High Range 0 to VM_HIGH_DC_VOLTAGE V RO Num ND NC PT FI
05.024 Ld 0.000 to 500.000 mH * RW Num RA US
05.026 High Dynamic Performance Enable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit RA US
05.028 Torque Linearisation Disable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
05.031 Voltage Controller Gain 1 to 30 1 RW Num US
05.032 Torque Per Amp 0.00 to 500.00 Nm/A 1.60 Nm/A RO Num ND NC PT
05.033 Volts Per 1000 rpm 0 to 10,000 V * RW Num US
Enabled (0), Disabled (1),
05.035 Auto-switching Frequency Change Disable Disabled (1) RW Txt US
No Ripple Detect (2)
05.036 Auto-switching Frequency Step Size 1 to 2 2 RW Num US
2 kHz (0), 3 kHz (1), 4 kHz (2), 6 kHz (3),
05.037 Switching Frequency RO Txt ND NC PT
8 kHz (4), 12 kHz (5), 16 kHz (6)
0 to VM_MIN_SWITCHING_FREQUENCY
05.038 Minimum Switching Frequency 2 kHz (0) RW Txt US
kHz
05.039 Maximum Inverter Temperature Ripple 20 to 60 °C 60 °C RW Num US
05.041 Voltage Headroom 0 to 20 % 6% RW Num US
05.063 Sensorless Mode Current Ramp 0.00 to 1.00 s 0.20 s RW Num US
Injection (0), Non salient (1), Current (2),
05.064 RFC Low Speed Mode Non salient (1) RW Txt US
Current No Test (3)
05.065 Saliency Torque Control Select Disabled (0), Low (1), High (2), Auto (3) Disabled (0) RW Txt US
05.067 Required Over-current Trip Level 0 to 100 % * RW Num US
05.068 Actual Over current Trip Level 0 to 500 % RO Num ND NC PT

05.070 Inverted Saturation Characteristic Off (0) or On (1) On (1) RW Bit US
05.071 Low Speed Sensorless Mode Current Limit 0.0 to 1000.0 % 20.0 % RW Num RA US
05.072 No-load Lq 0.000 to 500.000 mH * RW Num RA US
05.075 Iq Test Current For Inductance Measurement 0 to 200 % 100 % RW Num US
05.077 Phase Offset At Iq Test Current ±90.0 ° 0.0 ° RW Num RA US
05.078 Lq At The Defined Iq Test Current 0.000 to 500.000 mH * RW Num RA US
05.082 Id Test Current for Inductance Measurement -100 to 0 % -50 % RW Num US
05.084 Lq At The Defined Id Test Current 0.000 to 500.000 mH * RW Num RA US
05.088 Estimated Lq 0.000 to 500.000 mH RO Num ND NC PT FI
05.089 Rated Torque Angle 0 to 90 ° RO Num ND NC PT

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
9.7 Menu 6: Sequencer and clock

Control word
Enable
06.043
0
Compressor Control Word

Control 06.042 Sequencer
Menu 29 0
Drive Enable
06.001 Stop Mode
06.015
Run Forward 1
06.003 Supply Loss Mode
06.030
1
01.011 Reference On
Hardware
Enable 06.029
Motor Pre-heat
06.052 06.011 Sequencer State
Current Magnitude
Machine Inputs
STOP/
RESET RESET Inverter enable
Supply Loss
Menu 2
Mains / Phase Loss Ramp enable
Detection System
Input Phase Loss 10.015
06.047
Detection Mode
Supply Loss
06.048
Detection Level
Hold Supply Loss
06.051
Active
Clock control
06.019 Date/Time
Selector 06.024 Reset Energy Meter
0 Set Energy Cost
06.016 Date 1 Powered 06.027
Per kWh
2 Running
06.017 Time 3 Accumulated powered
4 Local keypad
5 Remote keypad 06.028 Running Cost
Day Of 6 Slot 1
06.018 Week
7 Slot 2
8 Slot 3
9 Slot 4
06.020 Date Format 06.025
Output Energy Meter
06.026
Power 05.003
Key

X terminals mm.ppp
parameter

X
terminals parameter

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics

06.001 Stop Mode Coast (0), Ramp (1), No Ramp (2) Ramp (1) RW Txt US
06.002 Limit Switch Stop Mode Stop (0) or Ramp (1) Stop (0) RW Txt US
Disable (0), Ramp Stop (1), Ride Thru (2),
06.003 Supply Loss Mode Disable (0) RW Txt US
Limit Stop (3)
06.010 Enable Conditions 000000000000 to 111111111111 RO Bin ND NC PT
06.011 Sequencer State Machine Inputs 0000000 to 1111111 RO Bin ND NC PT
06.012 Enable Stop Key Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
06.013 Enable Auxiliary Key Disabled (0), Forward / Reverse (2), Reverse (3) Disabled (0) RW Num US
06.015 Drive Enable Off (0) or On (1) On (1) RW Bit NC US
06.016 Date 00-00-00 to 31-12-99 RW Date ND NC PT
06.017 Time 00:00:00 to 23:59:59 RW Time ND NC PT
Sunday (0), Monday (1), Tuesday (2), Wednesday
06.018 Day Of Week RO Txt ND NC PT
(3), Thursday (4), Friday (5), Saturday (6)
Set (0), Powered (1), Running (2), Acc Powered (3),
06.019 Date/Time Selector Local Keypad (4), Remote Keypad (5), Powered (1) RW Txt US
Slot 1 (6), Slot 2 (7), Slot 3 (8), Slot 4 (9)
06.020 Date Format Std (0) or US (1) Std (0) RW Txt Us
06.024 Reset Energy Meter Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit
06.025 Energy Meter: MWh -999.9 to 999.9 MWh RO Num ND NC PT PS
06.026 Energy Meter: kWh ±99.99 kWh RO Num ND NC PT PS
06.027 Energy Cost Per kWh 0.0 to 600.0 0.0 RW Num US
06.028 Running Cost ±32000 RO Num ND NC PT
06.029 Hardware Enable Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
06.030 Run Forward Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
06.041 Drive Event Flags 00 to 11 00 RW Bin NC
06.042 Control Word 000000000000000 to 111111111111111 000000000000000 RW Bin NC
06.043 Control Word Enable Off (0) or On (1) On (1) RW Bit US
06.044 Active Supply Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
06.045 Cooling Fan control 0 to 11 10 RW Num US
06.047 Input Phase Loss Detection Mode Full (0), Ripple Only (1), Disabled (2) Full (0) RW Txt US
200 V drive: 205 V
06.048 Supply Loss Detection Level 0 to VM_SUPPLY_LOSS_LEVEL V 400 V drive: 410 V RW Num RA US
575 V drive: 540 V
06.052 Motor Pre-heat Current Magnitude 0 to 100 % 0% RW Num US
06.059 Output Phase Loss Detection Enable Disabled (0), Enabled (1) Enabled (1) RW Txt US
06.060 Standby Mode Enable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
06.061 Standby Mode Mask 0000000 to 1111111 0000000 RW Bin US
200 V drive: 175 V
06.065 Standard Under Voltage Threshold 0 to VM_STD_UNDER_VOLTS V 400 V drive: 330 V RW Num RA US
575 V drive: 435 V
200 V drive: 175 V
06.066 Low Voltage Under Voltage Threshold 24 to VM_LOW_UNDER_VOLTS V 400 V drive: 330 V RW Num RA US
575 V drive: 435 V
06.067 Low Under Voltage Threshold Select Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
06.068 Back Up Supply Mode Enable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
06.069 Under-Voltage System Contactor Close Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
Under-Voltage System Contactor
06.070 Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
Closed
06.071 Slow Rectifier Charge Rate Enable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
06.072 User Supply Select Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
06.073 Reserved
06.074 Reserved
06.075 Reserved
06.076 Reserved
06.084 Date And Time Offset ±24.00 Hours 0.00 Hours RW Num US
IP IP address Mac Mac address Date Date parameter Time Time parameter SMP Slot,menu,parameter Chr Character parameter Ver Version number

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
9.8 Menu 7: Analog I/O

Analog
Input 1 Current Analog
Loop Loss Input 1
Analog Input Analog Input Analog Input 1
1 Maximum 1 Offset Destination Any
07.028 07.001 unprotected
Analog Input 1 07.043 07.030 07.010
variable
parameter
+ Evaporator
5 ??.??? Pressure
07.007 + 07.008
V/f
6 29.044
Analog Input Analog
Analog Input Mode Input 1 x(-1) ??.???
07.040 Scaling
1 Minimum
07.009 Analog
07.025 Input 1 Invert
Calibrate Analog
Analog Input 1 Input 2 Current
Full Scale Loop Loss Analog
Input 2
Analog Input Analog Input 2
Analog Input 07.029 2 Offset Destination
2 Maximum 07.002 Any
07.014 unprotected
07.031
7.31
Analog input 2 07.044 variable
parameter
Condenser
+ ??.??? Pressure
07.011 + 07.012
7 A/D
29.043
Analog Input Analog
2 Mode Input 2 x(-1) ??.???
07.041 Scaling
07.013 Analog
Analog Input Input 2 Invert
2 Minimum
Analog
Input 3
Analog Input Analog Input 3
3 Offset Destination
Analog Input 07.003 Any
3 Maximum 07.018 unprotected
07.032
7.31
Analog Input 3 variable User
07.045
parameter Speed
+ Reference
??.???
+ In Rpm
8 A/D 07.015 07.016
29.017
Analog Input 3 Analog
Mode Selector Input 3 x(-1) ??.???
07.042
Scaling
Analog Input
07.017 Analog
3 Minimum Input 3 Invert
Analog Output
Any variable 1 Source
Analog Output 1
Estimated parameter 07.019
Speed
??.??
Feedback
03.002 07.020 9
??.?? Analog
Output1
Scaling
Key
Analog Output
2 Source X Input Read-write (RW)
X terminals mm.ppp
Any 07.022 parameter
variable Analog Output 2
Torque parameter X Output mm.ppp Read-only (RO)
Producing X
??.?? terminals parameter
Current
04.002 07.023 10
??.?? Analog
Output 2
Scaling

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Figure 9-8 Menu 7 thermal monitoring diagram

Temperature Monitor
Select 1*
07.038
Monitored
Temperature 1
07.004
Percentage Of
Drive Thermal Trip
Level
Temperature Monitor
Select 2* 07.036
07.039
Monitored
Temperature 2
07.005
Temperature
Nearest To Trip Level*
Temperature Monitor
Select 3*
Drive power stage 07.037
and control system 07.052
Monitored
Temperature 3
07.006
Inverter
Temperature
07.034
Key
Percentage Of
d.c. Link Thermal Trip Level X Input Read-write (RW)
X terminals mm.ppp
parameter
07.035
X
terminals parameter
* Refer to Table 12-12 Key to temperature sub trips on page 210 for Thermistor ID values.

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics

07.001 Analog Input 1 ±100.00 % RO Num ND NC PT FI
07.004 Monitored Temperature 1 ±250 °C RO Num ND NC PT
4-20 mA Low (-4), 20-4 mA Low (-3),
4-20 mA Hold (-2), 20-4 mA Hold (-1),
0-20 mA (0), 20-0 mA (1), 4-20 mA Trip (2),
07.007 Analog Input 1 Mode 4-20 mA (4) RW Txt US
20-4 mA Trip (3), 4-20 mA (4),
20-4 mA (5), Volt (6), Therm Short Cct (7),
Thermistor (8), Therm No Trip (9)
07.008 Analog Input 1 Scaling 0.000 to 10.000 0.391 RW Num US
07.009 Analog Input 1 Invert Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
07.010 Analog Input 1 Destination 0.000 to 59.999 29.044 RW Num DE PT US
4-20 mA Low (-4), 20-4 mA Low (-3),
4-20 mA Hold (-2), 20-4 mA Hold (-1),
0-20 mA (0), 20-0 mA (1), 4-20 mA Trip (2),
07.011 Analog Input 2 Mode 4-20 mA (4) RW Txt US
20-4 mA Trip (3), 4-20 mA (4),
20-4 mA (5), Volt (6), Therm Short Cct (7),
Thermistor (8), Therm No Trip (9)
07.014 Analog Input 2 Destination 0.000 to 59.999 29.043 RW Num DE PT US
Volt (6), Therm Short Cct (7), Thermistor (8),
07.015 Analog Input 3 Mode Volt (6) RW Txt US
Therm No Trip (9), Disabled (10)
07.018 Analog Input 3 Destination 29.017 RW Num DE PT US
0.000 to 59.999
07.019 Analog Output 1 Source 3.002 RW Num PT US
07.020 Analog Output 1 Scaling 0.000 to 10.000 1.000 RW Num US
07.022 Analog Output 2 Source 0.000 to 59.999 4.002 RW Num US
07.023 Analog Output 2 Scaling 0.000 to 10.000 1.000 RW Num US
07.025 Calibrate Analog Input 1 Full Scale Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
07.026 Analog Input 1 Fast Update Active Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
07.027 Analog Input 1 Fast Update Active Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
07.028 Analog Input 1 Current Loop Loss Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
07.029 Analog Input 2 Current Loop Loss Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
07.030 Analog Input 1 Offset ±100.00 % 0.00 % RW Num US
07.033 Power Output ±100.0 % RO Num ND NC PT
07.034 Inverter Temperature ±250 °C RO Num ND NC PT
07.035 Percentage Of d.c. Bus Thermal Trip Level 0 to 100 % RO Num ND NC PT
07.036 Percentage Of Drive Thermal Trip Level 0 to 100 % RO Num ND NC PT
07.037 Temperature Nearest To Trip Level 0 to 20999 RO Num ND NC PT
07.038 Temperature Monitor Select 1 0 to 1999 1001 RW Num US
07.040 Analog Input 1 Minimum ±100.00 % -100.00 % RW Num US
07.043 Analog Input 1 Maximum ±100.00 % 100.00 % RW Num US
DIN44082 (0), KTY84 (1), PT100 (4W) (2),
PT1000 (4W) (3), PT2000 (4W) (4),
07.046 Analog Input 3 Thermistor Type DIN44082 (0) RW Txt US
2.0 mA (4W) (5), PT100 (2W) (6), PT1000 (2W) (7),
PT2000 (2W) (8), 2.0 mA (2W) (9)
07.047 Analog Input 3 Thermistor Feedback 0 to 5000 Ω RO Num ND NC PT
07.048 Analog Input 3 Thermistor Trip Threshold 0 to 5000 Ω 3300 Ω RW Num US
Analog Input 3 Thermistor Reset
07.049 0 to 5000 Ω 1800 Ω RW Num US
Threshold
07.050 Analog Input 3 Thermistor Temperature -50 to 300 °C RO Num ND NC PT
07.051 Analog Input 1 Full Scale 0 to 65535 RO Num ND NC PT PS

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
9.9 Menu 8: Digital I/O

T24 Digital
I/O 1 State T24 Output ??.???
Select
08.001 08.031 00.000
Compressor On x(-1) ??.???

Any bit
T24 Digital I/O 1 T24 Digital parameter
08.021
I/O 1 Source/
Destination
24 08.029
08.011 T24 Digital
I/O Input Any
I/O 1 Invert
Logic Polarity unprotected
bit parameter
??.???
x(-1) ??.???
Any bit
T25 Digital parameter
I/O 2 State T25 Output
Select ??.???
08.002 08.032
Drive Reset x(-1) ??.???
T25 Digital I/O 2 T25 digital

08.022 I/O 2 Source/
Destination
25 08.029
Any
I/O Input 08.012 T25 Digital unprotected
I/O 2 Invert
Logic Polarity bit
parameter
??.??? Drive Reset

10.033
x(-1)
??.???
Compressor
Control
Menu 29
T26 Digital
I/O 3 State
08.003
Start / Controlled Stop
T26 Digital I/O 3
26 08.029
I/O Input
Logic Polarity
Key

X terminals mm.ppp
parameter

X
terminals parameter

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
24 V Supply
Input State 24 V Supply 24 V Supply
Input Invert Input Destination
08.043 08.053 08.063 Any
unprotected
bit
T2 digital input parameter
??.???
2
00.000
x(-1)
??.???
T27 Digital
Input 4 State
Stator Heating On 08.004
T27 digital input 4
27 08.029
I/O Input
Logic Polarity
Compressor
Control
Menu 29
T28 Digital
Defrost Control Input 5 State
08.005
T28 Digital Input 5
28 08.029
I/O Input
Logic Polarity
T29 Digital
Input 6 State
08.006
User Trip
T29 Digital Input 6
29 08.029
I/O Input
Logic Polarity
T22 24V Output T22 24V Output Source

T22 24V Source Invert
Output 08.028 Any
State 08.008 08.018 unprotected
bit
parameter
T22 24V Output ??.???
00.000
22
x(-1) ??.???
Drive Enable
STO Input 1 State
(STO
31 08.009
Combine with I/O input (Menu 6) 06.029
08.040 Hardware
Enable
STO Input 2 State

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Figure 9-10 Menu 8 logic (cont)
Relay Source Relay

Invert Source
08.017 08.027
Any bit
parameter
Relay
Drive OK State ??.??? Drive OK
10.001
41 08.007
x(-1) ??.???
42
0V

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics

08.001 Digital I/O 01 State Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
08.004 Digital Input 04 State Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
08.007 Relay Output State Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
08.008 24V Supply Output State Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
08.009 STO Input 01 State Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
Disable (0), STO 1 (1), STO 2 (2), STO 1
08.010 External Trip Mode Disable (0) RW Txt US
OR STO 2 (3)
08.011 Digital I/O 01 Invert Not Invert (0) or Invert (1) Not Invert (0) RW Txt US
08.014 Digital Input 04 Invert Not Invert (0) or Invert (1) Not Invert (0) RW Txt US
08.017 Relay Invert Not Invert (0) or Invert (1) Not Invert (0) RW Txt US
08.018 24V Supply Output Invert Not Invert (0) or Invert (1) Invert (1) RW Txt US
08.020 Digital I/O Read Word 0 to 511 RO Num ND NC PT
08.021 Digital I/O 01 Source/Destination 0.000 to 59.999 0.000 RW Num DE PT US
08.024 Digital Input 04 Destination 0.000 to 59.999 0.000 RW Num DE PT US
08.027 Relay Output Source 0.000 to 59.999 10.001 RW Num PT US
08.028 24V Supply Output Source 0.000 to 59.999 0.000 RW Num PT US
08.029 Input Logic Polarity Negative Logic (0) or Positive Logic (1) Positive Logic (1) RW Txt US
08.031 Digital I/O 01 Output Select Off (0) or On (1) On (1) RW Bit US
08.032 Digital I/O 02 Output Select Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
08.033 Digital I/O 03 Output Select Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
08.040 STO Input 02 State Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
08.041 Keypad Run Button State Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
08.042 Keypad Auxiliary Button State Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
08.043 24V Supply Input State Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
08.044 Keypad Stop Button State Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
08.051 Keypad Run Button Invert/Toggle Not Invert (0), Invert (1) or Toggle (2) Not Invert (0) RW Txt US
08.052 Keypad Auxiliary Button Invert/Toggle Not Invert (0), Invert (1) or Toggle (2) Not Invert (0) RW Txt US
08.053 24V Supply Input Invert Not Invert (0) or Invert (1) Not Invert (0) RW Txt US
08.061 Keypad Run Button Destination 0.000 to 59.999 0.000 RW Num DE PT US
08.062 Keypad Auxiliary Button Destination 0.000 to 59.999 0.000 RW Num DE PT US
08.063 24V Supply Input Source 0.000 to 59.999 0.000 RW Num PT US
08.071 Digital I/O Output Enable Register 1 0000000000000000 to 1111111111111111 0000000000000000 RW Bin PT US
08.072 Digital I/O Input Register 1 0000000000000000 to 1111111111111111 RO Bin PT
08.073 Digital I/O Output Register 1 0000000000000000 to 1111111111111111 0000000000000000 RW Bin PT

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
9.10 Menu 10: Status and trips

10.001 Drive Healthy Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.002 Drive Active Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.003 Zero Speed Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.004 Running At Or Below Minimum Speed Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.005 Below Set Speed Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.006 At Speed Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.007 Above Set Speed Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.008 Rate Load Reached Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.009 Current Limit Active Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.011 Reserved
10.012 Reserved
10.013 Reverse Direction Commanded Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.014 Reverse Direction Running Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.015 Supply Loss Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.016 Under Voltage Active Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.017 Reserved
10.018 Drive Over-temperature Alarm Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.019 Drive Warning Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.020 Trip 0 0 to 255 RO Txt ND NC PT PS
10.030 Reserved
10.031 Reserved
10.032 External Trip Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
10.033 Drive Reset Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
None (0), 1 (1), 2 (2), 3 (3), 4 (4),
10.034 Number Of Auto-reset Attempts None (0) RW Txt US
5 (5), Infinite (6)
10.035 Auto-reset Delay 1.0 to 600.0 s 1.0 s RW Num US
10.036 Auto-reset Hold Drive ok Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
10.037 Action On Trip Detection 00000 to 11111 0000 RW Bin US
10.038 User Trip 0 to 255 RW Num ND NC
10.039 Reserved
000000000000000 to
10.040 Status Word RO Bin ND NC PT
111111111111111
10.041 Trip 0 Date 00-00-00 to 31-12-99 RO Date ND NC PT PS
10.042 Trip 0 Time 00:00:00 to 23:59:59 RO Time ND NC PT PS

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics

10.061 Reserved
10.062 Low Load Detected Alarm RO Bit ND NC PT
10.063 Local Keypad Battery Low Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.064 Remote Keypad Battery Low RO Bit ND NC PT
10.065 Reserved
10.066 Limit Switch Active Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.068 Hold Drive Healthy On Under Voltage Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
10.069 Additional Status Bits 0000000000 to 1111111111 RO Bin ND NC PT
10.070 Trip 0 Sub-trip Number RO Num ND NC PT PS
0 to 65535
10.080 Stop Motor RO Bit ND NC PT
Off (0) or On (1)
10.081 Phase Loss RO Bit ND NC PT
Inhibit (0), Ready (1), Stop (2), Scan
(3), Run (4), Supply Loss (5),
Deceleration (6), dc Injection (7),
10.101 Drive Status Position (8), Trip (9), Active (10), RO Txt ND NC PT
Off (11), Hand (12), Auto (13),
Heat (14), Under Voltage (15),
Phasing (16)
10.102 Trip Reset Source 0 to 1023 RO Num ND NC PT PS
10.103 Trip Time Identifier -2147483648 to 2147483647 ms RO Num ND NC PT
None (0), Brake Resistor (1), Motor
Overload (2),
Ind Overload (3), Drive Overload (4),
10.104 Active Alarm Auto Tune (5), Limit Switch (6), Fire RO Txt ND NC PT
Mode (7), Low Load (8), Option Slot 1
(9), Option Slot 2 (10), Option Slot 3
(11), Option Slot 4 (12)
10.106 Potential Drive Damage Conditions 0000 to 1111 RO Bin ND NC PT PS


Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
9.11 Menu 11: General drive set-up

11.020 Reset Serial Communications Off (0) or On (1) RW Bit ND NC
11.021 Parameter 00.030 Scaling 0.000 to 10.000 1.000 RW Num US
11.022 Parameter Displayed At Power-up 0.000 to 0.080 0.010 RW Num US
11.023 Serial Address 1 to 247 1 RW Num US
8 2 NP (0), 8 1 NP (1), 8 1 EP (2), 8 1 OP (3),
8 2 NP M (4), 8 1 NP M (5), 8 1 EP M (6),
11.024 Serial Mode 8 1 OP M (7), 7 2 NP (8), 7 1 NP (9), 7 1 EP (10), 8 2 NP (0) RW Txt US
7 1 OP (11), 7 2 NP M (12), 7 1 NP M (13),
7 1 EP M (14), 7 1 OP M (15)
300 (0), 600 (1), 1200 (2), 2400 (3), 4800 (4),
11.025 Serial Baud Rate 9600 (5), 19200 (6), 38400 (7), 57600 (8), 19200 (6) RW Txt US
76800 (9), 115200 (10)
11.026 Minimum Comms Transmit Delay 2 ms RW Num US
0 to 250 ms
11.027 Silent Period 0 ms RW Num US
11.028 Drive Derivative 0 to 255 RO Num ND NC PT
11.029 Software Version 00.00.00.00 to 99.99.99.99 RO Num ND NC PT
11.030 User Security Code 0 to 2147483647 RW Num ND NC PT US
11.031 User Drive Mode RFC-S (3) RW Txt ND NC PT
11.032 Maximum Heavy Duty Rating 0.000 to 99999.999 A RO Num ND NC PT
11.033 Drive Rated Voltage 200 V (0), 400 V (1), 575 V (2), 690 V (3) RO Txt ND NC PT
11.034 Software Sub Version 0 to 99 RO Num ND NC PT
11.035 Number Of Power Modules -1 to 20 -1 RW Num US
NV Media Card File Previously
11.036 0 to 999 0 RO Num NC PT
Loaded
11.037 NV Media Card File Number 0 to 999 0 RW Num
11.038 NV Media Card File Type RFC-S (3) RO Txt ND NC PT
11.039 NV Media Card File Version 0 to 9999 RO Num ND NC PT
11.040 NV Media Card File Checksum -2147483648 to 2147483647 RO Num ND NC PT
11.042 Parameter Cloning None (0), Read (1), Program (2), Auto (3), Boot (4) RW Txt NC US
None (0)
11.043 Load Defaults None (0), Standard (1), US (2) RW Txt NC
Menu 0 (0), All Menus (1), Read-only Menu 0 (2),
11.044 User Security Status RW Txt ND PT
Read-only (3), Status Only (4), No Access (5)
11.046 Defaults Previously Loaded 0 to 2000 RO Num ND NC PT US
11.052 Serial Number LS 000000000 to 999999999 RO Num ND NC PT
11.053 Serial Number MS 0 to 999999999 RO Num ND NC PT
11.054 Drive Date Code 0 to 65535 RO Num ND NC PT
11.060 Maximum Rated Current 0.000 to 99999.999 A RO Num ND NC PT
11.061 Full Scale Current Kc 0.000 to 99999.999 A RO Num ND NC PT
Power Board Software Version
11.062 0.00 to 99.99 RO Num ND NC PT
Number
11.063 Product Type 0 to 255 RO Num ND NC PT
11.064 Product Identifier Characters (1295396912) to (2147483647) RO Chr ND NC PT
11.065 Drive Rating And Configuration 00000000 to 999999999 RO Num ND NC PT
11.066 Power Stage Identifier 0 to 255 RO Num ND NC PT
11.067 Control Board Identifier 0.000 to 65.535 RO Num ND NC PT
11.068 Internal I/O Identifier 0 to 255 RO Num ND NC PT
Position Feedback Interface
11.069 0 to 255 RO Num ND NC PT
Identifier
11.070 Core Parameter Database Version 0.00 to 99.99 RO Num ND NC PT
Number Of Power Modules
11.071 0 to 20 RO Num ND NC PT US
Detected
11.072 NV Media Card Create Special File 0 to 1 0 RW Num NC
11.073 NV Media Card Type None (0), SMART Card (1), SD Card (2) RO Num ND NC PT
11.075 NV Media Card Read-only Flag Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
NV Media Card Warning
11.076 Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
Suppression Flag
NV Media Card File Required
11.077 0 to 9999 RW Num ND NC PT
Version
11.079 Drive Name Characters 1-4 (-2147483648) to (2147483647) * RW Chr PT US

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics

11.084 Drive Mode RFC-S (3) RO Txt ND NC PT US
None (0), Read-only (1), Status-only (2),
11.085 Security Status RO Txt ND NC PT PS
No Access (3)
11.086 Menu Access Status Menu 0 (0) or All Menus (1) RO Txt ND NC PT PS
11.090 Keypad Port Serial Address 1 to16 1 RW Num US
11.091 Product Identifier Characters 1 (-2147483648) to (2147483647) RO Num ND NC PT


Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
9.12 Menus 15, 16 and 17: Option module set-up

Figure 9-11 Location of option module slots and their corresponding menu numbers
1. Solutions Module Slot 1 - Menu 15

Parameters common to all categories

mm.001 Module ID 0 to 65535 RO Num ND NC PT
mm.002 Software Version 00.00.00 to 99.99.99 RO Num ND NC PT
mm.003 Hardware Version 0.00 to 99.99 RO Num ND NC PT
mm.004 Serial Number LS RO Num ND NC PT
0 to 99999999
mm.005 Serial Number MS RO Num ND NC PT
mm.006 Module Status -2 to 3 RO Num ND NC PT
mm.007 Module Reset Off (0) to On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
The option module ID indicates the type of module that is installed in the corresponding slot. See the relevant option module user guide for more
information regarding the module.
Option module ID Module Category

0 No module installed
209 SI-I/O Automation (I/O Expansion)
433 SI-Ethernet Fieldbus

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
9.13 Menu 22: Additional Menu 0 set-up

22.001 Parameter 00.001 Set-up 06.010 RW Num PT US
22.028 Parameter 00.028 Set-up 0.000 to 59.999 29.040 RW Num PT US

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics

22.068 Parameter 00.068 Set-up 0.000 to 59.999 11.025 RW Num PT US
22.070 Parameter 00.070 Set-up RW Num PT US
22.076 Parameter 00.076 Set-up RW Num PT US

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
9.14 Menu 29: Compressor specific functions

Parameter Range Default Type
29.001 Total Number Of Trips 0 to 10000 0 RW Num US
29.002 Trip/Lockout Number 0 to 255 0 RO Num NC PT
29.003 Condition Alerts 0 to 255 0 RO Num NC PT
29.004 Condition Warnings 0 to 255 0 RO Num NC PT
29.005 Active Trip Number 0 to 255 0 RO Num NC PT
29.006 Running Log Of Alerts Entry Number 0 to 20 0 RO Num NC PT
29.007 Running Log Alert Id Number And Days 0 to 65535 0 RO Num NC PT
29.008 Last Trip Time 00:00:00 to 00:23:59 00:00:00 RO Time NC PT
29.009 Last Trip Date 00-00-00 to 00-31-12 00-00-00 RO Date NC PT
29.010 Compressor Missing A Phase Counter 0 to 10 0 RO Num NC PT US
29.011 Configuration Control Parameter 00000000000000 to 11111111111111 00000000000000 RW Bin US
29.012 System Control Word 000000 to 111111 000000 RW Bin US
29.013 Soft-Start Speed 1500 to 7200 rpm 3600 rpm RW Num US
29.014 Soft Start Acceleration 1 to 3 s/1000 rpm 1 s/1000 rpm RW Num US
29.015 Soft-Start Dwell Time 60 to 300 s 120 s RW Num US
29.016 Number Of Soft-Start Attempts 0 to 3 0 RO Num
29.017 User Speed Reference In Rpm 0 to 7200 rpm 1800 rpm RW Num US
Speed Reference After Envelope
29.018 0 to 7200 rpm 0 rpm RO Num NC PT
Control
29.019 Final Speed Reference 0 to 7200 rpm 0 rpm RO Num NC PT
29.020 Speed Feedback 1 to 10000 rpm 1 rpm RO Num NC PT
29.021 Normal Running Acceleration 5 to 1000 s/1000 rpm 5 s/1000 rpm RW Num US
29.022 Normal Running Deceleration 5 to 1000 s/1000 rpm 5 s/1000 rpm RW Num US
29.023 Shutdown Hold Speed 0 to 7200 rpm 3600 rpm RW Num US
29.024 Shutdown Deceleration 2 to 20 s/1000 rpm 5 s/1000 rpm RW Num US
29.025 Controlled Shutdown Dwell Time 0 to 300 s 120 s RW Num US
29.026 Stop Deceleration 2 to 20 s/1000 rpm 2 s/1000 rpm RW Num US
29.027 Oil Boost Threshold Speed 1800 to 3600 rpm 1800 rpm RW Num US
29.028 Oil Return Speed 3600 to 7200 rpm 3600 rpm RW Num US
29.029 Oil Boost Threshold Time 1 to 120 Minutes 120 Minutes RW Num US
29.030 Oil Boost Solution Time 5 to 30 Minutes 5 Minutes RW Num US
29.031 Oil Boost Acceleration Rate 2 to 20 s/1000 rpm 5 s/1000 rpm RW Num US
29.032 Oil Boost Deceleration Rate 2 to 20 s/1000 rpm 5 s/1000 rpm RW Num US
29.033 Oil Boost Timer 0 to 120 Minutes 0 Minutes RO Num US
29.034 Defrost Cycle End Dwell Time 30 to 300 s 60 s RW Num US
29.035 Defrost Acceleration Rate 2 to 20 s/1000 rpm 2 s/1000 rpm RW Num US
29.036 Defrost Deceleration Rate 2 to 20 s/1000 rpm 2 s/1000 rpm RW Num US
29.037 User Defrost Speed Reference 1500 to 7200 rpm 1500 rpm RW Num US
29.039 Stator Heating Wattage 10 to 150 W 100 W RW Num US
29.040 Short Cycle Count 0 to 4 0 RO Num
29.041 Short Cycle Limit 1 to 144 48 RW Num US
29.042 Short Cycle Time 60 to 600 s 60 s RW Num US
29.043 Condenser Pressure 0 to 6500 0 RW Num US
29.044 Evaporator Pressure 0 to 6500 0 RW Num US
29.045 DLT: Discharge Line Temperature -40 to 330 F 0 F RW Num
29.046 DLT: Check Delay Time 0 to 60 s 5s RW Num US
29.047 DLT: Over Temperature Fault Count 0 to 4 0 RO Num
29.048 Envelope Profile Selection 0 to 3 0 RO Num US
29.049 Out Of Envelope Trip Delay Time 0 to 600 s 600 s RW Num US
Out Of Envelope Trip Delay Time For
29.050 0 to 1800 s 600 s RW Num US
Low Condensing
29.051 Locked Rotor Idle Time 30 to 300 s 35 s RW Num US
Lost Rotor Ride-Through Dynamic
29.052 30 to 400 rpm 200 rpm RW Num US
Threshold
Lost Rotor Ride-Through Constant
29.053 30 to 400 rpm 100 rpm RW Num US
Threshold

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Parameter Range Default Type

29.054 Locked Rotor Failure Start Count 0 to 10 0 RO Num
29.055 Drive Output Power 0 to 100 kW 0 kW RO Num NC PT
29.056 Total Current 0 to 200 A 0A RO Num NC PT
29.057 Torque Producing Current 0 to 200 A 0A RO Num NC PT
29.058 Fieldbus Comms Monitor 0 to 300 s 0s RW Num
29.059 Derivative Software Version 0 to 65535 RO Ver ND NC PT
29.060 Software System State 0 to 20 0 RO Num NC PT
29.001 Total Number Of Trips

Minimum 0 Maximum 10000
Default 0 Units None
Type 16 Bit User Save Update Rate
Display Format Standard Decimal Places 0
Coding RW, Num, US
The total number of trips is stored and saved. The user can reset this by writing zero to the parameter.
Parameter Parameter
Function area Description Units Range Default
number name
Counts the trips.
Total number of 0 to
29.001 Diagnostics User can reset to none 0
trips 10000
zero.
29.002 Trip/Lockout Number

Type 8 Bit Volatile Update Rate
Coding RO, Num, NC, PT
Compressor related trip status (Zero is no trip).

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
29.003 Condition Alerts

Table 9-4 Key to the condition alerts parameter
Alert / Trouble
Alarm Condition Condition description Further actions shooting
number information
Trip if more than 3 samples each
1st DLT OT Protection DLT temperature is too high
taken at 5 second intervals
Trip if error persists for more than
2nd DLT sensor fault The DLT sensor is not within range.
60 seconds
Soft-start did not Lockout after 3 consecutive
3rd The soft-start did not achieve the initial speed.
succeed alerts
4th Reserved
Dynamic speed demand: Speed error is greater than
30 % [user set] for longer than 4 seconds.
5th Lost rotor Will fold back
Constant speed demand: Speed error is greater than
20 % [user set] for longer than 4 seconds.
See section 6.2.11 Max-load and Low-Voltage fold back
6th Foldback active management on page 82. May affect the motor current May trip on drive thermal model
overload limit.
Short-cycle lockout
7th Prevents short-cycling by delaying the next start up
active
The condition alert parameter should be viewed as a binary value where each bit within the value is associated with an individual condition alert. The
use of a single parameter provides fast access to the trip/status through a single parameter read transfer.
Example: If Pr 00.003 = 12, then bit 3 and bit 2 are both set. If Pr 00.003 = 8, then only bit 3 is set.
29.004 Condition Warnings

Table 9-5 Key to the condition warning parameter
Warning Trouble shooting

Condition Condition description
number information
A locked rotor condition has been detected and the drive is
1st Locked rotor retrying
retrying or waiting between retries
2nd Reserved
3rd Stator heating active
4th Envelope Override Active
5th Defrost cycle active Will change to low when the defrost cycle is complete
6th Reserved
7th Oil boost active
The condition warning parameter should be viewed as a binary value where each bit within the value is associated with an individual condition alert.
The use of a single parameter provides fast access to the trip/status through a single parameter read transfer.

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
29.005 Active Trip Number

Active trip number provides the numeration assigned to the most current trip. The trip description is provided in Pr 00.029 (Trip 0). Refer to section
12.5 Trips, Sub-trip numbers on page 195 for additional information on trip numbers.
29.006 Running Log Of Alerts Entry Number

Coding RW, Num, NC, PT
See Pr 29.007.
29.007 Running Log Alert Id Number And Days

Parameter
Parameter name Function area Description Units Range Default
number
29.001 Total number of trips Diagnostics Counts the trips. User can reset to zero. none 0 to 10000 0
29.012 System control word Diagnostics See table below for key none 0 to 32767 0
Compressor related trip status. [Zero is
29.002 Trip/Lockout number Diagnostics none 0 to 255 0
no trip] See logging section.
29.003 Condition alerts Diagnostics System related alerts none 0 to 255 0
29.004 Condition warnings Diagnostics System related warnings none 0 to 255 0
Configuration control
29.011 Diagnostics See table below for key none 0 to 32767 0
parameter
Running log of alerts entry
29.006 Diagnostics User set 1 to 20 none 0 to 20 0
number
iidhh format.
Running log alert ID number
29.007 Diagnostics Id is the ii, day is the d and hours are the none 0 to 65535 0
and days and hours
hh.
The numeration assigned to the current
29.005 Active trip number Diagnostics trip; see Pr 00.029 {Pr 10.020} for the none 0 to 255 0
last trip description.
NOTE
Refer to the table in section 9.14 Menu 29: Compressor specific functions on page 149 for additional details.

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Table 9-6 Key to the condition alerts and warnings parameter
ID Condition Condition description

1 DLT OT Protection DLT temperature is too high
2 DLT sensor fault The DLT sensor is not within range.
3 Soft-start did not succeed The soft-start did not achieve the initial speed.
4 Reserved
Dynamic speed demand: Speed error is greater than 30 % [user set] for longer than 4 seconds.
5 Lost rotor
Constant speed demand: Speed error is greater than 20 % [user set] for longer than 4 seconds.
See section 6.2.11 Max-load and Low-Voltage fold back management on page 82. May affect the motor
6 Foldback active
current overload limit.
7 Short-cycle lockout active Prevents short-cycling by delaying the next start up
Alerts logged with a time stamp sampled on the activation of the alert.
• The time stamp is quantised to 1 hour.
• The data/time is in hours ago (and thus is updated every hour that passes).
• The log shows the last 20 alerts.
• An event will be removed after 7 days.
Pr 00.074 {29.006} Running log of alerts entry number User set 1 to 20 INT16
iidhh format.
Pr 29.007 {29.007} Running log alert ID number and days and hours INT16
The alert ID is the ii, day is the d and hour is the hh.
The user sets the alert entry number (1 to 20) in Pr 00.074 and then reads the Alert ID information from Pr 00.075. The Pr 00.075 information is in the
following format: Alert ID number found in Table 12-9; days elapsed; hours elapsed.
Example, a DLT sensor fault that occurred 4 days and 12 hours ago would read "2412"
29.008 Last Trip Time

0 2359
Minimum Maximum
(Display: 00:00:00) (Display: 00:23:59)
0
Default Units None
(Display: 00:00:00)
Display Format Time Decimal Places 0
Coding RO, Time, NC, PT
This is the most recent trip time 00:hh:mm format.
29.009 Last Trip Date

0 3112
Minimum Maximum
(Display: 00:00:00) (Display: 00-31-12)
0
Default Units None
(Display: 00:00:00)
Display Format Date Decimal Places 0
Coding RO, Date, NC, PT
This is the most recent trip date 00-dd-mm format.
29.010 Compressor Missing A Phase Counter

Coding RO, Num, NC, PT, US

MISSING PHASE TEST ON START Missing phase on start

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Parameter
number
29.010 Compressor missing a phase counter Compressor missing a phase none 0 to 10 0
This feature is set up by the drive application software and implemented in the standard drive firmware.
• The standard drive firmware will trip Out Phase Loss.1. The drive application software will trip "Compressor Missing Phase" and move to the
TRIPPED state.
• After 5 minutes the trip will be automatically reset.
• The system will lockout after 10 trips within 24 hours [the count of trips will be reset on lock-out].
• A power cycle or Fieldbus reset command will be required to clear the lockout.
[CoreSense 1384 Alert/Lockout Code 6 - Missing Phase]
Trip 98 indicates that phase loss has been detected at the drive output.
Sub-trip Reason
1 U phase detected as disconnected when drive enabled to run
2 V phase detected as disconnected when drive enabled to run
3 W phase detected as disconnected when drive enabled to run
29.011 Configuration Control Parameter

0 16383
Minimum (Display: Maximum (Display:
00000000000000) 11111111111111)
0
Default (Display: Units None
00000000000000)
Display Format Binary Decimal Places 0
Coding RW, Bin, US
Table 9-7 Key to the configuration parameter
Bit Value Name Function Default

0 1 Variable switching frequency 0: Disable, 1: Enable 0 (Disable)
1 2 Single phase AC input detection 0: Disable, 1: Enable 0 (Disable)
2 4 Short cycle protection 0: Enable, 1: Disable 0 (Enable)
3 8 Envelope control 0: Enable, 1: Disable 0 (Enable)
4 16 Temperature unit 0: Fahrenheit, 1: Celsius 0 (Fahrenheit)
5 32 Pressure unit 0: Psig, 1: Bar 0 (Psig)
6 64 Oil control 0: Enable, 1: Disable 0 (Enable)
7 128 Defrost cycle control 0: Disable, 1: Enable 0 (Disable)
8 256 Control source for Start/run and stator heater 0: From digital input, 1: From Modbus 0 (Digital)
9 512 DLT protection 0: Enable, 1: Disable 0 (Enable)
10 1024 Locked rotor detection on start 0: Enable, 1: Disable 0 (Enable)
12 4096 Lost rotor ride-through protection 0: Enable, 1: Disable 0 (Enable)
0: From Modbus or Keypad,
13 8192 DLT temperature source 0 (From OEM)
1: From Terminal Analog Input
14 N/A Reserved
15 N/A Reserved

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
29.012 System Control Word

0 63
Minimum Maximum
(Display: 000000) (Display: 111111)
0
Default Units None
(Display: 000000)
Display Format Binary Decimal Places 0
Coding RW, Bin, US
Parameter
number
29.012 System control word Diagnostics See table below for key none 0 to 32767 0
Table 9-8 Key to the System control word parameter
Bit Value Name Function Default

0 1 Start/run 1: Spin the motor, 0: Disable the drive 0
1 2 Controlled shutdown 1: Shut down the compressor, 0: No action 0
2 4 Stator heating control 1: Turn on the stator heater, 0: No action 0
3 8 Defrost cycle trigger 1: Trigger the defrost cycle on transition, 0: No action 0
4 16 Reset trips if possible 1: Reset trips on transition, 0: No action 0
5 32 Trip on communication loss 1: Enable the communication watchdog, 0: No action 0
29.013 Soft-Start Speed

Default 3600 Units rpm
Coding RW, Num, US
See Pr 29.016.
29.014 Soft Start Acceleration

Minimum 1 Maximum 3
Default 1 Units s/1000 rpm
Coding RW, Num, US
See Pr 29.016.
29.015 Soft-Start Dwell Time

Default 120 Units s
Coding RW, Num, US
See Pr 29.016.

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
29.016 Number Of Soft-Start Attempts

Minimum 0 Maximum 3
Coding RW, Num
The soft-start and controlled stop modes override the OEM speed reference.

SOFT START Start up
Parameter
number
29.013 Soft-start speed Soft-start rpm 1500 to 7200 3600
Soft-start
29.014 Soft-start acceleration rate Soft-start s per 1000 rpm 1 to 3 1
acceleration rate
29.015 Soft-start dwell time Soft-start seconds 60 to 300 120
29.016 Number of soft-start attempts Soft-start none 0 to 3 0
The drive controls the starting routine of the variable speed scroll. The routine allows soft starting, an advantage over traditional on-off control of non
variable speed compressors.
• On a call for operation from the system controller, the drive will start the compressor and ramp its speed up to 3600 rpm in approximately 4
seconds or at the rate of 1000 rpm per second.
• The final motor speed maybe affected by the loading conditions and foldback. The speed estimation is checked 1 second after the soft-start
demand should have reached 3600 rpm. If the torque loading (Pr 04.020) is greater than 80 %, the soft-start demand will be reduced to zero at
1000 rpm per second and an alert is set. When the demand has reached 0 rpm the system waits for 1 second (for the rotor speed to meet the
demand) before the motor supply is removed. The system waits 10 seconds before re-starting the soft-start.
• If there are three consecutive soft-start alerts, the drive will trip and lockout the compressor. A power cycle or Modbus reset command will be
required to clear the lockout.
• The drive will maintain the 3600 rpm command for a user defined time (Pr 29.015) and then ramp the speed up or down to the speed requested
by the system controller at a rate of 200 rpm per second. This applies to all start up conditions.
29.017 User Speed Reference In Rpm

Coding RW, Num, US
From OEM controller
During normal running the change in the OEM speed reference is internally limited by +/-200 rpm.
Parameter
number
Speed reference after Reference after limits and
29.018 Set by the software rpm 0 to 7200 0
envelope control protection
Normal running Normal running
29.021 Normal running s per 1000 rpm 5 to 1000 5
acceleration rate acceleration rate
Normal running Normal running
29.022 Normal running s per 1000 rpm 5 to 1000 5
deceleration rate deceleration rate
User speed reference in
29.017 Reference From OEM controller rpm 0 to 7200 1800
Rpm

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
29.018 Speed Reference After Envelope Control

Default 0 Units rpm

Running states Envelope control
Parameter
number
29.043 Condenser pressure Envelope control psig/10 0 to 6500 0
29.044 Evaporator pressure Envelope control psig/10 0 to 6500 0
29.018 Speed reference after envelope control Envelope control rpm 0 to 7200 0
If envelope is not enabled the frequency minimum is 1000 rpm.
The user can select between psig and Bar units using Pr 00.006.
This functionality will prevent the compressor from being used outside of its design limits (Envelope). The benefit to the customer of this functionality
is a control simplification for the OEM (design time).
• Out to the Condenser (Pr 29.043)
• In from the evaporator (Pr 29.044)
The control system has two stages:
• Out of outer envelope detection
• Speed limits within an envelope sub-region
Out of outer envelope detection:
The outer envelope is defined based on a set of points which are used within straight line formula to detect whether a pressure point is in or out of the
outer envelope. The quantisation is to 1psig. When rounding is required, this will be performed "into" the envelope (so round down if the value is just
above, and round up if the value is just below) to avoid rogue trips.
The drive will trip "out of envelope" if the pressure point is out of the outer envelope.
In practice, the Discharge Line Temperature control should bring the operating away from the boundary of the outer envelope by modifying the speed.
If Condensing/Evaporation pressures are out of envelop for 15 seconds, an alert is set. After alert, if the pressures are within the envelop for 10
minutes, the alert is cleared.
Speed limits within an envelope sub-region:
The sub-region is determined if the pressure point is within the outer envelope.
Given the two pressure inputs this function will provide a maximum range for the speed which will be applied to the reference.
The limits will be slewed to prevent a step change in limit and act as a hysteresis (200 rpm per second). The software will set the "Envelope Override
Active" alert flag when the speed reference is being limited by this function.
The drive will act as an override on the speed reference signal, preventing over/under speed at an envelope point if the system controller called for it.
The envelope override limits both the minimum and maximum speed. Envelope override is only active during the running group of states and affects
the input speed reference before the other functions modify the reference.
29.019 Final Speed Reference

Default 0 Units rpm
Pr 29.019 shows the reference at the input to the speed controller with resolution of 1 rpm.

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
29.020 Speed Feedback

Default 1 Units rpm
Pr 29.020 is the motor's actual feedback with resolution of 1 rpm.
29.021 Normal Running Acceleration

Coding RW, Num, US
See Pr 29.017.
29.022 Normal Running Deceleration

Coding RW, Num, US
See Pr 29.017.
29.023 Shutdown Hold Speed

Coding RW, Num, US
See Pr 29.025.
29.024 Shutdown Deceleration

Coding RW, Num, US
See Pr 29.025.
29.025 Controlled Shutdown Dwell Time

Default 120 Units s
Coding RW, Num, US

CONTROLLED SHUT DOWN Shut down

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Parameter
number
Controlled shut 3600 or envelope
29.023 Shutdown hold speed rpm 0 to 7200
down minimum
Controlled shut 3600 or envelope
01.024 Zero speed Held at zero rpm 0 to 7200
down minimum
Controlled shut Controlled stop
29.024 Shutdown deceleration s per 1000 rpm 2 to 20 5
down deceleration rate
Controlled shut Stop reference
29.026 Stop deceleration s per 1000rpm 2 to 20 2
down deceleration rate
Controlled shut
29.025 Controlled shutdown dwell time seconds 0 to 300 120
down
This function requires the compressor to complete a shutdown and stop before starting up again. Operating and restarting in the range 0-999 rpm will
cause Back EMF, sound, mechanical wear etc. so this speed range is to be avoided.
When the system controller signals for the compressor to stop, by sending controlled shut down command, the controlled shut down is triggered.
If the envelope protection is active:
• If 70 % of the final speed reference, Pr 00.010 (which is the OEM reference subjected to the acceleration and deceleration limits) is still higher
than the minimum operating speed envelope condition, reduce the speed by 30 % to 70 % of the final speed reference.
• Else, stay at the current speed.
If the envelope control is not active:
• If the estimated speed is above Pr 00.038 {29.023}, ramp down to Pr 00.038 {29.023} at 200 rpm per second.
• Else if the estimated speed is below Pr 00.038 {29.023}, remain at the current speed.
The controlled transition from the operating speed to the minimum speed will result in reducing the excess internal pressure difference inside the
compressor due to leakage across the compressor elements at the lower speeds. At this point the residual pressure difference in the compressor may
cause a limited amount of reverse rotation of the motor.
If a minor fault condition occurs during operation the drive should perform a controlled shutdown.
29.026 Stop Deceleration

Coding RW, Num, US
See Pr 29.025.
29.027 Oil Boost Threshold Speed

Coding RW, Num, US
See Pr 29.030.

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
29.028 Oil Return Speed

Coding RW, Num, US
See Pr 29.030.
29.029 Oil Boost Threshold Time

Default 120 Units Minutes
Coding RW, Num, US
See Pr 29.030.
29.030 Oil Boost Solution Time

Coding RW, Num, US

Running states Oil Boost
Parameter
number
Boost speed used if oil boost
29.028 Oil return speed Oil boost rpm 3600 to 7200 3600
required
Oil boost acceleration
29.031 Oil boost Oil boost acceleration rate s per 1000 rpm 2 to 20 5
rate
Oil boost deceleration
29.032 Oil boost Oil boost deceleration rate s per 1000 rpm 2 to 20 5
rate
29.027 Oil boost threshold speed Oil boost Oil boost threshold speed rpm 1800 to 3600 3600
29.029 Oil boost threshold time Oil boost Oil boost threshold time minutes 1 to 120 120
29.030 Oil boost solution time Oil boost Oil boost solution time minutes 5 to 30 5
29.033 Oil boost timer Oil boost Oil boost timer minutes 0 to 120 0
Checks that the speed has been high enough to circulate the oil within the last period.
Active in all run conditions except for soft-start:
• If command speed is higher the user configured threshold, do nothing (the user can only set the threshold higher than the default). Reset the
timer.
• Else, start timing.
• If the compressor is turned off, stop the counter and store the value ready for when the compressor turns on once more.
• If the threshold time (user configurable but can only be lower than the default) has elapsed, ramp to the solution speed (user defined but can only
be higher than the default) at 200 rpm per second. Set the oil boost warning.
• Hold for the solution time (user defined but cannot be less than the default).
• Return to the previous state ramping if necessary at 200 rpm per second. Reset the oil boost warning.
This block goes between the user reference and the envelope control giving a signal path of:
OEM ref -> Oil boost or state machine (soft start, defrost etc) -> envelope limits -> DLT protection -> speed demand sent to drive.
Pr 29.033 indicates how long the compressor speed is below the oil boost threshold.

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
29.031 Oil Boost Acceleration Rate

Coding RW, Num, US
See Pr 29.030.
29.032 Oil Boost Deceleration Rate

Coding RW, Num, US
See Pr 29.030.
29.033 Oil Boost Timer

Coding RW, Num, US
See Pr 29.030.
29.034 Defrost Cycle End Dwell Time

Default 60 Units s
Coding RW, Num, US

DEFROST CYCLE Defrosting
The system controller will send the defrost control command to the drive.
Parameter Function
Parameter name Description Units Range Default
number area
29.035 Defrost acceleration rate Defrost cycle Defrost acceleration rate 0 s per 1000 rpm 2 to 20 2
29.036 Defrost deceleration rate Defrost cycle Defrost deceleration rate 0 s per 1000 rpm 2 to 20 2
User Defrost Speed
29.037 Defrost Speed Reference Defrost cycle rpm 1500 to 7200 1500
Reference
Defrost cycle end dwell Defrost Cycle End Dwell
29.034 Defrost cycle seconds 30 to 300 60
time Time
Once triggered, through the System control word parameter, the defrost cycle will operated until complete. During operation the "Defrost active flag"
will be set high in the condition warnings parameter.
• If the envelope protection is active, look up the minimum speed, ELSE use 1500 rpm [user defined] as the minimum speed.
• The drive should slow the compressor to (Pr 29.037) rpm (or the minimum speed from the envelope condition) at 200 rpm per second.
• The compressor should remain at the speed for (Pr 29.034) seconds to let the suction and discharge pressures stabilize.
• After the hold time, the system will return to the normal running state, changing the speed at 200 rpm per second.

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
29.035 Defrost Acceleration Rate

Coding RW, Num, US
See Pr 29.034.
29.036 Defrost Deceleration Rate

Coding RW, Num, US
See Pr 29.034.
29.037 User Defrost Speed Reference

Coding RW, Num, US
See Pr 29.034.
29.039 Stator Heating Wattage

Default 100 Units W
Coding RW, Num, US
29.040 Short Cycle Count

Minimum 0 Maximum 4
Coding RW, Num

SOFT START Short cycle detection
00.028
Short cycle count Anti-short cycle Number of short cycles that have occurred none 0 to 4 0
{29.040}
00.063
Short cycle limit Anti-short cycle Maximum allowed short cycles in a day none 1 to 144 48
{29.041}
00.064
Short cycle time Anti-short cycle Short cycle duration s 60-600 60 s
{29.042}
Excessive short duration cycles can cause damage to the compressor. The short-cycle prevention scheme detects if there have been too many short-
cycles. It will then alert the user and impose a restart lockout time to prevent further short-cycles.

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Short cycling can occur if control limits are set too tight. This can cause damage to the compressor as correct oil lubrication may not be achieved. This
can also occur as a result of problems with the system control: for example, fluctuating loads and sensor faults.
• A short cycle is defined by a start to stop time of less than the setting of Pr 00.064 {29.042}.
• The start time begins when the system starts the soft-start.
The short-cycle prevention scheme uses an accumulator to detect if there have been too many short-cycles and an alert and restart lockout time to
manage and thus prevent further short-cycles.
Detection of the short-cycle event
A timer is started at the beginning of the soft-start and is checked when the compressor next shuts down.
• If the time between the beginning of the start-up and completion of the shut-down is less than the short cycle duration Pr 00.064 {29.042} an
event has been detected.
Accumulator
• The accumulator is incremented whenever a short-cycle event has been detected.
• The accumulator is decremented every "minimum time between short-cycles" which is the 24 hours divided by the user parameter "maximum
allowed short cycles in a day".
• The accumulator is never permitted to go negative.
Minimum time between short-cycles" = 24hours / "maximum allowed short cycles in a day".
If the time between short-cycles is greater than or equal to the "minimum time between short-cycles", the accumulator value will reduce to zero. If
however, the time between short-cycles is less than the "minimum time between short-cycles", the accumulator will increase.
Management of the short cycle event
• If the accumulator is equal to or greater than Pr 29.041 the prevention management is activated.
• The value of Pr 29.041 has been chosen to permit a number of short-cycles to take place in the short term while providing protection long term.
• While the prevention management is active, the next start is delayed until the accumulator value has reduced from Pr 29.041. The accumulator is
reduced every "minimum time between short-cycles", and thus the starts are restricted to the "minimum time between short-cycles".
• The short-cycle prevention alert is set when the accumulator value is equal to Pr 29.041 and reset when the accumulator value is equal to
Pr 29.041.
Soft start requested

Check every 1
second
YES Is
accumulator
>= Pr 29.041? Has min
NO time between
short-cycles
NO elapsed?
YES => decrement the
Soft start dwell completes accumulator and reset the
Start the “time between” timer
short-cycle timer
Motor supply removed Is alert YES
Stop the active?
short cycle timer
Is time NO
NO difference less
than “short cycle Is
duration Pr 00.064 NO
accumulator
>= Pr 29.041?
YES
YES
Increment
the accumulator Set the alert
NO Is
accumulator
>= Pr 29.041?
YES
Reset the alert
Figure 9-12 Short cycle prevention block
Run command Alarm

Short cycle
prevention
Speed demand Restart lock-out time

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
29.041 Short Cycle Limit

Coding RW, Num, US
See Pr 29.040.
29.042 Short Cycle Time

Default 60 Units s
Coding RW, Num, US
See Pr 29.040.
29.043 Condenser Pressure

Default 0 Units psig/10
Coding RW, Num, US
See Pr 29.018.
29.044 Evaporator Pressure

Default 0 Units psig/10
Coding RW, Num, US
See Pr 29.018.
29.045 DLT: Discharge Line Temperature

Minimum -40 Maximum 330
Default 0 Units F
Coding RW, Num

Running states Discharge Line Temperature Detection
Parameter
number
DLT (Discharge line Discharge line Degrees
29.045 Temperature protection/control -40 to 330 0
temperature) temperature Fahrenheit
Discharge line
29.047 DLT OT fault count Number of over temperature faults none 0 to 4 0
temperature
Discharge line
29.046 DLT Off Delay Time Configurable DLT off delay time Seconds 0 to 60 5
temperature
The DLT signal is measured directly by the drive with a range checked to prove that the signal is connected.
The drive should prevent the compressor from running in the over-temperature situation. This situation can occur anywhere, but the key area is at the
top left of the operating envelope. An over-temperature event can also be indicative of system transients / faults: locked rotor, blocked suction,
blocked discharge, condensing fan failure, system loss of refrigerant charge, improper field charging of the system.

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Must have - Over temperature protection

• The temperature is checked every 1 second.
• If the temperature is above the fault level, an alert is set.
• If the DLT temperature is below the trip level, the alert will be reset.
• If the temperature is above the trip level for more than 3 samples each taken at 5 second intervals, the drive is disabled, the "DLT" trip set and the
software state set to TRIPPED.
• The trips will automatically be cleared if the DLT temperature is below the trip level for 10 minutes. The trip log will still log that the trip has
occurred.
• The DLT over temperature feature can be disabled for field charging and still run the compressor for system setup and commissioning using the
disable function flag.
Pr 29.046 sets the configurable DLT off delay time.

29.046 DLT: Check Delay Time
Default 5 Units s
Coding RW, Num
See Pr 29.045.
29.047 DLT: Over Temperature Fault Count

Minimum 0 Maximum 4
Coding RO, Num
See Pr 29.045.
29.048 Envelope Profile Selection

Minimum 0 Maximum 3
Coding RO, Num, US
Pr 29.048 is used to specify which envelope profiles to use.
Pr 29.048 Envelope Profile

0 ZPV063
1 ZPV096 (4X9/7X9)
2 ZPV096 (5X9)
3 ZPV066
29.049 Out Of Envelope Trip Delay Time

Default 600 Units s
Coding RW, Num, US
Pr 29.049 sets the configurable out of envelope trip delay time.

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
29.050 Out Of Envelope Trip Delay Time For Low Condensing

Default 600 Units s
Coding RW, Num, US
Allow low condensing for up to 1800 seconds at start up by using Pr 29.050.
29.051 Locked Rotor Idle Time

Default 35 Units s
Coding RW, Num, US
See Pr 29.054.
29.052 Lost Rotor Ride-Through Dynamic Threshold

Coding RW, Num, US
Parameter
number
29.052 Lost rotor ride-through dynamic threshold Lost rotor ride-through Speed error rpm 30 to 400 200
29.053 Lost rotor ride-through constant threshold Lost rotor ride-through Speed error rpm 30 to 400 100
• Aim is to avoid nuisance trips by either riding through, or by dealing with the issue and then automatically restarting.
• Operates in the RUNNING state not during soft-start or controlled stop.
The lost rotor detection system detects conditions where the speed error is greater than expected which could be due to a locked or locking rotor
while running. The detection method must not trip during normal operation when speed error would be expected. During dynamic drive output
frequency demand change the expected speed error will be higher than during constant drive output frequency demand so two sets of limits are used.
The limits during dynamic drive output frequency demand change must permit the completion of flood starting (after the soft-start is complete) where
there will be liquid in the scroll rather than vapour. The limits during constant drive output frequency demand must allow for small plugs of liquid,
produced by isolated cooling in the system pipe work, to pass through the compressor.
• Constant drive output frequency demand is defined as less than a 2 % rated frequency change in the last 10 seconds.
Limits during dynamic drive output frequency demand change:
The "lost rotor" condition is detected if the modulus of the speed error (Pr 03.003) is greater than 30 % for longer than 4 seconds [Must be checked for
real systems.] The aim is to keep the drive running.
Limits during constant drive output frequency demand:
The "lost rotor" condition is detected if the modulus of the speed error (Pr 03.003) is greater than 20 % for longer than 4 seconds.
The threshold should be user configurable with sensible default settings.
Action if lost rotor detected
If a lost rotor condition is detected the speed demand is lowered by 200 rpm (at 200 rpm per second) where it remains for a 10 second dwell while the
lost rotor condition is again checked. The "lost rotor" alert is set.
This is repeated until the speed demand is at the minimum envelope speed or 3600 rpm if the envelope protection is not enabled. The supply is
removed and the drive waits for 60 seconds before the "lost rotor" alert is reset and the soft-start begins again.
If the lost rotor condition is not detector during one of the 10 second dwell periods, the speed demand is increased by 200 rpm or to the OEM speed
demand level (which every is lowest) at 200 rpm per second. The "lost rotor" alert is reset.
29.053 Lost Rotor Ride-Through Constant Threshold

Coding RW, Num, US
See Pr 29.052.

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
29.054 Locked Rotor Failure Start Count

Coding RW, Num
Parameter
Parameter Name Function area Description Units Range Default
number
Locked Rotor Failure Records number of failed starts due to Locked
29.054 Locked Rotor Indicator none 0 to 10 0
start count Rotor protection
After a failed start, the drive has to wait for “Idle
29.051 Locked rotor idle time Locked Rotor Indicator seconds 30 to 300 35
time” before trying to start the motor again.
The locked rotor condition is detected if the speed is less than 20 % of the target speed at the end of the initial soft-start ramp.
During the detection phase the "locked rotor" condition warning flag will be set.
After a failed start, the drive will wait for 35 seconds (See CoreSense logic) of idle time before restart the compressor.
After 10 consecutive Locked Rotor Starts have occurred, the drive is to disable itself and produce a "locked rotor" condition trip and the software state
will be set to TRIPPED. A power cycle will be required before the next batch of restarts is attempted. [This is to satisfy the UL requirement
for a manual reset device].
29.055 Drive Output Power

Default 0 Units kW
Pr 29.055 is the power flowing via the AC terminals of the drive.
29.056 Total Current

Default 0 Units A
Pr 29.056 is the instantaneous drive output current scaled so that it represents the RMS phase current in Amps under steady state conditions.
29.057 Torque Producing Current

Default 0 Units A
Pr 29.057 is the instantaneous level of torque producing current scaled so that it represents the RMS level of torque producing current under steady
state conditions.

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
29.058 Fieldbus Comms Monitor

Default 0 Units s
Coding RW, Num
Parameter
number
Fieldbus comms Fieldbus comms
29.058 If zero [default] the comms monitoring is disabled. seconds 0 to 300 0
monitor monitor
If zero [default] the comms monitoring is disabled.
• If a value greater than 1 is written by the OEM to this parameter, the software will increment the parameter every 1 second.
• If the incremented parameter value is larger than 300 (5 minutes) the system will move to the trip state and stop the compressor using a
controlled stop.
• Once communication is re-established (OEM writes a parameter value of 0 to turn off, or 1 to restart the timer) the trip will be cleared.
• The OEM should write a value less than 300 before the counter reaches 300 to prevent a trip. This permits the user to select the timeout, for
example writing a 1 to the parameter provides the full 5 minutes.
29.059 Derivative Software Version

Default None Units None
Display Format Version Decimal Places 0
Coding RO, Ver, ND, NC, PT
Derivative software version.
29.060 Software System State

Pr 29.060 indicates the software state.
Table 9-9 Key to the Software system state
Numerical state Name

0 IDLE
1 IDLE WITH STATOR HEATING
2 SOFT START
3 NORMAL RUNNING
4 DEFROST CYCLE
5 OIL BOOST
6 CONTROLLED SHUT DOWN
20 TRIPPED

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
10 MODBUS RTU
10.1 Communications connections
The drive offers a 2 wire 485 interface. This enables the drive set-up, operation and monitoring to be carried out with a PC or controller if required.
Figure 10-1 Location of the comms connectors
1 8 1 8
The 485 option provides two parallel RJ45 connectors are provided allowing easy daisy chaining. The drive only supports MODBUS RTU protocol.
See Table 10-1 for the connection details.
The serial communications port of the drive is a RJ45 socket, which is isolated from the power stage and the other control terminals (see section
4.7 Communications connections on page 57 for connection and isolation details).
The communications port applies a 2 unit load to the communications network.
NOTE
Standard Ethernet cables are not recommended for use when connecting drives on a 485 network as they do not have the correct twisted pairs for the
pinout of the serial comms port.
Table 10-1 Serial communication port pin-outs
Pin Function
1 120  Termination resistor
2 RX TX (Receive / transmit line - positive)
3 Isolated 0 V
4 +24 V (100 mA)
5 Isolated 0 V
6 TX enable
7 RX\ TX\ (Receive / transmit line - negative)
8 RX\ TX\ (if termination resistors are required, link to pin 1)
Shell Isolated 0 V
Minimum number of connections are 2, 3, 7 and shield.
10.1.1 Isolation of the 485 serial communications port
The serial PC communications port is double insulated and meets the requirements for SELV in EN 50178:1998.
In order to meet the requirements for SELV in IEC60950 (IT equipment) it is necessary for the control computer to be grounded.
Alternatively, when a lap-top or similar device is used which has no provision for grounding, an isolation device must be incorporated in
the communications lead.
WARNING
An isolated serial communications lead has been designed to connect the drive to IT equipment (such as laptop computers), and is available from the
supplier of the drive. See below for details:
Table 10-2 Isolated serial comms lead details
Part number Description
TBC* USB to EIA 485 Comms cable
TBC* EIA 232 to EIA 485 Comms cable
The “isolated serial communications” lead has reinforced insulation as defined in IEC60950 for altitudes up to 3,000 m.

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
NOTE
When using the EIA 232 Comms cable the available baud rate is limited to 19.2 k baud.
When using one of the above converters or any other suitable converter with the drive, it is recommended that no terminating resistors be connected
on the network. It may be necessary to 'link out' the terminating resistor within the converter depending on which type is used. The information on how
to link out the terminating resistor will normally be contained in the user information supplied with the converter.
10.1.2 2 wire EIA-RS485 network
The diagram below shows the connections required for a 2 wire EIA-RS485 network, using a master controller with an EIA-RS485 port.
Figure 10-2 2 wire EIA-RS485 network connections
Master Slave Slave

Term
0V /Rx Rx /Tx Tx 0V /TxRx TxRx 0V /TxRx /TxRx TxRx
Resistor
3 7 2 3 7 8 1 2
1 2 3 4 5
Termination resistor Link for termination

resistors (if required)
NOTE
If more than one drive is connected to a host computer / PLC etc, each drive must have a unique serial address see section 10.3 Slave address and
section 5.11 Communications on page 71
Any number in the permitted range 1 to 247 may be used.
10.1.3 Routing of the cable
A data communications cable should not run parallel to any power cables, especially ones that connect drives to motors. If parallel runs are
unavoidable, ensure a minimum spacing of 300 mm (1 ft) between the communications cable and the power cable.
Cables crossing one another at right-angles are unlikely to give trouble. The maximum cable length for a EIA-RS485 jumper (link) is 1200 metres
(4,000 ft).
10.1.4 Termination
When a long-distance multi-drop EIA-RS485 system is used, the transmit and receive pairs should have a 120  termination resistor installed across
them in order to reduce signal reflections. The drive has an integral 120  resistor which can be installed by modifying the comms cable on the last
slave drive so that connections 1 and 8 are shorted together. The Master device may or may not have an integral termination resistor. However, at the
lower data rates noise reflections are not so critical. When used, this resistor should be installed at both ends of the network.
For correct operation of the EIA-RS485 network, the master controller should be designed to polarize the network by biasing the data lines either to
+5 V (RX and TX) or to 0V (/RX and /TX). This will prevent spurious triggering when the data lines are inactive.
10.1.5 Serial communications set-up parameters

The following parameters need to be set according to the system requirements.
Serial Address (Pr 11.023)
This parameter defines the serial address and an addresses between 1 and 247 are permitted.
Changing the parameters does not immediately change the serial communications settings. See note below for more details.
Serial Mode (Pr 11.024)
This parameter defines the data format used by the EIA 485 comms port on the drive.
Value Text
0 (Default) 8 2 NP
1 8 1 NP
2 8 1 EP
3 8 1 OP
4 8 2 NP M
5 8 1 NP M
6 8 1 EP M
7 8 1 OP M
8 7 2 NP
9 7 1 NP
10 7 1 EP
11 7 1 OP
12 7 2 NP M
13 7 1 NP M
14 7 1 EP M
15 7 1 OP M

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
The bits in the value of Serial Mode (Pr 11.024) define the data format as Silent Period (Pr 11.027)
follows.: The silent period defines the idle time required to detect the end of a
received data message. If Silent Period (Pr 11.027) = 0 then the silent
Bits 3 2 1 and 0 period is at least 3.5 characters at the selected baud rate. This is the
Stop bits and Parity standard silent period for MODBUS RTU. If Silent Period (Pr 11.027) is
Number of
Register mode 0 = 2 stop bits, no parity non-zero it defines the minimum silent period in milliseconds.
data bits
Format 0 = Standard 1 = 1 stop bit, no parity Changing the parameters does not immediately change the serial
0 = 8 bits
1 = Modified 2 = 1 stop bit, even parity communications settings. See note below for more details.
1 = 7 bits
3 = 1 stop bit, odd parity
NOTE
Bit 3 is always 0 in the core product as 8 data bits are required for When Serial Address (Pr 11.023), Serial Mode (Pr 11.024), Serial Baud
MODBUS RTU. Rate (Pr 11.025), Minimum Comms Transmit Delay (Pr 11.026) or Silent
Bit 2 selects either standard or modified register mode. The menu and Period (Pr 11.027) are modified the changes do not have an immediate
parameter numbers are derived for each mode as given in the table effect on the serial communications system. The new values are used
below. Standard mode is the default setting and allows up to 99 after the next power-up or if Reset Serial Communications (Pr 11.020) is
parameters to be accessed within a menu. Modified mode is provided to set to one. Reset Serial Communications (Pr 11.020) is automatically
allow register numbers up to 255 to be addressed. cleared to zero after the communications system is updated.
This does not save any changes made and a separate parameter save
Register mode Register address
is required.
Standard (mm x 100) + ppp - 1 where mm ≤ 162 and ppp ≤ 99
10.1.6 Fieldbus (MODBUS) over RS485
Modified (mm x 256) + ppp - 1 where mm ≤ 63 and ppp ≤ 255 The OEM controller can read all of the available standard drive
This parameter can be changed via the drive keypad, or via the comms parameters. Certain trips and lock out conditions are resettable through
interface itself. Changing the parameters does not immediately change the Fieldbus link using the System control word Pr 00.007 {29.012}.
the serial communications settings. See note below for more details. Parameter
Function area Description Units Range Default
Serial Baud Rate (Pr 11.025) (29.058)
This parameter defines the baud rate used by the serial comms If zero
interface. Fieldbus [default] the
Fieldbus
comms comms none 0 to 300 0
Value Text comms monitor
monitor monitoring is
0 300 disabled.
1 600
If this parameter is set to 0 (default) Fieldbus comms monitoring is
2 1200 disabled.
3 2400
If a value greater than 1 is written by the OEM to this parameter, the
4 4800 software will begin to increment the parameter every 1 second. If the
5 9600 parameter reaches a value larger than 300 (5 minutes), the system will
6 (Default) 19200 move to the trip state (Pr 00.021 = 45) and stop the compressor using a
7 38400 controlled stop.
8 57600 This parameter is therefore designed to be periodically reset to a non
zero value (in a watchdog type fashion) by the OEM controller. If a
9 76800
Fieldbus communication problem occurs, this reset will not occur and the
10 115200 system will trip within 300 s. It should be noted that the OEM can select
Changing the parameters does not immediately change the serial the timeout: for example writing 1 to the parameter provides the full five
communications settings. See note below for more details. minutes, writing 240 would give 1 minute.
Minimum Comms Transmit Delay (Pr 11.026) NOTE
There will always be a finite delay between the end of a message from This function is similar to CoreSense 1384 Warning Code 1 - Loss of
the host (master) and the time at which the host is ready to receive the Communication].
response from the drive (slave). The drive does not respond until at least
1ms after the message has been received from the host allowing 1ms for
the host to change from transmit to receive mode. This initial delay can
be extended using Minimum Comms Transmit Delay (Pr 11.026) if
required.
Value Action
The transmitters are turned on and data transmission
0
begins immediately after the initial delay (≥1 ms)
The transmitters are turned on after the initial delay
1
(≥1ms) and data transmission begins 1ms later
The transmitters are turned on after a delay of at least
2 or more the time specified by Minimum Comms Transmit Delay
(Pr 11.026) and data transmission begins 1ms later
The drive holds its own transmitters active for up to 1 ms after it has
transmitted data before switching to the receive mode; the host should
not send any data during this time.
communications settings See note below for more details.

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
This section describes the adaptation of the MODBUS RTU protocol. The frame is terminated with a minimum silent period of 3.5 character
The portable software class which implements this protocol is also times (for example, at 19200 baud the minimum silent period is 2 ms).
defined. Nodes use the terminating silence period to detect the end of frame and
MODBUS RTU is a master slave system with half-duplex message begin frame processing. All frames must therefore be transmitted as a
exchange. The variable speed drive implementation supports the core continuous stream without any gaps greater or equal to the silence
function codes to read and write registers. A scheme to map between period. If an erroneous gap is inserted then receiving nodes may start
MODBUS registers and drive parameters is defined. The drive frame processing early in which case the CRC will fail and the frame will
implementation also defines a 32-bit extension to the standard 16-bit be discarded. See description of Silent Period (Pr 11.027) in section
register data format. 5.11.1 EIA-485 Serial communications on page 71.
Figure 10-3 Architecture of MODBUS RTU MODBUS RTU is a master slave system. All master requests, except
broadcast requests, will lead to a response from an individual slave. The
slave will respond (i.e. start transmitting the response) within the quoted
Parameter maximum slave response time (this time is quoted in the data sheet for
Database all drive products). The minimum slave response time is also quoted but
will never be less than the minimum silent period defined by 3.5
character times.
If the master request was a broadcast request then the master may
transmit a new request once the maximum slave response time has
expired.
X.Y CMP
The master must implement a message time out to handle transmission
errors. This time out period must be set to the maximum slave response
MODBUS RTU time + transmission time for the response.
Figure 10-5 MODBUS RTU timing
RTU framing Minimum silence Minimum silence
period period
UART Master request Frame detect

Slave frame
Slave response Master request
processing
Physical layer Slave response time

New master
request can
start here
Time
10.3 Slave address

10.2 MODBUS RTU The first byte of the frame is the slave node address. Valid slave node
addresses are 1 through 247 decimal. In the master request this byte
Physical layer indicates the target slave node; in the slave response this byte indicates
Attribute Description the address of the slave sending the response.
Normal physical layer for Global addressing
RS-485 2-wire Address zero addresses all slave nodes on the network. Slave nodes
multi-drop operation
Standard UART asynchronous symbols suppress the response messages for broadcast requests.
Bit stream
with Non Return to Zero (NRZ)
Each symbol consists of:-
10.4 MODBUS registers
1 start bit The MODBUS register address range is 16-bit (65536 registers) which
Symbol 8 data bits (transmitted least significant bit at the protocol level is represented by indexes 0 through 65535.
first) PLC registers
2 stop bits Modicon PLCs typically define 4 register 'files' each containing 65536
300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, registers. Traditionally, the registers are referenced 1 through 65536
Baudrates
38400, 57600, 76800, 115200 rather than 0 through 65535. The register address is therefore
decremented on the master device before passing to the protocol.
RTU framing
File type Description
The frame has the following basic format:
1 Read only bits
Figure 10-4 MODBUS RTU format
2 Read / write bits
SLAVE Silent 3 Read only 16-bit register
Function code and data bytes 16bit CRC
ADDRESS interval 4 Read / write 16-bit register
The register file type code is NOT transmitted by MODBUS and all
MODBUS PDU register files can be considered to map onto a single register address
space. All parameters in the drive are holding registers.

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
MODBUS PLC Register address Slave response

Parameter Comments
register (protocol level) Byte Value Description
Pr 00.000 0 0x01 Slave destination node address
Pr X.Y 40000 + X x 100 + Y X x 100 + Y - 1 cannot be 1 0x03 Function code 0x03
accessed
Length of data (bytes) = 1 x 32-bit register =
Examples: 2 0x04
4 bytes
Pr 01.002 40102 101 3 0x00 Pr 00.001 data
Pr 01.000 40100 99 4 0x00
Pr 00.001 40001 0 5 0x0F
#Pr 20.000 42000 1999 6 0xF4
Parameter mapping 7 0xFE CRC LSB
The drive is parameterized using the mm.ppp notation. Indexes 'mm' 8 0x44 CRC MSB
and 'ppp' are in the range 0 through 99. Parameters are mapped into the
MODBUS register space in standard addressing mode as: Reads when actual parameter type is different from selected
The slave will send the least significant word of a 32-bit parameter if that
Protocol register = (mm x 100) + ppp - 1
parameter is read as part of a 16-bit access.
To correctly map the parameters at the application layer, the slave The slave will sign extend the least significant word if a 16-bit parameter
device increments the received register address. The consequence of is accessed as a 32-bit parameter. The number of 16-bit registers must
this behavior is that Pr 00.000 cannot be accessed. be even during a 32-bit access.
Data types Writes when actual parameter type is different from
The MODBUS protocol specification defines registers as 16-bit signed selected
integers. Each drive parameter is internally mapped to a single 16-bit The slave will allow writing a 32-bit value to a 16-bit parameter as long
MODBUS register, all MODBUS function codes access 16-bit registers as the 32-bit value is within the normal range of the 16-bit parameter.
only so to access a 32-bit parameter, two contiguous MODBUS registers The slave will allow a 16-bit write to a 32-bit parameter. The slave will
must be specified in the request and the 32-bit data access scheme sign extend the written value, therefore, the effective range of this type of
must be used. write will be ±32767.
32-bit data access
Standard MODBUS registers are 16 bits in size and reference a single 10.5 Data encoding
drive parameter. To access a 32-bit data value the multiple read/write
MODBUS RTU uses a 'big-endian' representation for addresses and
services must be used to transfer a contiguous array of 16-bit registers. data items (except the CRC, which is 'little-endian'). This means that
Selection between either 16-bit or 32-bit access is specified using bit 14
when a numerical quantity larger than a single byte is transmitted, the
of the register address. Note: Bit 15 of the register address is reserved
MOST significant byte is sent first. So for example:
for future use.
16-bits 0x1234 would be 0 x12 0 x34
bit 15 bit 14 bits 13 to 0
32-bits 0x12345678 would be 0 x12 0 x34 0 x56 0 x78
There is no facility to encode a decimal point, therefore values must be
Register address written and read raw (e.g. a value of 2.000 is written or read as 2000).
bit 14 Data type

10.6 Function codes
0
1
16-bit
32-bit
The function code determines the context and format of the message
data. Bit 7 of the function code is used in the slave response to indicate
If 32-bit data type is selected then this effectively adds 16384 (0x4000) an exception.
to the start register address. The following function codes are supported:
e.g. For drive parameter Pr 01.021 in standard addressing mode, the
start register value is 16384 + 120 = 16504 (0x4078) Code Description
If a 32-bit data type is selected then the drive uses two consecutive 16- 03 Read multiple 16-bit registers
bit MODBUS registers (in 'big endian'). The master must also set the 06 Write single register
correct 'number of 16-bit registers' in the request. 16 Write multiple 16-bit registers
Example: read Pr 00.001 (Pr 06.010) as a 32-bit parameter, using FC03 23 Read and write multiple 16-bit registers
from node 1:
FC03 Read multiple registers
Master request Read a contiguous array of registers. The drive imposes an upper limit
on the number of registers (16 in the case of the drive), which can be
Byte Value Description
read. If this is exceeded the drive will issue an exception code 2.
0 0x01 Slave destination node address
The normal response includes the function code, number of data bytes
1 0x03 Function code 0x03 in the read block followed by the register data (unless an exception
2 0x40 Start register Pr 00.001 occurs).
3 0x00 (16384 + (100 x 0) + 1 – 1) = 16384 = 0x4000 If 32-bit parameter addressing is used, then for each parameter read:
4 0x00 Number of 16-bit registers to read • Two 16-bit registers must be used in the request
5 0x02 Pr 00.001 is 1 x 32-bit register = 2 x 16-bit registers • The register data in the response will contain 4 bytes of data
6 0xD1 CRC LSB
7 0xCB CRC MSB

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Master request Master request

Byte Description Byte Description
0 Slave destination node address (1 – 247, 0 is global) 0 Slave destination node address (1 – 247, 0 is global)
1 Function code 0x03 1 Function code 0x06
2 Start register address MSB 2 Start register address MSB
3 Start register address LSB 3 Start register address LSB
4 Number of 16-bit registers to read MSB 4 Register data MSB
5 Number of 16-bit registers to read LSB 5 Register data LSB
6 CRC LSB 6 CRC LSB
7 CRC MSB 7 CRC MSB
Slave response
Slave response
Byte Description
Byte Description
0 Slave destination node address
0 Slave destination node address 1 Function code 0x06
1 Function code 0x03 2 Start register address MSB
2 Length of data in read block (bytes) 3 Start register address LSB
3 Register data 0 MSB 4 Register data MSB
4 Register data 0 LSB 5 Register data LSB
3+byte count CRC LSB 6 CRC LSB
4+byte count CRC MSB 7 CRC MSB
Example Example
Read Pr 00.002 to Pr 00.005 with 16-bit data access Write the value 0x0001 to Pr 00.007 (Pr 29.012)
Master request Master request
Byte Value Description Byte Value Description
0 0x01 Slave destination node address 0 0x01 Slave destination node address
1 0x03 Function code 0x03 1 0x06 Function code 0x06
2 0x00 Start register Pr 00.002 2 0x00 Start register Pr 00.007
3 0x01 (100 x 0) + 2 – 1 = 1 = 0x0001 (100 x 0) + 7 – 1) = 6 = 0x0006
3 0x06
4 0x00 4 0x00 Register data MSB
Number of 16-bit registers to read = 4
5 0x04 5 0x01 Register data LSB
6 0x15 CRC LSB 6 0xA8 CRC LSB
7 0xC9 CRC MSB 7 0x0B CRC MSB
Slave response Slave response
Byte Value Description Byte Value Description
0 0x01 Slave destination node address 0 0x01 Slave destination node address
1 0x03 Function code 0x03 1 0x06 Function code 0x06
Length of data (bytes) = 4 x 16-bit 2 0x06 Start register MSB
2 0x08
registers = 8 bytes
3 0x13 Start register LSB
3-4 0x00 0x00 Pr 00.002 data
4 0x00 Register data MSB
5-6 0x00 0x00 Pr 00.003 data
5 0x01 Register data LSB
7-8 0x00 0x08 Pr 00.004 data
6 0xA8 CRC LSB
9-10 0x00 0x00 Pr 00.005 data
7 0x0B CRC MSB
11 0x14 CRC LSB
12 0x15 CRC MSB FC16 - Write multiple registers
This function code allows a contiguous series of registers to be written.
FC06 Write single register The drive imposes an upper limit on the number of registers to be written
Writes a single 16-bit value to a register. The normal response is an
(16 in the case of the drive), and if this is exceeded the drive will issue an
echo of the request (unless an exception occurs) returned after the exception response code 2.
parameter has been written.
The normal response includes the function code, start register address
The register address can correspond to a 32-bit parameter, but only the
and number of 16-bit registers written (unless an exception occurs),
lower 16-bits of the value will be written. returned after the parameters have been written.
If 32-bit parameter addressing is used, then for each parameter written:
• Two 16-bit registers must be used in the request
• Four bytes must be specified in the request
• The number of registers written in the response will be twice the
number of parameters written

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Master request FC23 - Read/Write multiple registers

This function code allows a contiguous series of registers to be written
Byte Description and another contiguous series of registers to be read. The drive imposes
0 Slave destination node address (1 – 247, 0 is global) an upper limit on the number of registers to be written (16 in the case of
1 Function code 0x10 the drive), and if this is exceeded the drive will issue an exception
response code 2.
2 Start register address MSB
The normal response includes the function code, number of data bytes
3 Start register address LSB
in the read block followed by the register data (unless an exception
4 Number of 16-bit registers to write MSB
occurs).
5 Number of 16-bit registers to write LSB
If 32-bit parameter addressing is used:
6 Length of register data to write (bytes)
• For each parameter read or written, two 16-bit registers must be
7 Register data 0 MSB
used in the request
8 Register data 0 LSB • For each parameter written, four bytes must be specified in the
7+byte count CRC LSB request
8+byte count CRC MSB • For each parameter read, four bytes of data will be used in the
response
Slave response It should be noted that the FC23 request is effectively an FC03 (read
Byte Description multiple) request followed by an FC16 (write multiple) request. The write
is performed first and continues until any of the errors given for FC16
occur. Some parameters may have been written when an error is
1 Function code 0x10 detected, but no indication is given about how many parameters have
2 Start register address MSB been written successfully. The read is always performed even if an error
3 Start register address LSB is detected during writing. Any of the errors given for FC03 can occur
4 Number of 16-bit registers written MSB and the exception response is the same as for FC03.
5 Number of 16-bit registers written LSB Master request
6 CRC LSB Byte Description
7 CRC MSB 0 Slave destination node address (1 – 247, 0 is global)
Example 1 Function code 0x17
Write the value 1000 to Pr 00.035 and 750 to Pr 00.036 with 16-bit data 2 Start register address to read MSB
access 3 Start register address to read LSB
4 Number of 16-bit registers to read MSB
Master request
5 Number of 16-bit registers to read LSB
6 Start register address to write MSB
7 Start register address o write LSB
1 0x10 Function code 0x10
8 Number of 16-bit registers to write MSB
2 0x00 Start register Pr 00.035
9 Number of 16-bit registers to write LSB
3 0x22 (100 x 0) + 35 – 1) = 34 = 0x0022
10 Length of register data to write (bytes)
4 0x00 Number of 16-bit registers MSB
5 0x02 Number of 16-bit registers LSB
12 Register data 0 LSB
6 0x04 Length of register data to write (bytes)
11+byte count CRC LSB
7-8 0x03 0xE8 Register data 0
12+byte count CRC MSB
9-10 0x02 0xEE Register data 1
11 0x71 CRC LSB Slave response
12 0x32 CRC MSB Byte Description
Slave response
1 Function code 0x10
2 Length of register data in read block (bytes)
4 Register data 0 LSB
2 0x00 Start register address MSB
3+byte count CRC LSB
3 0x22 Start register address LSB
4+byte count CRC MSB
4 0x00 Number of 16-bit registers written MSB
5 0x02 Number of 16-bit registers written LSB Example
6 0xE1 CRC LSB Write the value 200 to Pr 00.069 and read Pr 00.002 with 16-bit data
7 0xC2 CRC MSB access.

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Master request
3 0x01 (100 x 0) + 2 – 1 = 0x0001
4 0x00 Number of 16-bit registers MSB
5 0x01 Number of 16-bit registers LSB
7 0x44 (100 x 0) + 69 – 1 = 68 = 0x0044
8 0x00 Number of 16-bit registers to write MSB
9 0x01 Number of 16-bit registers to write LSB
10 0x02 Length of register data to write (bytes)
11-12 0x00 0xC8 Register data 0
13 0x0B CRC LSB
14 0xB9 CRC MSB
Slave response
2 0x02 Length of register data in read block (bytes)
3-4 0x00 0x00 Register data 0
5 0xBD CRC MSB
6 0xB4 CRC MSB
10.7 Exceptions
The slave will respond with an exception response if an error is detected
in the master request. If a message is corrupted and the frame is not
received or the CRC fails then the slave will not issue an exception. In
this case, the master device will time out. If a write multiple (FC16 or
FC23) request exceeds the slave maximum buffer size then the slave
will discard the message. No exception will be transmitted in this case
and the master will time out.
Exception message format
The slave exception message has the following format:
Byte Description
0 Slave source node address
Original function code with bit7 set (e.g. FC 0x03 will be
1
returned as 0x83)
2 Exception code
3 CRC LSB
4 CRC MSB
Exception codes
The following exception codes are supported:
Byte Description
1 Function code not supported
Register address out of range, or request to read too many
2
registers
10.8 CRC
The CRC is a 16-bit cyclic redundancy check using the standard CRC-
16 polynomial x16 + x15 + x2 + 1. The 16-bit CRC is appended to the
message and transmitted LSB first.
The CRC is calculated on ALL the bytes in the frame.

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
11 Technical data
11.1 Drive technical data
11.1.1 Power and current ratings
Table 11-1 Compressor / Drive cross reference and ratings
Output Output current

Supply voltage Frequency
Compressor model Drive model Frame size power 40 °C 60 °C
V Hz kW A A
ZPV0631E-5E9 EVC1150B-J1-*14 6 200-240 15 58 58
ZPV0631E-4E9 EVC1185B-K1-*14 6 380-480 18.5 38 38
ZPV0631E-4E9 EVC1150B-K1-*14 5 380-480 15 31 26
ZPV0631E-4E9 EVC1150B-L1-*14 6 500-575 15 27 27
ZPV0662E-5E9 EVC1150B-J1-*24 6 200-240 15 58 58
ZPV0662E-4E9 EVC1150B-K2-*24 5 380-480 15 31 26
50/60
ZPV0662E-7E9 EVC1150B-K1-*24 5 380-480 15 31 26
ZPV0662E-7E9 EVC1150B-L1-*24 6 500-575 15 27 27
ZPV0962E-5E9 EVC1185B-J1-*24 7 200-240 18.5 75 75
ZPV0962E-4E9 EVC1185B-K2-*24 6 380-480 18.5 48 46
ZPV0962E-7E9 EVC1185B-K1-*24 6 380-480 18.5 38 38
ZPV0962E-7E9 EVC1185B-L1-*24 6 500-575 18.5 43 34
Where * = 1 or 8 denoting OEM or Aftermarket drives respectively.
Table 11-2 Rating @ 40 °C (104 °F) ambient
Maximum Continuous Output current at
Nominal 40 °C (A)
Compressor
Drive model rating
model Switching Frequency (kHz)
(kW)
3 4 6
ZPV0631E-5E9 EVC1150B-J1-*14 15 58 58 58
ZPV0631E-4E9 EVC1185B-K1-*14 18.5 38 38 38
ZPV0631E-4E9 EVC1150B-K1-*14 15 31 31 31
ZPV0631E-4E9 EVC1150B-L1-*14 15 27 27 27
ZPV0662E-5E9 EVC1150B-J1-*24 15 58 58 58
ZPV0662E-4E9 EVC1150B-K2-*24 15 31 31 31
ZPV0662E-7E9 EVC1150B-K1-*24 15 31 31 31
ZPV0662E-7E9 EVC1150B-L1-*24 15 27 27 27
ZPV0962E-5E9 EVC1185B-J1-*24 18.5 75 75 75
ZPV0962E-4E9 EVC1185B-K2-*24 18.5 48 48 48
ZPV0962E-7E9 EVC1185B-K1-*24 18.5 38 38 38
ZPV0962E-7E9 EVC1185B-L1-*24 18.5 43 40 31
Table 11-3 Rating @ 40 °C (104 °F) ambient with high IP insert installed
Nominal Maximum Continuous Output current at 40 °C (A)

Compressor
Drive model rating Switching Frequency (kHz)
model
(kW) 3 4 6
ZPV0631E-4E9 EVC1150B-K1-*14 15 19.5 18.9 17.7
ZPV0662E-7E9 EVC1150B-K1-*24 15 19.5 18.9 17.7

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Table 11-4 Rating @ 50 °C (122 °F) ambient
Maximum Continuous Output

Nominal current at 50 °C (A)
Compressor
Drive model rating
model Switching Frequency (kHz)
(kW)
3 4 6
ZPV0631E-5E9 EVC1150B-J1-*14 15 58 58 56
ZPV0631E-4E9 EVC1185B-K1-*14 18.5 38 38 38
ZPV0631E-4E9 EVC1150B-K1-*14 15 26 26 24
ZPV0631E-4E9 EVC1150B-L1-*14 15 27 27 27
ZPV0662E-5E9 EVC1150B-J1-*24 15 58 58 56
ZPV0662E-4E9 EVC1150B-K2-*24 15 31 31 31
ZPV0662E-7E9 EVC1150B-K1-*24 15 26 26 24
ZPV0662E-7E9 EVC1150B-L1-*24 15 27 27 27
ZPV0962E-5E9 EVC1185B-J1-*24 18.5 75 75 75
ZPV0962E-4E9 EVC1185B-K2-*24 18.5 48 48 43
ZPV0962E-7E9 EVC1185B-K1-*24 18.5 38 38 38
ZPV0962E-7E9 EVC1185B-L1-*24 18.5 43 36 28
Table 11-5 Drive ratings - Open Type/Type 1 (when used with Type 1 kit)
Output
40°C 50°C 55°C 60°C
Model number Volts Freq Max. Max. Max. Max.
Power Power Power Power
Current Current Current Current
Vac Hz A kW A kW A kW A kW
EVC1150B-J1-*xx 0 – 240 0 – 550 58 15 58 15 58 15 58 15
EVC1150B-K2-*xx 0 – 380 0 – 550 31 18.5 26 18.5 26 18.5 26 18.5
EVC1150B-K1-*xx 0 – 460 0 – 550 31 15 26 15 26 15 26 15
EVC1150B-L1-*xx 0 - 575 0 – 550 27 15 27 15 27 15 27 15
EVC1185B-J1-*xx 0 – 240 0 – 550 75 15 75 15 75 15 75 15
EVC1185B-K2-*xx 0 – 380 0 – 550 48 18.5 48 18.5 48 18.5 46 18.5
EVC1185B-K1-*xx 0 – 460 0 – 550 38 18.5 38 18.5 38 18.5 38 18.5
EVC1185B-L1-*xx 0 - 575 0 - 550 43 18.5 43 18.5 43 18.5 43 18.5
Table 11-6 Type 12 with the rubber bung (high IP insert) fitted, where applicable
Output
40°C 50°C 55°C 60°C
Model number Volts Freq Max. Max. Max. Max.
Power Power Power Power
Current Current Current Current
Vac Hz A kW A kW A kW A kW
EVC1150B-J1-*xx 0 – 240 0 - 550 58 15 58 15 58 15 58 15
EVC1150B-K2-*xx 0 – 380 0 - 550 12 5.4 12 5.4 12 5.4 12 5.4
EVC1150B-K1-*xx 0 – 460 0 - 550 12 5.4 12 5.4 12 5.4 12 5.4
EVC1150B-L1-*xx 0 - 575 0 - 550 27 15 27 15 27 15 27 15
EVC1185B-J1-*xx 0 – 240 0 - 550 75 18.5 75 18.5 75 18.5 75 18.5
EVC1185B-K2-*xx 0 – 380 0 - 550 48 18.5 48 18.5 48 18.5 46 18.5
EVC1185B-K1-*xx 0 – 460 0 - 550 38 18.5 38 18.5 38 18.5 38 18.5
EVC1185B-L1-*xx 0 - 575 0 – 550 42 18.5 36 18.5 28 18.5 28 18.5

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
11.1.2 Power dissipation

Table 11-7 Drive power dissipation at 40 °C (104 °F)
Power dissipation at 40 °C (W)
Nominal
Compressor
Drive model rating Switching frequency (kHz)
model
(kW)
3 4 6
ZPV0631E-5E9 EVC1150B-J1-*14 15 463 484 528
ZPV0631E-4E9 EVC1185B-K1-*14 18.5 656 659 650
ZPV0631E-4E9 EVC1150B-K1-*14 15 332 367 434
ZPV0631E-4E9 EVC1150B-L1-*14 15 448 505 596
ZPV0662E-5E9 EVC1150B-J1-*24 15 463 484 528
ZPV0662E-4E9 EVC1150B-K2-*24 15 417 456 532
ZPV0662E-7E9 EVC1150B-K1-*24 15 332 367 434
ZPV0662E-7E9 EVC1150B-L1-*24 15 448 505 596
ZPV0962E-5E9 EVC1185B-J1-*24 18.5 718 751 815
ZPV0962E-4E9 EVC1185B-K2-*24 18.5 656 659 650
ZPV0962E-7E9 EVC1185B-K1-*24 18.5 656 659 650
ZPV0962E-7E9 EVC1185B-L1-*24 18.5 798 836 813
Table 11-8 Drive power dissipation at 40 °C (W) with High-IP insert fitted
Nominal Power dissipation at 40 °C (W) with High-IP insert fitted

Compressor
model
(kW) 3 4 6
ZPV0631E-4E9 EVC1150B-K1-*14 15 218 240 284
ZPV0662E-7E9 EVC1150B-K1-*24 15 218 240 284
Table 11-9 Drive power dissipation at 50 °C (W)

Power dissipation at 50 °C (W)
Nominal
Compressor
model
(kW)
3 4 6
ZPV0631E-5E9 EVC1150B-J1-*14 15 463 484 509
ZPV0631E-4E9 EVC1185B-K1-*14 18.5 613 600 593
ZPV0631E-4E9 EVC1150B-K1-*14 15 280 316 366
ZPV0631E-4E9 EVC1150B-L1-*14 15 445 490 592
ZPV0662E-5E9 EVC1150B-J1-*24 15 463 484 509
ZPV0662E-4E9 EVC1150B-K2-*24 15 417 456 536
ZPV0662E-7E9 EVC1150B-K1-*24 15 280 316 366
ZPV0662E-7E9 EVC1150B-L1-*24 15 445 490 592
ZPV0962E-5E9 EVC1185B-J1-*24 18.5 718 751 799
ZPV0962E-4E9 EVC1185B-K2-*24 18.5 613 600 593
ZPV0962E-7E9 EVC1185B-K1-*24 18.5 613 600 593
ZPV0962E-7E9 EVC1185B-L1-*24 18.5 774 758 734

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Table 11-10 Power losses from the front of the drive when through-panel mounted
Drive model number Frame size Power loss (W)

EVC1150B-J1-*14 6 ≤100
EVC1185B-K1-*14 6 ≤100
EVC1150B-K1-*14 5 ≤100
EVC1150B-L1-*14 6 ≤100
EVC1150B-J1-*24 6 ≤100
EVC1150B-K2-*24 5 ≤100
EVC1150B-K1-*24 5 ≤100
EVC1150B-L1-*24 6 ≤100
EVC1185B-J1-*24 7 ≤204
EVC1185B-K2-*24 6 ≤100
EVC1185B-K1-*24 6 ≤100
EVC1185B-L1-*24 6 ≤100
11.1.3 Supply requirements

AC supply voltage:
200 V drive: 200 V to 240 V ±10 %
400 V drive: 380 V to 480 V ±10 %
575 V drive: 500 V to 575 V ±10 %
Number of phases: 3
Maximum supply imbalance: 2 % negative phase sequence (equivalent to 3 % voltage imbalance between phases).
Frequency range: 45 to 66 Hz
For UL compliance only, the maximum supply symmetrical fault current must be limited to 100 kA
11.1.4 Use of line reactors

If the supply has poor phase balance or is subject to severe disturbances on the supply network, then input line reactors may be fitted in order to
reduce the risk of damage to the drive.
Reactance values of approximately 2 % allows the drive to used with a supply unbalance of up to 3.5 % negative phase sequence (equivalent to 5 %
voltage imbalance between phases). Higher values may be used, but this may result in a loss of drive output (reduced torque at high speed) because
of the voltage drop across the line reactor.
Line reactors also help to mitigate the effects of the following types of disturbance:
• Power factor correction equipment connected close to the drive.
• Large DC drives having no or inadequate line reactors connected to the supply.
• Across the line (DOL) started motor(s) connected to the supply such that when any of these motors are started, the voltage dip exceeds 20 %.
These disturbances may cause excessive peak currents to flow in the input power circuit of the drive. This may cause nuisance tripping, or in extreme
cases, failure of the drive. Drives of low power rating may also be susceptible to disturbance when connected to supplies with a high rated capacity.
In cases where harmonic currents cause interference, remedial measures such as harmonic filters may be used, installed at the common supply
point. Harmonic currents from drives add approximately arithmetically.
Table 11-11 2 % Line reactors

Series number model number
(V) (µH) (A)
ZPV0631E-5E9 EVC1150B-J1-*14 200-240 150 56.6 INL2005

ZPV0631E-4E9 EVC1185B-K1-*14 380-480 240 60.6 INL4008
ZPV0631E-4E9 EVC1150B-K1-*14 380-480 480 32.0 INL4013
ZPV0631E-4E9 EVC1150B-L1-*14 500-575 720 29.4 INL5004
ZPV0662E-5E9 EVC1150B-J1-*24 200-240 150 56.6 INL2005
ZPV0662E-4E9 EVC1150B-K2-*24 380-480 400 36.5 INL4006
TBC**
ZPV0662E-7E9 EVC1150B-K1-*24 380-480 400 36.5 INL4006
ZPV0662E-7E9 EVC1150B-L1-*24 500-575 720 29.4 INL5004
ZPV0962E-5E9 EVC1185B-J1-*24 200-240 100 88.0 INL2010
ZPV0962E-4E9 EVC1185B-K2-*24 380-480 240 60.6 INL4008
ZPV0962E-7E9 EVC1185B-K1-*24 380-480 240 60.6 INL4008
ZPV0962E-7E9 EVC1185B-L1-*24 500-575 480 47.0 INL5006

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Compliance with EN/ IEC 61000-3-12

The standard EN/ IEC 61000-3-12 places limits on harmonic current emissions. Drives that need to comply with this standard need to be fitted with
line reactors as shown in
Table 11-12 Line reactors for compliance with EN 61000-3-12
series number model number
(V) (µH) (A)
NOTE 11.1.9 IP / UL Rating

The 575 V drives have been excluded from this table as 575 V mains are The drive is rated to IP20 pollution degree 2 (dry, non-conductive
not typically found where EN 61000-3-12 is applicable. contamination only) (NEMA 1). However, it is possible to configure the
drive to achieve IP65 rating (NEMA 12) at the rear of the heatsink for
11.1.5 Motor requirements through-panel mounting (some current derating is required).
No. of phases: 3
In order to achieve the high IP rating at the rear of the heatsink with the
Maximum voltage: drive size 5, it is necessary to seal a heatsink vent by installing the high
200 V drive: 240 V
IP insert.
400 V drive: 480 V
575 V drive: 575 V The IP rating of a product is a measure of protection against ingress and
contact to foreign bodies and water. It is stated as IP XX, where the two
11.1.6 Temperature, humidity and cooling method digits (XX) indicate the degree of protection provided as shown in Table
Ambient temperature operating range: 11-13.
- 20 °C to 50 °C (- 4 °F to 122 °F).
Output current derating must be applied at ambient temperatures Table 11-13 IP Rating degrees of protection
>40 °C (104 °F). First digit Second digit
Cooling method: Forced convection Protection against contact and Protection against ingress of water
ingress of foreign bodies
Maximum humidity: 95 % non-condensing at 40 °C (104 °F)
0 No protection 0 No protection
11.1.7 Storage Protection against large
-40 °C (-40 °F) to +50 °C (122 °F) for long term storage, or to +70 °C foreign bodies  > 50 mm Protection against vertically
(158 °F) for short term storage. 1 1
(large area contact with the falling drops of water
Storage time is 2 years. hand)
Electrolytic capacitors in any electronic product have a storage period Protection against medium
Protection against spraywater
after which they require reforming or replacing. 2 size foreign bodies  > 12 mm 2
(up to 15 ° from the vertical)
The DC bus capacitors have a storage period of 10 years. (finger)
Protection against small
The low voltage capacitors on the control supplies typically have a Protection against spraywater
3 foreign bodies  > 2.5 mm 3
storage period of 2 years and are thus the limiting factor. (up to 60  from the vertical)
(tools, wires)
Low voltage capacitors cannot be reformed due to their location in the
Protection against granular
circuit and thus may require replacing if the drive is stored for a period of Protection against splashwater
4 foreign bodies  > 1mm (tools, 4
2 years or greater without power being applied. (from all directions)
wires)
It is therefore recommended that drives are powered up for a minimum Protection against dust Protection against heavy
of 1 hour after every 2 years of storage. 5 deposit, complete protection 5 splash water (from all
This process allows the drive to be stored for a further 2 years. against accidental contact. directions, at high pressure)
11.1.8 Altitude Protection against dust
Protection against deckwater
Altitude range: 0 to 3,000 m (9,900 ft), subject to the following 6 ingress, complete protection 6
(e.g. in heavy seas)
conditions: against accidental contact.
7 7 Protection against immersion
1,000 m to 3,000 m (3,300 ft to 9,900 ft) above sea level: de-rate the
maximum output current from the specified figure by 1% per 100 m 8 8 Protection against submersion
(330 ft) above 1,000 m (3,300 ft)
For example at 3,000 m (9,900 ft) the output current of the drive would
have to be de-rated by 20 %.

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Table 11-14 UL enclosure ratings 11.1.16 Accuracy and resolution

UL rating Description Speed:
The absolute frequency and speed accuracy depends on the accuracy
Enclosures are intended for indoor use, primarily
of the crystal used with the drive microprocessor. The accuracy of the
Type 1 to provide a degree of protection against limited
crystal is 100 ppm, and so the absolute frequency/speed accuracy is
amounts of falling dirt.
100 ppm (0.01 %) of the reference, when a preset speed is used. If an
Enclosures are intended for indoor use, primarily analog input is used the absolute accuracy is further limited by the
Type 12 to provide a degree of protection against dust, absolute accuracy of the analog input.
falling dirt and dripping non-corrosive liquids.
The following data applies to the drive only; it does not include the
11.1.10 Corrosive gasses performance of the source of the control signals.
Concentrations of corrosive gases must not exceed the levels given in:
• Table A2 of EN 50178:1998 Closed loop resolution
• Class 3C2 of IEC 60721-3-3 Preset speed reference: 0.1 rpm
This corresponds to the levels typical of urban areas with industrial Precision speed reference: 0.001 rpm
activities and/or heavy traffic, but not in the immediate neighborhood of Analog input 1: 11 bit plus sign
industrial sources with chemical emissions. Analog input 2: 11 bit plus sign
11.1.11 RoHS compliance Current:
The drive meets EU directive 2002-95-EC for RoHS compliance. The resolution of the current feedback is 10 bit plus sign.
11.1.12 Vibration Accuracy: typical 2 %

Maximum recommended continuous vibration level 0.14 g r.m.s. broad- worst case 5 %
band 5 to 200 Hz. 11.1.17 Acoustic noise
NOTE The heatsink fan generates the majority of the sound pressure level at 1 m
This is the limit for broad-band (random) vibration. Narrow-band produced by the drive. The heatsink fan is a variable speed fan. The drive
vibration at this level which coincides with a structural resonance could controls the speed at which the fan runs based on the temperature of the
result in premature failure. heatsink and the drive's thermal model system.
Bump Test Table 11-15 gives the sound pressure level at 1 m produced by the drive
Testing in each of three mutually perpendicular axes in turn. for the heatsink fan running at the maximum and minimum speeds.
Referenced standard:IEC 60068-2-29: Test Eb: Table 11-15 Acoustic noise data
Severity: 18 g, 6 ms, half sine
Max speed Min fan speed
No. of Bumps: 600 (100 in each direction of each axis) Frame size
dBA dBA
Random Vibration Test
5 61.1 41.9
Testing in each of three mutually perpendicular axes in turn.
Referenced standard:IEC 60068-2-64: Test Fh: 6 65.3 48.2
Severity: 1.0 m²/s³ (0.01 g²/Hz) ASD from 5 to 20 Hz 7 65 52
-3 dB/octave from 20 to 200 Hz
Duration: 30 minutes in each of 3 mutually perpendicular axes.
11.1.18 Overall dimensions
Sinusoidal Vibration Test H Height including surface mounting brackets
Testing in each of three mutually perpendicular axes in turn. W Width
Referenced standard: IEC 60068-2-6: Test Fc: D Projection forward of panel when surface mounted
Frequency range: 5 to 500 Hz F Projection forward of panel when through-panel mounted
Severity: 3.5 mm peak displacement from 5 to 9 Hz R Projection rear of panel when through-panel mounted
10 m/s² peak acceleration from 9 to 200 Hz
15 m/s² peak acceleration from 200 to 500 Hz Table 11-16 Overall drive dimensions
Sweep rate: 1 octave/minute Frame Dimension
Duration: 15 minutes in each of 3 mutually perpendicular axes. size H W D F R
EN 61800-5-1:2007, Section 5.2.6.4. referring to IEC 60068-2-6 143 mm 202 mm 135 mm 67 mm
5
Frequency range: 10 to 150 Hz 391 mm (5.63 in) (7.95 in) (5.32 in) (2.64 in)
Amplitude: 10 to 57 Hz at 0.075 mm pk (15.39 in) 210 mm 227 mm 131 mm 96 mm
6
57 to 150 Hz at 1g p (8.27 in) (8.94 in) (5.16 in) (3.78 in)
Sweep rate: 1 octave/minute 557 mm 270 mm 279 mm 187 mm 92 mm
7
Duration: 10 sweep cycles per axis in each of 3 mutually (21.93 in) (10.63 in) (10.98 in) (7.36 in) (3.62 in)
perpendicular axes
11.1.13 Starts per hour 11.1.19 Shipping dimensions
By electronic control: unlimited Table 11-17 Shipping carton dimensions
By interrupting the AC supply: 20 (equally spaced)
Dimension
Frame size
11.1.14 Start up time H W D
This is the time taken from the moment of applying power to the drive, to 279.4 mm 228.6 mm 482.6 mm
the drive being ready to run the motor: 5
(11.0 in) (9.0 in) (19.0 in)
Sizes 5 and 6: 304.8 mm 330.2 mm 508 mm
6
11.1.15 Output frequency / speed range (12.0 in) (13.0 in) (20.0 in)
The maximum output frequency is limited to 550 Hz. 355.6 mm 304.8 mm 635 mm
7
(14.0 in) (12.0 in) (25.0 in)

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
11.1.20 Weights
Table 11-18 Overall drive weights
Frame
Model kg lb
size
5 7.4 16.30
6 All variants 14 30.90
7 28 61.70
11.1.21 Safe Torque Off data

Data as verified by TÜV Rheinland:
According to EN ISO 13849-1:
PL = e
Category = 4
MTTFD = High
DCav = High
Mission Time and Proof Test Interval = 20 years
The calculated MTTFD for the complete STO function is:

STO1 2574 yr
According to EN 61800-5-2:
SIL = 3
PFH = 4.21 x 10-11 h-1
Logic levels comply with IEC 61131-2:2007 for type 1 digital inputs rated at 24 V. Maximum level for logic low to achieve SIL3 and PL e 5 V and 0.5
mA.
11.1.22 Input current, fuse and cable size ratings

The input current is affected by the supply voltage and impedance.
Typical input current
The values of typical input current are given to aid calculations for power flow and power loss.
The values of typical input current are stated for a balanced supply.
Maximum continuous input current
The values of maximum continuous input current are given to aid the selection of cables and fuses. These values are stated for the worst case
condition with the unusual combination of stiff supply with bad balance. The value stated for the maximum continuous input current would only be
seen in one of the input phases. The current in the other two phases would be significantly lower.
The values of maximum input current are stated for a supply with a 2 % negative phase-sequence imbalance and rated at the maximum supply fault
current given in Table 11-19.
Table 11-19 Supply fault current used to calculate maximum input currents
Model Symmetrical fault level (kA)
All 100
Fuses
The AC supply to the drive must be installed with suitable protection against overload and short-circuits. Table 11-20, Table 11-21, and
Table 11-22 show the recommended fuse ratings. Failure to observe this requirement will cause risk of fire.
WARNING
Table 11-20 Compressor ZPV0631E drive fuse ratings

Fuse rating
Maximum Maximum
Typical input
Model current
Class Class
A A A A A A A
EVC1150B-J1-*14 49 56 85 63 63 60 60
EVC1185B-K1-*14 32 36 67 63 63 40 60 CC, J or
gG
EVC1150B-K1-*14 27 30 58 40 40 35 35 T**
EVC1150B-L1-*14 26 29 50 50 63 35 50

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics

Fuse rating
Maximum Maximum
Typical input
Model current
Class Class
A A A A A A A
EVC1150B-J1-*24 49 56 85 63 63 60 60
EVC1150B-K2-*24 27 30 58 40 40 35 35 CC, J or
gG
EVC1150B-K1-*24 27 30 58 40 40 35 35 T**
EVC1150B-L1-*24 26 29 50 50 63 35 35
Fuse rating
Maximum Maximum
Typical input
Model current
Class Class
A A A A A A A
EVC1185B-J1-*24 73 84 135 100 100 100 100
EVC1185B-K2-*24 54 60 90 63 63 60 60 CC, J or
gG
EVC1185B-K1-*24 54 60 90 63 63 60 60 T**
EVC1185B-L1-*24 41 47 76 63 63 50 50
NOTE
Ensure cables used suit local wiring regulations.
The nominal cable sizes below are only a guide. The mounting and grouping of cables affects their current-carrying capacity, in some cases
smaller cables may be acceptable but in other cases a larger cable is required to avoid excessive temperature or voltage drop. Refer to
local wiring regulations for the correct size of cables.
CAUTION
Table 11-23 Compressor ZPV0631E drive cable ratings

mm2 AWG
Model
EVC1150B-J1-*14 25 25 25 25 3 3 3 3
EVC1185B-K1-*14 10 25 10 25 6 3 6 3
EVC1150B-K1-*14 6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8
EVC1150B-L1-*14 10 25 10 25 8 3 8 3
mm2 AWG
Model
EVC1150B-J1-*24 25 25 25 25 3 3 3 3
EVC1150B-K2-*24 6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8
EVC1150B-K1-*24 6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8
EVC1150B-L1-*24 10 25 10 25 8 3 8 3

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics

mm2 AWG
Model
EVC1185B-J1-*24 35 70 35 70 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0
EVC1185B-K2-*24 25 25 25 25 3 3 3 3
EVC1185B-K1-*24 25 25 25 25 3 3 3 3
EVC1185B-L1-*24 16 25 10 25 6 3 6 3
11.1.23 Protective ground cable ratings

Table 11-26 Protective ground cable ratings
Input phase
Minimum ground conductor size
conductor size
≤ 10 mm2 Either 10 mm2 or two conductors of the same cross-sectional area as the input phase conductor
> 10 mm2 and ≤ 16 mm 2 The same cross-sectional area as the input phase conductor
2 mm2 16 mm2
> 16 mm and ≤ 35
2 Half of the cross-sectional area of the input phase conductor
> 35 mm
11.1.24 Maximum motor cable length

The maximum motor cable length is 100 m.
Use 105 °C (221 °F) (UL 60/75 °C temp rise) PVC-insulated cable with copper conductors having a suitable voltage rating, for the following power
connections:
• AC supply to external EMC filter (when used)
• AC supply (or external EMC filter) to drive
• Drive to motor
The maximum cable length is reduced if high capacitance or reduced diameter motor cables are used. For further information, refer to section
4.4.2 High-capacitance / reduced diameter cables on page 50.
11.1.25 Torque settings

Table 11-27 Drive control and relay terminal data
Frame size Connection type Torque setting
All Plug-in terminal block 0.5 N m (0.4 lb ft)
Table 11-28 Drive power terminal data

AC and motor terminals DC and braking Ground terminal
Frame size
Recommended Maximum Recommended Maximum Recommended Maximum
Plug-in terminal block T20 Torx (M4) / M4 Nut (7 mm AF) M5 Nut (8 mm AF)
5
1.5 N m (1.1 lb ft) 1.8 N m (1.3 lb ft) 1.5 N m (1.1 Ib ft) 2.5 N m (1.8 Ib ft) 2.0 N m (1.4 Ib ft) 5.0 N m (3.7 Ib ft)
M6 Nut (10 mm AF) M6 Nut (10 mm AF) M6 Nut (10 mm AF)
6
6.0 N m(4.4 Ib ft) 8.0 N m(6.0 Ib ft) 6.0 N m(4.4 Ib ft) 8.0 N m(6.0 Ib ft) 6.0 N m(4.4 Ib ft) 8.0 N m(6.0 Ib ft)
M8 Nut (13 mm AF) M8 Nut (13 mm AF) M8 Nut (13 mm AF)
7
12 N m (8.8 Ib ft) 14 N m (10.0 Ib ft) 12 N m (8.8 Ib ft) 14 N m (10.0 Ib ft) 12 N m (8.8 Ib ft) 14 N m (10.0 Ib ft)
Table 11-29 Plug-in terminal block maximum cable sizes

Frame size Terminal block description Max cable size
11 way control connectors (terminals 1-11 and 21-31) 1.5 mm2 (16 AWG)
All
2 way relay connector (terminals 41 and 42) 2.5 mm2 (12 AWG)
3 way AC power connector (terminals U, V and W)
5
3 way motor connector (terminals L1, L2 and L3) 8 mm2 (8 AWG)
6
2 way external 24 V supply connector (terminals 51 and 52) 1.5 mm2 (16 AWG)
7

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
11.1.26 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

This is a summary of the EMC performance of the drive. For full details, refer to the EMC Data Sheet which can be obtained from the supplier of the drive.
Table 11-30 Immunity compliance
Standard Type of immunity Test specification Application Level

EN 61000-4-2 6 kV contact discharge
Electrostatic discharge Module enclosure Level 3 (industrial)
IEC 61000-4-2 8 kV air discharge
Prior to modulation:
10 V/m 80 - 1000 MHz
3 V/m 1.4 - 2.0 GHz
1 V/m 2.0 - 2.7 GHz
EN 61000-4-3 Radio frequency
80 % AM (1 kHz) modulation Module enclosure Level 3 (industrial)
IEC 61000-4-3 radiated field
Safe Torque Off (STO) tested to :
20V/m 80 - 1000 MHz
6V/m 1.4 - 2.0 GHz
3V/m 2.0 - 2.7 GHz
5/50 ns 2 kV transient at 5 kHz repetition Level 4 (industrial
Control lines
EN 61000-4-4 frequency via coupling clamp harsh)
Fast transient burst
IEC 61000-4-4 5/50 ns, 2 kV transient at 5 kHz repetition
Power lines Level 3 (industrial)
frequency by direct injection
Common mode 4 kV AC supply lines:
Level 4
1.2/50 s wave shape line to earth
IEC 61000-4-5 Surges AC supply lines:
Differential mode 2 kV Level 3
line to line
Common mode 1 kV Control lines *
EN 61000-4-6 Conducted radio 10 V prior to modulation Control and power
Level 3 (industrial)
IEC 61000-4-6 frequency 0.15 - 80 MHz, 80 % AM (1 kHz) modulation lines
Voltage dips, short
EN 61000-4-11
interruptions & All durations AC supply lines
IEC 61000-4-11
variations
EN 61000-4-8 Power frequency 1700 A/m RMS. 2400 A/m peak
Module enclosure Exceeds level 5
IEC 61000-4-8 magnetic field (2.1 mT RMS 3 mT peak) continuous at 50 Hz
EN 61000-6-1 Generic immunity standard for the residential, commercial and light -
Complies
IEC 61000-6-1 industrial environment
EN 61000-6-2
Generic immunity standard for the industrial environment Complies
IEC 61000-6-2
EN 61800-3 Product standard for adjustable speed power drive systems (immunity Meets immunity requirements for first and
IEC 61800-3 requirements) second environments
* Applies to ports where connections may exceed 30 m length. Special provisions may be required in some cases. See section Surge immunity of
control circuits - long cables and connections outside a building on page 57 for control ports for possible requirements regarding grounding and
external surge protection.
Emission
The drives incorporate an internal EMC filter. The internal filter is the most economic option for industrial installations, and is usually sufficient to
prevent the drive from causing interference to most good-quality industrial equipment. The User Guide gives instructions on how to remove and
replace the internal filter.
The drives are capable of meeting the conducted emissions requirements for Equipment Category C3 when used with the internal filter and a ferrite
ring.
An external EMC filter must be used if the drives are to be installed in domestic premises or connected to a supply network which also supplies
buildings used for domestic purposes.
When used with an external EMC filter, the drives will meet the conducted emission requirements for Equipment categories C1 and C2 under the
conditions specified in Table 11-31 to Table 11-35.
Table 11-31 Size 5 emission compliance (400 V drives)
Switching Frequency (kHz)

Motor cable length (m)
3 4 6
Using internal filter (no advantage to using ferrite ring)
0–4 C3 C4
0 – 10 C4
Using external filter:
0 – 20 C1 C2
20 – 100 C2 C3

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Table 11-32 Size 6 emission compliance (200 V drives) IEC 61800-3:2004 and EN 61800-3: 2004 + A1:2-2012
The EMC product standard for variable speed drives, EN/ IEC 61800-3
Switching Frequency (kHz) defines two environments:
3 4 6 • First Environment - This includes domestic premises, and
Using internal filter, no ferrite ring: establishments that share a low-voltage power supply network with
0–2 C3 C4 buildings used for domestic purposes. Examples include: houses,
Using internal filter and ferrite ring (1 turn – no advantage to 2 turns): apartment buildings, shops, commercial property and industrial
premises that share a supply with nearby residential property.
0–4 C3
• Second Environment - This includes all establishments other than
0 – 16 C3 C4 those directly connected to a low-voltage power supply network
Using external filter: which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes. Examples
0 – 20 C1 C2 include Factories, industrial plants and areas of any building
20 – 100 C2 C3 supplied by a dedicated transformer.
The EMC product standard for variable speed drives, EN/ IEC 61800-3
Table 11-33 Size 6 emission compliance (400 V drives)
defines four equipment categories:
Switching Frequency (kHz) • Equipment Category C1 - Equipment that is intended for use in the
3 4 6 First Environment.
Using internal filter, no ferrite ring: • Equipment Category C2 - Equipment that is neither a plug-in device
0–8 C3 C4 nor a movable device. This type of equipment may be used in the
First Environment if installed and commissioned by a professional
Using internal filter, 1 turn through ferrite ring
(i.e. person or organisation having the necessary skills to install and
0 – 16 C3 C4 commission power drive systems, including EMC requirements).
Using internal filter, 2 turns through ferrite ring • Equipment Category C3 - Equipment that is intended only for use in
0–8 C3 C4 the Second Environment. The equipment is not intended for use in
No advantage to using ferrite ring the First Environment.
• Equipment Category C4 - Equipment with rated voltage  1000 V or
Using external filter:
rated current equal  400 A or intended for use as part of a complex
0 – 20 C1 C2 system. This equipment is intended only for use in the Second
20 – 100 C2 C3 Environment.
In general, the drives are capable of meeting the requirements of
Table 11-34 Size 6 emission compliance (575 V drives) Equipment Category C3 without external filters or line reactors. They are
capable of meeting the requirements of Equipment Category C1 and C2
Switching Frequency (kHz) when installed with the recommended filters and line reactors.
3 4 6
NOTE
Using internal filter, no ferrite ring:
In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in
0–2 C4
which case supplementary mitigation measures may be required.
Using internal filter, 1 turn through ferrite ring (no advantage to 2 turns) Examples of common mitigation methods include additional filtering, a
0–5 C3 C4 dedicated supply transformer and use of screened cables.
0–2 C3 C4
Using external filter: 11.2 Optional external EMC filters
0 – 20 C1 C2 Table 11-36 Drive and EMC filter cross reference
20 – 100 C2 C3
Compressor model Drive model Part number
Table 11-35 Size 7 emission compliance (200 V drives) ZPV0631E-5E9 EVC1150B-J1-*14 TBC**
ZPV0631E-4E9 EVC1185B-K1-*14 TBC**
Switching Frequency (kHz)
Motor cable length (m) ZPV0631E-4E9 EVC1150B-K1-*14 TBC**
3 4 6
ZPV0631E-4E9 TBC**
EVC1150B-L1-*14
Using internal filter (no advantage to using ferrite ring) ZPV0662E-5E9 EVC1150B-J1-*24 TBC**
0 – 100 C4 ZPV0662E-4E9 EVC1150B-K2-*24 TBC**
Using external filter: ZPV0662E-7E9 EVC1150B-K1-*24 TBC**
0 – 20 C2 ZPV0662E-7E9 EVC1150B-L1-*24 TBC**
20 – 100 C2 C3 ZPV0962E-5E9 EVC1185B-J1-*24 TBC**
ZPV0962E-4E9 EVC1185B-K2-*24 TBC**
ZPV0962E-7E9 EVC1185B-K1-*24 TBC**
ZPV0962E-7E9 EVC1185B-L1-*24 TBC**
** Part numbers were not available at time of printing. Please contact
your Emerson Climate Technologies application engineer when ordering
parts.

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
11.2.1 EMC filter ratings

Table 11-37 Optional external EMC filter details
Maximum Power dissipation at Ground leakage
Voltage rating
continuous current rated current
Balanced supply Discharge
Part phase-to-phase
@ 40 °C @ 50 °C IP rating @ 40 °C @ 50 °C Worst case resistors
number IEC UL and
(104 °F) (122 °F) (104 °F) (122 °F)
phase-to-ground
A A V V W W mA mA M
TBC* 113 99.1 480 480 82 72 10 281
TBC* 40 36.8 528 600 47 40 18.7 197
TBC* 55 51 250 300 20 41 35 4.2 69 1.68
TBC* 63 58 528 600 54 46 11.2 183
TBC* 42 39 760 600 45 39 12 234
11.2.2 Overall EMC filter dimensions

Table 11-38 Optional external EMC filter dimensions
Dimension (mm)
Part Weight
H W D
number
mm inch mm inch mm inch kg lb
TBC* 270 10.63 90 3.54 205 8.07 6.9 15.2
TBC* 437 17.20 143 5.63 5.5 12.13
TBC* 434 17.09 210 8.27 6.5 14.30
60 2.36
TBC* 434 17.09 210 8.27 6.7 14.8
TBC* 434 17.09 210 8.27 7.0 15.40
11.2.3 EMC filter torque settings

Table 11-39 Optional external EMC Filter terminal data
Power connections Ground connections
Part Max cable size Max torque Max torque
number Ground stud size
2 AWG Nm Ib ft Nm Ib ft
mm
TBC* 50 1/0 8 6 M10 18 13.3
TBC* 16 6 1.8 1.4 M8 5 3.7
TBC* M6
TBC* 16 6 2.3 1.70 M8 5 3.7
TBC* M6

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
12 Diagnostics Figure 12-2 Location of the status LED
The keypad display on the drive gives various information about the
status of the drive. The keypad display provides information on the
following categories:
• Trip indications
• Alarm indications
• Status indications
Users must not attempt to repair a drive if it is faulty, nor

carry out fault diagnosis other than through the use of the
diagnostic features described in this chapter.
WARNING
If a drive is faulty, it must be returned to Emerson Climate
Technologies.
12.1 Status modes (Keypad and LED status)

Figure 12-1 Keypad status modes
1. Non flashing: Normal status
1 2. Flashing: Trip status
12.2 Trip indications

The output of the drive is disabled under any trip condition so that the
drive stops controlling the motor. If the motor is running when the trip
occurs it will coast to a stop.
During a trip condition, where a KI-Keypad is being used, the upper row
of the display indicates that a trip has occurred and the lower row of the
keypad display will display the trip string. Some trips have a sub-trip
number to provide additional information about the trip. If a trip has a
sub-trip number, the sub-trip number is flashed alternately with the trip
string unless there is space on the second row for both the trip string and
the sub-trip number in which case both the trip string and sub-trip
information is displayed separated by a decimal place.
The back-light of the KI-Keypad display will also flash during a trip
2 condition. If a display is not being used, the drive LED Status indicator will
flash with 0.5 s duty cycle if the drive has tripped. Refer to Figure 12-2.
Trips are listed alphabetically in Table 12-10 based on the trip indication
shown on the drive display. Alternatively, the drive status can be read in
Pr 10.001 'Drive OK' using communication protocols. The most recent
trip can be read in Pr 10.020 providing a trip number. It must be noted
that the hardware trips (HF01 to HF20) do not have trip numbers. The
trip number must be checked in Table 12-11 to identify the specific trip.
Example
1. Trip code 2 is read from Pr 10.020 via serial communications.
2. Checking Table 12-10 shows Trip 2 is an Over Volts trip.
Comms No. Trip Keypad

code display
2 Over Volts
3
3. Look up Over Volts in Table 12-10.

4. Perform checks detailed under Diagnosis.
1. Drive OK status
2. Trip status
3. Alarm status

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
12.3 Identifying a trip / trip source

Some trips only contain a trip string whereas some other trips have a trip
string along with a sub-trip number which provides the user with
additional information about the trip.
A trip can be generated from a control system or from a power system.
The sub-trip number associated with the trips listed in Table 12-1 is in
the form xxyzz and used to identify the source of the trip.
Table 12-1 Trips associated with xxyzz sub-trip number
Over Volts OHt dc bus
OI ac Phase Loss
Power Data Power Comms
PSU OI Snubber
OHt Inverter OHt Rectifier
OHt Power Temp Feedback
OHt Control
The digits xx are 00 for a trip generated by the control system. For a
single drive (not part of a multi-power module drive), if the trip is related
to the power system then xx will have a value of 01, when displayed the
leading zeros are suppressed.
The y digit is used to identify the location of a trip which is generated by
a rectifier module connected to a power module (if xx is non zero). For a
control system trip (xx is zero), the y digit, where relevant is defined for
each trip. If not relevant, the y digit will have a value of zero.
The zz digits give the reason for the trip and are defined in each trip
description.
Figure 12-3 Key to sub-trip number
x x y z z
00 - Generated by the control module
01 - Generated by the power module
0 - Always zero for a single drive
00
01
. - Reason for the trip
.
07
For example, if the drive has tripped and the lower line of the display
shows 'OHt Control.2’, with the help Table 12-2 the trip can be
interpreted as; an over temperature has been detected; the trip was
generated by fault in the control module, the control board thermistor 2
over temperature.
Table 12-2 Sub-trip identification
Source xx y zz Description
Control
00 0 01 Control board thermistor 1 over temperature
system
Control
system
Control
system

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
12.4 Compressor specific diagnostics

12.4.1 Definitions
Warnings - are indicators of tests/functions stages and are not logged or counted.
Alerts/alarms - are logged and counted towards trips or lockouts.
Trips - remove the motor supply, and are permanently logged and may auto-reset.
Lockouts - are triggered directly or after a number of trips or alerts. Lockouts remove the motor supply and are permanently logged. They have to be
reset by the user.
The keypad can be used to reset certain trips and lock out conditions (see detailed function descriptions).
Certain trips and lock out conditions, are resettable through the Fieldbus link using the System control word.
Table 12-3 Parameters involved in diagnostic functions
Parameter
Parameter Name Function area Description Units Range Default
number
00.003 {29.003} Condition alerts Diagnostics System related alerts. none 0 to 255 0
00.004 {29.004} Condition warnings Diagnostics System related warnings. none 0 to 255 0
Compressor specific Compressor related trip status. [Zero is no trip]
00.005 {29.002} Diagnostics none 0 to 255 0
trip Refer to Table 12-4, Table 12-5, and Table 12-6
Configuration control
00.006 {29.011} Diagnostics See table below for key. none 0 to 32767 0
parameter
00.007 {29.012} System control word Diagnostics See table below for key. none 0 to 32767 0
Last trip description; refer to Pr 29.005.
00.029 {10.020} Trip 0 Diagnostics none 0 to 255 0
Zero denoting no trip.
Running log of alerts
00.074 {29.006} Diagnostics User set 1 to 20. none 0 to 20 0
entry number
Running log alert ID
iidhh format.
00.075 {29.007} number and days and Diagnostics none 0 to 65535 0
Id is the ii, day is the d and hours are the hh.
hours
29.001 Total number of trips Diagnostics Counts the trips. User can reset to zero. none 0 to 10000 0
The numeration assigned to the current trip; see
29.005 Active trip number
Pr 00.029 {10.020} for trip description.
Table 12-4 Key to the trip values in Pr 00.005 {29.002}

Trip number
Pr 00.005 Fault Condition Code fault Description Code Reset Description
{29.002}
The drive has detected an input phase loss or Automatic reset after 60 s unless more than 5 in
32 Drive voltage imbalance
large supply imbalance. one hour
Setting a logic-high signal on terminal 29
Initiate a drive reset via terminal 25, keypad (red
41 User Trip provides a method for a drive-external source to
button), Modbus, or cycling drive power.
trip the drive and stop the compressor.
42 Discharge line temperature DLT temperature has been too high too often. Automatic reset below the trip level for 10 minutes
Out of master envelope condition even after Automatic reset after 10 minutes if the condition is
44 Out of envelope condition
envelope control. becomes within the envelope.
The communication watchdog timer (of up to 5
45 Fieldbus communication loss minutes) has detected the absence of Once communication is re-established
communications.
The drive is in the under voltage state (with a 10
46 Drive low input voltage fault Automatic reset [See function description]
second timeout).
Either turn off DLT protection via Pr 00.006 [bit9]
48 Missing DLT sensor Missing sensor detected for longer than 60 s.
= 0 or reconnect sensor.
After 5 minutes the trip is automatically reset.
Phase loss has been detected at the drive
98 Compressor missing a phase The system will lockout after 10 trips within 24
output at start-up.
hours.
NOTE
Trips will cause the drive to remove the motor supply, and are permanently logged and may auto-reset.

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Table 12-5 Key to lockout values in Pr 00.005 {29.002}
Lockout number
Fault Condition Code fault Description Code Reset Description
Pr 00.005 {29.002}
The instantaneous drive output current has exceeded Power-cycle or through the reset command
3 OI.Ac
the drive over current threshold. (MODBUS, keypad or digital input)
The otal user load of the drive has exceeded the Power-cycle or through the reset command
9 Internal 24 V PSU
internal 24 V power supply limit. (MODBUS, keypad or digital input)
One or more internal power supply rails are outside Power-cycle or through the reset command
5 Internal general PSU
limits or overloaded. (MODBUS, keypad or digital input)
A locked or lost rotor trip condition had been
40 Locked rotor detected Power-cycle
detected.
Soft-start did not The soft-start did not achieve the soft-start dwell Power-cycle or through the reset command
47
succeed speed after three attempts. (MODBUS, keypad or digital input)
VFD output missing a Phase loss has been detected at the drive output at Power-cycle or through the reset command
50
phase start-up. (MODBUS, keypad or digital input)
VFD input missing a Input phase loss has detected more than 5 trips in 1 Power-cycle or through the reset command
51
phase hour. (MODBUS, keypad or digital input)
NOTE
Lockouts are triggered directly or after a number of trips or alerts. Lockouts remove the motor supply and are permanently logged. They have to be
reset by the user.
Table 12-6 Key to the condition warning parameter 00.004 {29.004}

Warning
Number
Value Condition Condition Description
Pr 00.004
{29.004} Bit
A locked rotor condition has been detected and the drive is retrying or waiting
0 1 Locked rotor retrying
between retries.
1 Reserved Reserved for future functionality.
2 4 Stator heating active Current is being passed through the motor stator windings to provide heating.
The user speed reference is outside of the limits imposed by the systems
3 8 Envelope Override Active operating condition within the envelope and so the final compressor speed has
been limited.
The system is providing a defrost cycle. This bit will change to low when the
4 16 Defrost cycle active
defrost cycle is complete.
5 Reserved Reserved for future functionality.
6 64 Oil boost active The oil boost function is active.
Bits 7 to 15 Reserved Reserved for future functionality.
The condition warnings parameter should be viewed as a binary value where each bit within the value is associated with an individual condition
warning. The use of a single parameter provides fast access to the trip/status through a single parameter read transfer.

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Table 12-7 Key to the condition alerts parameter 00.003 {29.003}

Alert/alarm
Number
Value Condition Condition Description Further Actions
Pr 00.003
{29.003} Bit
Trip if more than 3 samples each
0 1 DLT OT Protection DLT temperature is too high.
taken at 60 s intervals
1 2 DLT sensor fault The DLT sensor is not within the expected range. Trip if error persists for more than 60 s
The last soft-start attempt did not achieve the soft-
2 4 Soft-start did not succeed Lockout after 3 consecutive alerts
start dwell speed.
3 8 Reserved
For dynamic speed demand: Speed error is greater
than 100 rpm [user set] for longer than 4 s.
4 16 Lost rotor Will fold back
For constant speed demand: Speed error is greater
than 50 rpm [user set] for longer than 4 s.
See section 6.2.11 Max-load and Low-Voltage fold
Drive will automatically reduce RPM
5 32 Foldback active back management on page 82. May affect the motor
as needed.
current overload limit.
Refer to Pr 00.005 {29.002} lockout
6 64 Short-cycle lockout active Prevents short-cycling by delaying the next start up.
number 47 in Table 12-5.
Will trip after 10 minutes if operation
7 128 Out of envelope The compressor is operating outside of the envelope
does not return to inside the envelope
Bits 8 to 15 Reserved Reserved for future functionality. Reserved
The condition alerts and warnings parameter should be viewed as a binary value where each bit within the value is associated with an individual
condition alert and warning. The use of a single parameter provides fast access to the trip/status through a single parameter read transfer.
12.4.2 Fault history/logging

The time stamp information corresponding with each drive trip and lockout is easily interpreted when using a real-time clock (RTC) keypad so that the
fault history is logged against an actual date. When a RTC keypad is not installed, the time stamp of the fault will start counting from zero and will be
referenced from when the drive was last powered up. The time stamp information is a snapshot of the following parameters which cannot be manually
adjusted without an RTC keypad installed:
• Date (Pr 06.016) – Without the use of a RTC keypad, the day will have an initial/minimum value of 0 and will roll over after 30 days; the months
will have an initial/minimum value of 0 and will roll over after 11 months. The Modbus value read from this parameter will be in the following
format:
Value = (day [1..31] x 10000) + (month [1..12] x 100) + year [0..99]
Example: The RTC date of Nov. 21, 2016 is read via Modbus as ‘211116’.
Example: The non-RTC date of being powered up for 3 days is read via Modbus as ‘30000’.
• Time (Pr 06.017) – The time will have an initial/minimum value of 0 and will roll over after 23h:59m:59s. The Modbus value read from this
parameter will be in the following format:
Value = (hour [0..23] x 10000) + (minute [0..59] x 100) + seconds [0..59]
Example: The RTC time of 7:21.42 PM will be read via Modbus as ‘192142’.
Example: The non-RTC time of being powered up for 6 hours, 36 minutes, and 15 seconds is read via Modbus as ‘63615’.
• Day Of Week (Pr 06.018) – Will always show 0 (Sunday) without the use of a RTC keypad.
The drive will store a rolling log of the last 10 trips and lockouts. The descriptions and time stamps will automatically remain stored in the drive even if
drive power is cycled.
• The most recent trip description, trip 0, is stored in Pr 10.020. Older trips are located sequentially with the oldest trip, trip 9, stored in Pr 10.029.
• The time stamp associated with the most recent trip, trip 0, is stored in Pr 10.041 (Trip 0 Date) and Pr 10.042 (Trip 0 Time). Older time stamps are
located sequentially with the oldest time stamp corresponding to trip 9 stored in Pr 10.059 (Trip 9 Date) and Pr 10.060 (Trip 9 Time).
Table 12-8 Drive specific permanent alert log

Parameter Parameter Name Function area Size
00.026 {29.054} Locked Rotor Failure start count Records number of failed starts due to Locked Rotor protection INT16
00.025 {29.047} DLT OT fault count Number of over temperature faults INT16
00.028 {29.040} Short cycle count Number of short cycles that have occurred INT16
Compressor missing a phase
29.010 Lockout after 10 “compressor missing a phase “ trips within 24 hours INT16
counter
00.027 {29.016} Number of soft-start attempts Number of failed soft start attempts that have occurred (a trip is generated on the 3rd INT16
failed attempt)
29.001 Total number of trips Counts the number of drive specific and drive trips. User can reset to zero. INT16
The "total number of trips" is saved automatically on power down. The user can reset this by writing zero to the parameter.

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
12.4.3 Status/alarm indicator

The purpose of this parameter is to provide a way to communicate the system status, warnings and alerts via the drive to a service technician.
1. The drive will send the status/alarm to the system controller. The system controller can decide how to handle the information from the system
side.
2. For drives sold with a Keypad, the status/alarm information with other information (such as compressor speed) is displayed on the LCD.
3. For drives sold without a Keypad, the LED can be used to indicate the system status (flashing LED indicates trip condition).
12.4.4 Running alert log

Table 12-9 Key to the running alert log Pr 00.075 {29.007}:
Alert ID
Condition Condition Description
number
1 DLT over temperature protection DLT temperature is too high
2 DLT sensor fault The DLT sensor is not within range.
3 Soft-start did not succeed The soft-start did not achieve the initial speed.
4 Reserved
Dynamic speed demand: Speed error is greater than 30 % [user set] for longer than 4 s.
5 Lost rotor
Constant speed demand: Speed error is greater than 20 % [user set] for longer than 4 s.
6 Foldback active See section description. May affect the motor current overload limit.
7 Short-cycle lockout active Prevents short-cycling by delaying the next start up
Alerts logged with a time stamp sampled on the activation of the alert.
• The time stamp is quantised to 1 hour.
• The data/time is in hours ago (and thus is updated every hour that passes).
• The log shows the last 20 alerts.
• An event is removed after 7 days.
Pr 00.074 {29.006} Running log of alerts entry number User set 1 to 20 INT16
iidhh format.
Pr 00.075 {29.007} Running log alert ID number and days and hours INT16
The alert ID is the ii, day is the d and hour is the hh.
The user sets the alert entry number (1 to 20) in Pr 00.074 and then reads the Alert ID information from Pr 00.075. The Pr 00.075 information is in the
following format: Alert ID number found in Table 12-9; days elapsed; hours elapsed.
Example, a DLT sensor fault (ID 2) that occurred 4 days and 12 hours ago would read 2412.
12.4.5 Drive input (supply) low voltage

The standard drive, has detection and trip functions for monitoring the input supply and the supply rails that the drive provides.
• The drive will ride through supply voltage dips given the level of stored energy.
• The drive cannot start with a spinning rotor, as this effects the missing phase detection on start up.

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
12.5 Trips, Sub-trip numbers

Table 12-10 Trip indications
Trip Diagnosis
An Input 1 Loss Analog input 1 current loss
An Input 1 Loss trip indicates that a current loss was detected in current mode on Analog input 1 (Terminal 5, 6). In 4-20 mA
and 20-4 mA modes loss of input is detected if the current falls below 3 mA.
Recommended actions:
28 • Check control wiring is correct
• Check control wiring is undamaged
• Check the Analog Input 1 Mode (07.007)
• Current signal is present and greater than 3 mA
An Input 2 Loss Analog input 2 current loss
An Input 2 Loss indicates that a current loss was detected in current mode on Analog input 2 (Terminal 7). In 4-20 mA and
20-4 mA modes loss of input is detected if the current falls below 3 mA.
• Check control wiring is correct
29 • Check control wiring is undamaged
• Check the Analog Input 2 Mode (07.011)
• Current signal is present and greater than 3 mA
An Output Calib Analog output calibration failed
The An output Calib trip indicates that one or both of the Analog outputs have failed during the zero offset calibration. The
failed output can be identified by the sub-trip number.
Sub-trip Reason
1 Output 1 failed (Terminal 9)
219 2 Output 2 failed (Terminal 10)
• Check the wiring associated with analog outputs
• Remove all the wiring that is connected to analog outputs and perform the calibration
• If trip persists replace the drive
Card Access NV Media Card Write fail
The Card Access trip indicates that the drive was unable to access the NV Media Card. If the trip occurs during the data
transfer to the card then the file being written may be corrupted. If the trip occurs when the data being transferred to the
drive then the data transfer may be incomplete. If a parameter file is transferred to the drive and this trip occurs during the
transfer, the parameters are not saved to non-volatile memory, and so the original parameters can be restored by powering
185 the drive down and up again.
• Check NV Media Card is installed / located correctly
• Replace the NV Media Card
Card Boot The Menu 0 parameter modification cannot be saved to the NV Media Card
Menu 0 changes are automatically saved on exiting edit mode.
The Card Boot trip will occur if a write to a Menu 0 parameter has been initiated via the keypad by exiting edit mode
and Pr 11.042 is set for auto or boot mode, but the necessary boot file has not been created on the NV Media Card to take
the new parameter value. This occurs when Pr 11.042 is changed to Auto (3) or Boot (4) mode, but the drive is not
177
subsequently reset.
• Ensure that Pr 11.042 is correctly set, and then reset the drive to create the necessary file on the NV Media Card
• Re-attempt the parameter write to the Menu 0 parameter
Card Busy NV Media Card cannot be accessed as it is being accessed by an option module
The Card Busy trip indicates that an attempt has been made to access a file on NV Media Card, but the NV Media Card is
already being accessed by an option module, such as one of the Applications modules. No data is transferred.
178
• Wait for the option module to finish accessing the NV Media Card and re-attempt the required function
Card Data Exists NV Media Card data location already contains data
The Card Data Exists trip indicates that an attempt has been made to store data on a NV Media Card in a data block which
already contains data.
179 Recommended actions:
• Erase the data in data location
• Write data to an alternative data location

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Trip Diagnosis
Card Compare NV Media Card file/data is different to the one in the drive
A compare has been carried out between a file on the NV Media Card, a Card Compare trip is initiated if the parameters on
the NV Media Card are different to the drive.
• Set Pr mm.000 to 0 and reset the trip
• Check to ensure the correct data block on the NV Media Card has been used for the compare
Card Drive Mode NV Media Card parameter set not compatible with current drive mode
The Card Drive Mode trip is produced during a compare if the drive mode in the data block on the NV Media Card is
different from the current drive mode. This trip is also produced if an attempt is made to transfer parameters from a NV
Media Card to the drive if the operating mode in the data block is outside the allowed range of operating modes.
• Ensure the destination drive supports the drive operating mode in the parameter file.
• Clear the value in Pr mm.000 and reset the drive
• Ensure destination drive operating mode is the same as the source parameter file
Card Error NV Media Card data structure error
The Card Error trip indicates that an attempt has been made to access a NV Media Card but an error has been detected in
the data structure on the card. Resetting the trip will cause the drive to erase and create the correct folder structure. The
cause of the trip can be identified by the sub-trip.
Sub-trip Reason
1 The required folder and file structure is not present
2 The HEADER.DAT file is corrupted
182
3 Two or more files in the GT8DATA\DRIVE folder have the same file identification number
• Erase all the data block and re-attempt the process
• Ensure the card is located correctly
• Replace the NV Media Card
Card Full NV Media Card full
The Card Full trip indicates that an attempt has been made to create a data block on a NV Media Card, but there is not
enough space left on the card.
• Delete a data block or the entire NV Media Card to create space
• Use a different NV Media Card
Card No Data NV Media Card data not found
The Card No Data trip indicates that an attempt has been made to access non-existent file or block on a NV Media Card.
• Ensure data block number is correct
Card Option NV Media Card trip; option modules installed are different between source drive and destination drive
The Card Option trip indicates that parameter data or default difference data is being transferred from a NV Media Card to
the drive, but the option module categories are different between source and destination drives. This trip does not stop the
data transfer, but is a warning that the data for the option modules that are different will be set to the default values and not
the values from the card. This trip also applies if a compare is attempted between the data block and the drive.
180
• Ensure the correct option modules are installed.
• Ensure the option modules are in the same option module slot as the parameter set stored.
• Press the red reset button to acknowledge that the parameters for one or more of the option modules installed will be at
their default values
• This trip can be suppressed by setting Pr mm.000 to 9666 and resetting the drive.
Card Product NV Media Card data blocks are not compatible with the drive derivative
The Card Product trip is initiated either at power-up or when the card is accessed, If Drive Derivative (11.028) is different
between the source and target drives. This trip can be reset and data can be transferred in either direction between the
drive and the card.
175
• Use a different NV Media Card
• This trip can be suppressed by setting Pr mm.000 to 9666 and resetting the drive

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Trip Diagnosis
Card Rating NV Media Card Trip; The voltage and / or current rating of the source and destination drives are different
The Card Rating trip indicates that parameter data is being transferred from a NV Media Card to the drive, but the current
and / or voltage ratings are different between source and destination drives. This trip also applies if a compare (using
Pr mm.000 set to 8yyy) is attempted between the data block on a NV Media Card and the drive. The Card Rating trip does
not stop the data transfer but is a warning that rating specific parameters with the RA attribute may not be transferred to the
186 destination drive.
• Reset the drive to clear the trip
• Ensure that the drive rating dependent parameters have transferred correctly
Card Read Only NV Media Card has the Read Only bit set
The Card Read Only trip indicates that an attempt has been made to modify a read-only NV Media Card or a read-only data
block. A NV Media Card is read-only if the read-only flag has been set.
• Clear the read only flag by setting Pr mm.000 to 9777 and reset the drive. This will clear the read-only flag for all data
blocks in the NV Media Card
Control Word Trip initiated from the Control Word (06.042)
The Control Word trip is initiated by setting bit 12 on the control word in Pr 06.042 when the control word is enabled
(Pr 06.043 = On).
35 • Check the value of Pr 06.042.
• Disable the control word in Control Word Enable (Pr 06.043)
Bit 12 of the control word set to a one causes the drive to trip on Control Word
When the control word is enabled, the trip can only be cleared by setting bit 12 to zero
Current Offset Current feedback offset error
The Current Offset trip indicates that the current offset is too larger to be trimmed.
225
• Ensure that there is no possibility of current flowing in the output phases of the drive when the drive is not enabled
• Hardware fault – Contact the supplier of the drive
Data Changing Drive parameters are being changed
A user action or a file system write is active that is changing the drive parameters and the drive has been commanded to
enable, i.e. Drive Active (10.002) = 1.
97 • Ensure the drive is not enabled when one of he following is being carried out
Loading defaults
Changing drive mode
Transferring data from NV Media Card or position feedback device
Transferring user programs
Destination Two or more parameters are writing to the same destination parameter
The Destination trip indicates that destination output parameters of two or more logic functions (Menus 3, 7, 8, 9, 12 or 14)
within the drive are writing to the same parameter.
199
• Set Pr mm.000 to ‘Destinations’ or 12001 and check all visible parameters in all menus for parameter write conflicts
Drive Size Power stage recognition: Unrecognized drive size
The Drive Size trip indicates that the control PCB has not recognized the drive size of the power circuit to which it is
connected.
224 Recommended action:
• Ensure the drive is programmed to the latest firmware version
• Hardware fault - return drive to supplier
Derivative Image Derivative Image error
The Derivative Image trip indicates that an error has been detected in the derivative image.
248 Recommended action:
Contact the supplier of the drive

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Trip Diagnosis
EEPROM Fail Default parameters have been loaded
The EEPROM Fail trip indicates that default parameters have been loaded. The exact cause/reason of the trip can be
identified from the sub-trip number.
Sub-trip Reason
1 The most significant digit of the internal parameter database version number has changed
The CRC's applied to the parameter data stored in internal non-volatile memory indicate that a valid set
2
of parameters cannot be loaded
The drive mode restored from internal non-volatile memory is outside the allowed range for the product
3
or the derivative image does not allow the previous drive mode
4 The drive derivative image has changed
31 5 The power stage hardware has changed
6 The internal I/O hardware has changed
7 The position feedback interface hardware has changed
8 The control board hardware has changed
9 The checksum on the non-parameter area of the EEPROM has failed
• Default the drive and perform a reset
• Allow sufficient time to perform a save before the supply to the drive is removed
• If the trip persists - return drive to supplier
HF01 Data processing error: CPU address error
The HF01 trip indicates that a CPU address error has occurred. This trip indicates that the control PCB on the drive has
failed.
HF02 Data processing error: DMAC address error
The HF02 trip indicates that a DMAC address error has occurred. This trip indicates that the control PCB on the drive has
failed.
HF03 Data processing error: Illegal instruction
The HF03 trip indicates that an illegal instruction has occurred. This trip indicates that the control PCB on the drive has failed.
HF04 Data processing error: Illegal slot instruction
The HF04 trip indicates that an illegal slot instruction has occurred.This trip indicates that the control PCB on the drive has
failed.
HF05 Data processing error: Undefined exception
The HF05 trip indicates that an undefined exception error has occurred. This trip indicates that the control PCB on the drive
has failed.
HF06 Data processing error: Reserved exception
The HF06 trip indicates that a reserved exception error has occurred. This trip indicates that the control PCB on the drive
has failed.
HF07 Data processing error: Watchdog failure
The HF07 trip indicates that a watchdog failure has occurred. This trip indicates that the control PCB on the drive has failed.

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Trip Diagnosis
HF08 Data processing error: CPU Interrupt crash
The HF08 trip indicates that a CPU interrupt crash has occurred. This trip indicates that the control PCB on the drive has
failed.
HF09 Data processing error: Free store overflow
The HF09 trip indicates that a free store overflow has occurred. This trip indicates that the control PCB on the drive has
failed.
HF10 Data processing error: Parameter routing system error
The HF10 trip indicates that a Parameter routing system error has occurred. This trip indicates that the control PCB on the
drive has failed.
HF11 Data processing error: Access to EEPROM failed
The HF11 trip indicates that access to the drive EEPROM has failed. This trip indicates that the control PCB on the drive
has failed.
HF12 Data processing error: Main program stack overflow
The HF12 trip indicates that the main program stack over flow has occurred. The stack can be identified by the sub-trip
number. This trip indicates that the control PCB on the drive has failed.
Sub-trip Stack
1 Freewheeling tasks
2 Clock tasks
3 Main system interrupts
HF13 Data processing error: Firmware incompatible with hardware
The HF13 trip indicates that the drive firmware is not compatible with the hardware. This trip indicates that the control PCB
on the drive has failed.
• Re-program the drive with the latest version of the drive firmware
HF14 Data processing error: CPU register bank error
The HF14 trip indicates that a CPU register bank error has occurred. This trip indicates that the control PCB on the drive
has failed.
HF15 Data processing error: CPU divide error
The HF15 trip indicates that a CPU divide error has occurred. This trip indicates that the control PCB on the drive has
failed.
HF16 Data processing error: RTOS error
The HF16 trip indicates that a RTOS error has occurred. This trip indicates that the control PCB on the drive has failed.
HF17 Data processing error: Clock supplied to the control board is out of specification
The HF17 trip indicates that the clock supplied to the control board logic is out of specification. This trip indicates that the
control PCB on the drive has failed.

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Trip Diagnosis
HF18 Data processing error: Internal flash memory has failed
The HF18 trip indicates that the internal flash memory has failed when writing option module parameter data. The reason
for the trip can be identified by the sub-trip number.
Sub-trip Reason
1 Option module initialization timed out
2 Programming error while writing menu in flash
3 Erase flash block containing setup menus failed
4 Erase flash block containing application menus failed
5 Incorrect setup menu CRC contained in flash
6 Incorrect application menu CRC contained in flash
7 Incorrect common application menu 18 CRC contained in flash
• Hardware fault - Contact the supplier of the drive.
HF19 Data processing error: CRC check on the firmware has failed
The HF19 trip indicates that the CRC check on the drive firmware has failed.
• Re-program the drive
• Hardware fault - Contact the supplier of the drive
HF20 Data processing error: ASIC is not compatible with the hardware
The HF20 trip indicates that the ASIC version is not compatible with the drive firmware. The ASIC version can be identified
from the sub-trip number.
• Hardware fault - Contact the supplier of the drive
I/O Overload Digital output overload
The I/O Overload trip indicates that the total current drawn from 24 V user supply or from the digital output has exceeded
the limit. A trip is initiated if one or more of the following conditions:
• Maximum output current from one digital output is 100 mA.
• The combined maximum output current from outputs 1 and 2 is 100 mA
26 • The combined maximum output current from output 3 and +24 V output is 100 mA
• Check total loads on digital outputs
• Check control wiring is correct
• Check output wiring is undamaged
OHt Control Control stage over temperature
This OHt Control trip indicates that a control stage over-temperature has been detected. From the sub-trip ‘xxyzz’, the
Thermistor location is identified by ‘zz’.
Control system 00 0 01 Control board thermistor 1 over temperature
Control system 00 0 02 Control board thermistor 2 over temperature
Control system 00 0 03 I/O board thermistor over temperature
23
• Check enclosure / drive fans are still functioning correctly
• Check enclosure ventilation paths
• Check enclosure door filters
• Increase ventilation
• Reduce the drive switching frequency
• Check ambient temperature

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Trip Diagnosis
OHt dc bus DC bus over temperature
The OHt dc bus trip indicates a DC bus component over temperature based on a software thermal model. The drive
includes a thermal protection system to protect the DC bus components within the drive. This includes the effects of the
output current and DC bus ripple. The estimated temperature is displayed as a percentage of the trip level in Pr 07.035. If
this parameter reaches 100 % then an OHt dc bus trip is initiated. The drive will attempt to stop the motor before tripping. If
the motor does not stop in 10 s the drive trips immediately.
Control system 00 2 00 DC bus thermal model gives trip with sub-trip 0
27
• Check the AC supply voltage balance and levels
• Check DC bus ripple level
• Reduce duty cycle
• Reduce motor load
• Check the output current stability. If unstable;
Check the motor map settings with motor nameplate (Pr 05.006, Pr 05.007, Pr 05.008, Pr 05.009, Pr 05.010,
Pr 05.011) – (All Modes)
Reduce speed loop gains (Pr 03.010, Pr 03.011, Pr 03.012)
Add a speed feedback filter value (Pr 03.042)
Add a current demand filter (Pr 04.012)
OHt Inverter Inverter over temperature based on thermal model
This trip indicates that an IGBT junction over-temperature has been detected based on a software thermal model.
Control system 00 1 00 Inverter thermal model gives {OHt Inverter} trip with sub-trip 0
21 • Reduce the selected drive switching frequency
• Ensure Auto-switching Frequency Change Disable (05.035) is set to Disabled (1)
• Decrease acceleration / deceleration rates
• Check DC bus ripple
• Ensure all three input phases are present and balanced
OHt Power Power stage over temperature
This trip indicates that a power stage over-temperature has been detected. From the sub-trip ‘xxyzz’, the Thermistor
location is identified by ‘zz’.
Power system 01 0 zz Thermistor location in the drive defined by zz
22 • Force the heatsink fans to run at maximum speed
• Reduce the drive switching frequency
• Check the derating tables and confirm the drive is correctly sized for the application.
• Use a drive with larger current / power rating

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Trip Diagnosis
OHt Rectifier Rectifier over temperature
The OHt Rectifier indicates that a rectifier over-temperature has been detected. The thermistor location can be identified
from the sub-trip number.
Power Power module Rectifier

zz Thermistor location defined by zz
system number number
Recommend actions:
102
• Check the motor and motor cable insulation with an insulation tester
• Fit an output line reactor or sinusoidal filter
• Force the heatsink fans to run at maximum speeds by setting Pr 06.045 = 11
OI ac Instantaneous output over current detected
The instantaneous drive output current has exceeded above VM_DRIVE_CURRENT_MAX.
Control Rectifier
00
system number
Instantaneous over-current trip when the measured a.c. current
00
Power exceeds VM_DRIVE_CURRENT[MAX].
Power
module 0
3 system
number
• Acceleration/deceleration rate is too short
• Check for short circuit on the output cabling
• Check integrity of the motor insulation using an insulation tester
• Check feedback device wiring
• Check feedback device mechanical coupling
• Check feedback signals are free from noise
• Is motor cable length within limits for the frame size
OI dc Power module over current detected from IGBT on state voltage monitoring
The OI dc trip indicates that the short circuit protection for the drive output stage has been activated.
109
• Disconnect the motor cable at the drive end and check the motor and cable insulation with an insulation tester
• Replace the drive
OI Snubber Snubber over-current detected
The OI Snubber trip indicates that an over-current condition has been detected in the rectifier snubber circuit. The reason
for the trip can be identified by the sub-trip number.
Power
Power Rectifier
module 00 Rectifier snubber over-current trip detected.
system number
number
92
• Ensure the internal EMC Filter is installed
• Ensure the motor cable length does not exceed the maximum for selected switching frequency
• Check for supply voltage imbalance
• Check for supply disturbance such as notching from a DC drive
• Check the motor and motor cable insulation with an insulation tester
• Fit an output line reactor or sinusoidal filter

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Trip Diagnosis
Out Phase Loss Output phase loss detected
The Out Phase Loss trip indicates that a phase loss has been detected at the drive output. If Output Phase Loss Detection
Enable (06.059) = 1 then output phase loss is detected as follows:
1. When the drive is enabled short pulses are applied to make sure each output phase is connected.
2. During running the output current is monitored and the output phase loss condition is detected if the current contains
98
more than TBD % negative phase sequence current for TBDs.
Recommended action:
• Check motor and drive connections
• To disable the trip set Output Phase Loss Detection Enable (06.059) = 0
Over Frequency Output frequency has exceeded the maximum frequency threshold
222 The Over Frequency trip indicates that the output frequency has exceeded 560 Hz for more than 4 ms.
Over Speed Motor speed has exceeded the over speed threshold
If the Speed Feedback Pr 00.011 {29.020} exceeds the Over Speed Threshold in Pr 03.008 an Over Speed trip is
produced. If Pr 03.008 is set to 0.0 the threshold is then equal to 1.2 x the value set in Pr 01.006.
For compressor applications, the Over Speed trip can occur if the rotor is locked and thus the speed estimator is not valid.
The trip is latched and requires a power-cycle to reset in order to conform to UL testing.
7 The above description relates to a standard over speed trip, however in RFC-S mode it is possible to produce an Over
Speed trip with sub-trip 1. This is caused if the speed is allowed to exceed the safe level in RFC-S mode with flux
weakening. See Enable High Speed Mode (05.022) for details.
• Reduce the Speed Controller Proportional Gain (03.010) to reduce the speed overshoot
Over Volts DC bus voltage has exceeded the peak level or maximum continuous level for 15 s
The Over Volts trip indicates that the DC bus voltage has exceeded the VM_DC_VOLTAGE[MAX] or
VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET[MAX] for 15 s. The trip threshold varies depending on voltage rating of the drive as shown below.
Voltage rating VM_DC_VOLTAGE[MAX] VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET[MAX]
200 415 410
400 830 815
575 990 970
690 1190 1175
Sub-trip Identification
Source xx y zz
2 Control 01: Instantaneous trip when the DC bus voltage exceeds
00 0
system VM_DC_VOLTAGE[MAX].
Control 02: Time delayed trip indicating that the DC bus voltage is above
00 0
system VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET[MAX].
Power Power module 00: Instantaneous trip when the DC bus voltage exceeds
0
system number VM_DC_VOLTAGE[MAX].
• Increase deceleration ramp (Pr 00.004)
• Check nominal AC supply level
• Check for supply disturbances which could cause the DC bus to rise
• Check motor insulation using a insulation tester

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Trip Diagnosis
Phase Loss Supply phase loss
The Phase Loss trip indicates that the drive has detected an input phase loss or large supply imbalance. The drive will
attempt to stop the motor before this trip is initiated. If the motor cannot be stopped in 10 s the trip occurs immediately. The
Phase Loss trip works by monitoring the ripple voltage on the DC bus of the drive, if the DC bus ripple exceeds the
threshold, the drive will trip on Phase Loss. Potential causes of the DC bus ripple are input phase loss, Large supply
impedance and severe output current instability.
Source xx y zz
00: Phase loss detected based on control system feedback. The drive
Control
00 0 attempts to stop the drive before tripping unless bit 2 of Action On Trip
system
Detection (10.037) is set to one.
Power
00: Phase loss has been detected by the rectifier module
system
Power module Rectifier
32 01: Mains loss has been detected by the rectifier module in a multi-power
Control number number
module system, where this must be treated as a phase loss condition to
system
prevent damage to the drive.
Input phase loss detection can be disabled when the drive is required to operate from the DC supply or from a single phase
supply in Input Phase Loss Detection Mode (06.047).
• Check the AC supply voltage balance and level at full load
• Check the DC bus ripple level with an isolated oscilloscope
• Check the output current stability
• Reduce the duty cycle
• Reduce the motor load
• Disable the phase loss detection, set Pr 06.047 to 2.
Phasing Error RFC-S mode phasing failure due to incorrect phase angle
For compressor applications, the phasing error trip can occur if the rotor is locked and thus the rotor cannot be
198 synchronized.
This trip is latched and requires a power-cycle to reset to conform to UL testing.
Power Comms Communication has been lost / errors detected between power, control and rectifier modules
The Power Comms trip is initiated if there is no communications between power, control or the rectifier module or if
excessive communication errors have been detected. The reason for the trip can be identified by the sub-trip number.
Source xx y zz
01: No communications between the control system and the power
system
00 0
90 Control 02: Excessive communication errors between the control system and
system power system
Power module Rectifier
00: Excessive communications errors detected by the rectifier module
number number

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Trip Diagnosis
Power Data Power system configuration data error
The Power Data trip indicates that there is an error in the configuration data stored in the power system.
Control
00 0 01 No data was obtained from the power board.
system
Control
00 0 02 There is no data table in node 1.
system
Control The power system data table is bigger than the space available in
00 0 03
system the control pod to store it.
Control
00 0 04 The size of the table given in the table is incorrect.
system
Control
00 0 05 Table CRC error.
220 system
Control The version number of the generator software that produced the
00 0 06
system table is too low.
Power
Power The power data table used internally by the power module has an
module 0 00
system error.
number
Power
Power The power data table that is uploaded to the control system on
module 0 01
system power up has an error.
number
Power
Power The power data table used internally by the power module does
module 0 02
system not match the hardware identification of the power module.
number
Power Down Save Power down save error
The Power Down Save trip indicates that an error has been detected in the power down save parameters saved in non-
volatile memory.
37
• Perform a 1001 save in Pr mm.000 to ensure that the trip doesn’t occur the next time the drive is powered up.
PSU Internal power supply fault
The PSU trip indicates that one or more internal power supply rails are outside limits or overloaded.
Control
00 0
system
Power 00 Internal power supply overload.
5 Power Rectifier
module
system number
number
• Remove any option modules and perform a reset
• Hardware fault within the drive – return the drive to the supplier
PSU 24V 24V internal power supply overload
The total user load of the drive and option modules has exceeded the internal 24 V power supply limit. The user load
consists of the drive digital outputs.
9
• Reduce the load and reset
• Provide an external 24 V power supply on control terminal 2
• Remove all option modules

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Trip Diagnosis
Reserved Reserved trips
These trip numbers are reserved trip numbers for future use. These trips should not be used by the user application
programs.
Trip Number Description
01
01 Reserved resettable trip
94 -95
103 – 108 94 -95 Reserved resettable trip
161 103 - 108 Reserved resettable trip
164 – 197 161 Reserved resettable trip
170 – 173
228 - 247 164 – 197 Reserved resettable trip
170 - 173 Reserved resettable trip
228 - 247 Reserved non-resettable trip
Slot4 Not Fitted Interface in slot 4 has been removed

The Slot4 Not Fitted trip indicates that the interface in slot 4 on the drive has been removed since the last power-up.
• Hardware fault - Contact the supplier of the drive.
Slot App Menu Application menu Customization conflict error
The Slot App Menu trip indicates that more than one option slot has requested to customize the application menus 18, 19
and 20. The sub-trip number indicates which option slot has been allowed to customize the menus.
• Ensure that only one of the Application modules is configured to customize the application menus 18, 19 and 20
SlotX Different Option module in option slot X has changed
The SlotX Different trip indicates that the option module in option slot X on the drive is a different type to that installed when
parameters were last saved on the drive. The reason for the trip can be identified by the sub-trip number.
Sub-trip Reason
1 No module was installed previously
2 A module with the same identifier is installed, but the set-up menu for this option slot has been
changed, and so default parameters have been loaded for this menu.
204 3 A module with the same identifier is installed, but the applications menu for this option slot has been
209 changed, and so default parameters have been loaded for this menu.
214 4 A module with the same identifier is installed, but the set-up and applications menu for this option slot
have been changed, and so default parameters have been loaded for these menus.
>99 Shows the identifier of the module previously installed.
• Turn off the power, ensure the correct option modules are installed in the correct option slots and re-apply the power.
• Confirm that the currently installed option module is correct, ensure option module parameters are set correctly and
perform a user save in Pr mm.000.
SlotX Error Option module in option slot X has detected a fault
The SlotX Error trip indicates that the option module in option slot X on the drive has detected an error. The reason for the
202 error can be identified by the sub-trip number.
207
212
• See relevant Option Module User Guide for details of the trip

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Trip Diagnosis
SlotX HF Option module X hardware fault
The SlotX HF trip indicates that the option module in option slot X on the drive has indicated a hardware fault. The possible
causes of the trip can be identified by the sub-trip number.
Sub-trip Reason
1 The module category cannot be identified
2 All the required customized menu table information has not been supplied or the tables supplied are corrupt
3 There is insufficient memory available to allocate the comms buffers for this module
4 The module has not indicated that it is running correctly during drive power-up
200 5 Module has been removed after power-up or it has stopped working
205
6 The module has not indicated that it has stopped accessing drive parameters during a drive mode change
210
7 The module has failed to acknowledge that a request has been made to reset the drive processor
8 The drive failed to correctly read the menu table from the module during drive power up
9 The drive failed to upload menu tables from the module and timed out (5 s)
• Ensure the option module is installed correctly
• Replace the option module
• Replace the drive
SlotX Not installed Option module in option slot X has been removed
The SlotX Not installed trip indicates that the option module in option slot X on the drive has been removed since the last
power up.
203
208
213 • Ensure the option module is installed correctly.
• Re-install the option module.
• To confirm that the removed option module is no longer required perform a save function in Pr mm.000.
SlotX Watchdog Option module watchdog function service error
The SlotX Watchdog trip indicates that the option module installed in Slot X has started the option watchdog function and
201 then failed to service the watchdog correctly.
206
211
• Replace the option module
Soft Start Soft start relay failed to close, soft start monitor failed
The Soft Start trip indicates that the soft start relay in the drive failed to close or the soft start monitoring circuit has failed.
Stored HF Hardware trip has occurred during last power down
The Stored HF trip indicates that a hardware trip (HF01 –HF17) has occurred and the drive has been power cycled. The
sub-trip number identifies the HF trip i.e. stored HF.17.
221
• Enter 1299 in Pr mm.000 and press reset to clear the trip

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Trip Diagnosis
Sub-array RAM RAM allocation error
The Sub-array RAM indicates that an option module, derivative image or user program image has requested more
parameter RAM than is allowed. The RAM allocation is checked in order of resulting sub-trip numbers, and so the failure
with the highest sub-trip number is given. The sub-trip is calculated as (parameter size) + (parameter type) + sub-array
number.
Parameter size Value Parameter type Value
1-bit 1000 Volatile 0
8-bit 2000 User save 100
16-bit 3000 Power-down save 200
32-bit 4000
64-bit 5000
227 Sub-array Menus Value

Applications menus 18-20 1
Derivative image 29 2
User program image 30 3
Option slot 1 set-up 15 4
Option slot 1 applications 25 5
Temp Feedback Internal thermistor has failed

The Temp Feedback trip indicates that an internal thermistor has failed. The thermistor location can be identified by the
sub-trip number.
Source xx y zz
218 Power system Power module number 0 Always zero

Power system Power module number Rectifier number Always zero
User Save User Save error / not completed
The User Save trip indicates that an error has been detected in the user save parameters saved in non-volatile memory.
For example, following a user save command, If the power to the drive was removed when the user parameters were being
saved.
36
• Perform a user save in Pr mm.000 to ensure that the trip doesn’t occur the next time the drive is powered up.
• Ensure that the drive has enough time to complete the save before removing the power to the drive.
User Trip User generated trip
These trips are not generated by the drive and are to be used by the user to trip the drive through an application program.
40 -89
112 -159
• Check the user program

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Table 12-11 Serial communications look up table

No Trip No Trip No Trip
1 Reserved 001 48 DLT Sensor Fault 195 Not used
2 Over Volts 50 Compressor Missing A Phase* 196 Not used
3 OI ac 51 Missing Input Phase* 197 Not used
4 Not used 52-89 User Trip 52 - 89 198 Phasing Error
5 PSU 90 Power Comms 199 Destination
6 Not used 91 Not used 200 Slot1 HF
7 Over Speed 92 OI Snubber 201 Slot1 Watchdog
8 Reserved 008 93 Not used 202 Slot1 Error
9 PSU24 94 - 95 Reserved 94 -95 203 Slot1 Not installed
10 Not used 96 Not used 204 Slot1 Different
11 Not used 97 Data Changing 205 Slot2 HF
12 Not used 98 Compressor Missing A Phase* 206 Slot2 Watchdog
13 Not used 99 Not used 207 Slot2 Error
14 Not used 100 Reset 208 Slot2 Not installed
16 Not used 102 OHt Rectifier 210 Slot3 HF
17 Not used 103 - 108 Reserved 103 - 108 211 Slot3 Watchdog
18 Not used 109 OI dc 212 Slot3 Error
19 Not used 110 Not used 213 Slot3 Not installed
21 OHt Inverter 112 - 167 User Trip 112 - 167 215 Not used
22 OHt Power 168 Not used 216 Slot App Menu
23 OHt Control 169 Not used 217 Not used
24 Not used 170 - 173 Reserved 170 - 173 218 Temp Feedback
25 Not used 174 Not used 219 An Output Calib
26 I/O Overload 175 Card Product 220 Power Data
27 OHt dc bus 176 Not used 221 Stored HF
28 An Input Loss 1 177 Card Boot 222 Over Frequency
29 An Input Loss 2 178 Card Busy 223 Not used
30 Not used 179 Card Data Exists 224 Drive Size
31 EEPROM Fail 180 Card Option 225 Current Offset
32 Drive voltage Imbalance Fault* 181 Card Read Only 226 Soft Start
33 Resistance 182 Card Error 227 Sub-array RAM
34 Not used 183 Card No Data 228 - 247 Reserved 228 - 247
35 Control Word 184 Card Full 248 Derivative Image
36 User Save 185 Card Access 249 Not used
37 Power Down Save 186 Card Rating 250 Slot4 HF
38 Not used 187 Card Drive Mode 251 Slot4 Watchdog
39 Not used 188 Card Compare 252 Slot4 Error
40 Locked Rotor Detected* 189 Not used 253 Slot4 Not installed
42 Discharge Line Temperature* 190 Not used 254 Slot4 Different
44 Out Of Envelope Condition* 191 Not used 255 Reset Logs
45 Fieldbus Communications* 192 Not used 251 Slot4 Watchdog
46 Drive Low Input Voltage Fault* 193 Not used
47 Soft-start Did Not Succeed* 194 Not used
* Compressor specific trips, for further information on these trips, refer to section 12.4 Compressor specific diagnostics on page 191.

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
Table 12-12 Key to temperature sub trips

Frame Size
Thermistor ID
5 6 7
1 Control board: ASIC and microprocessor
2 Control board: +15 V SMPS inductor
3 Factory fit IO option module
100 Inverter thermal model
200 DC Bus thermal model
1001 IGBT internal
1002 IGBT gate driver ambient under IGBT Power board microprocessor
1003 DC bus capacitor board
1004 Power board microprocessor Vdc measurement circuit HV SMPS switching transistor
1005 HV SMPS switching transistor HV SMPS switching transistor Vdc measurement circuit
1021 Rectifier thyristor
1022 24 V SMPS rectifier diodes
1023 24 V ELV supply filter capacitor
1101 Rectifier SMPS transformer
1102 Rectifier microprocessor
1103 Rectifier snubber protection circuit

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
The trips can be grouped into the following categories. It should be noted that a trip can only occur when the drive is not tripped or is already tripped
but with a trip with a lower priority number.
Table 12-13 Trip categories
Priority Category Trips Comments
These indicate internal problems and cannot be reset. All drive features
1 Internal faults HFxx are inactive after any of these trips occur. If an KI-Keypad is installed it will
show the trip, but the keypad will not function.
{Stored HF} This trip cannot be cleared unless 1299 is entered into Parameter
1 Stored HF trip
(mm.000) and a reset is initiated.
Trip numbers 218 to 247,

2 Non-resettable trips {Slot1 HF}, {Slot2 HF}, These trips cannot be reset.
{Slot3 HF} or {Slot4 HF}
This can only be reset if Parameter mm.000 is set to 1233 or 1244, or if

3 Volatile memory failure {EEPROM Fail}
Load Defaults (11.043) is set to a non-zero value.
Internal 24 V power
3 {PSU 24}
supply
Trip numbers 174, 175

4 NV Media Card trips These trips are priority 5 during power-up.
and 177 to 188
Trips with extended reset

5 {OI ac} and {OI dc} These trips cannot be reset until 10 s after the trip was initiated.
times
The drive will attempt to stop the motor before tripping if a {Phase Loss}.
Phase loss and d.c. link {Phase Loss} and 000 trip occurs unless this feature has been disabled (see Action On Trip
5
power circuit protection {Oht dc bus} Detection (10.037). The drive will always attempt to stop the motor before
tripping if an {Oht dc bus} occurs.
5 Standard trips All other trips
12.6 Internal / Hardware trips

Trips {HF01} to {HF20} are internal faults that do not have trip numbers. If one of these trips occurs, the main drive processor has detected an
irrecoverable error. All drive functions are stopped and the trip message will be displayed on the drive keypad. If a non permanent trip occurs this may
be reset by power cycling the drive. On power up after it has been power cycled the drive will trip on Stored HF. Enter 1299 in mm.000 to clear the
Stored HF trip.

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
12.7 Alarm indications Table 12-16 Option module and NV Media Card and other status
indications at power-up
In any mode, an alarm is an indication given on the display by alternating
the alarm string with the drive status string on the first row and showing First row
Second row string Status
the alarm symbol in the last character in the first row. If an action is not string
taken to eliminate any alarm except the drive may eventually trip. Alarms
Booting Parameters Parameters are being loaded
are not displayed when a parameter is being edited, but the user will still
see the alarm character on the upper row.
Drive parameters are being loaded from a NV Media Card
Table 12-14 Alarm indications
Alarm string Description Booting User Program User program being loaded
Regen inductor overload. Inductor Protection User program is being loaded from a NV Media Card to the drive
Accumulator (04.019) in the drive has reached
Ind Overload
75.0 % of the value at which the drive will trip and Option
Booting User program being loaded
the load on the drive is >100 %. Program
Drive over temperature. Percentage Of Drive User program is being loaded from a NV Media Card to the option
Drive Overload Thermal Trip Level (07.036) in the drive is greater module in slot X
than 90 %. Data being written to NV Media
Writing To NV Card
Limit switch active. Indicates that a limit switch is Card
Limit Switch
active and that is causing the motor to be stopped. Data is being written to a NV Media Card to ensure that its copy of the
drive parameters is correct because the drive is in Auto or Boot mode
12.8 Status indications Waiting For Power System Waiting for power stage
Table 12-15 Status indications The drive is waiting for the processor in the power stage to respond
after power-up. Verify that external 24V is connected to terminals 51 &
Drive
Upper row 52 on size 6 and 7 drives.
Description output
string
stage Waiting For Options Waiting for an option module
The drive is inhibited and cannot be run.
The Safe Torque Off signal is not applied to The drive is waiting for the options modules to respond after power-up
Inhibit Disabled
Safe Torque Off terminals or Pr 06.015 is
Uploading
set to 0 Options Loading parameter database
From
The drive is ready to run. The drive enable
At power-up it may be necessary to update the parameter database
Ready is active, but the drive inverter is not active Disabled
held by the drive because an option module has changed or because
because the final drive run is not active
an applications module has requested changes to the parameter
Stop The drive is stopped / holding zero speed. Enabled structure. This may involve data transfer between the drive an option
Run The drive is active and running Enabled modules. During this period ‘Uploading From Options’ is displayed
Supply Loss Supply loss condition has been detected Enabled
The motor is being decelerated to zero
Deceleration speed / frequency because the final drive Enabled 12.9 Displaying the trip history
run has been deactivated. The drive retains a log of the last ten trips that have occurred. Trip 0
The drive has tripped and no longer (10.020) to Trip 9 (10.029) store the most recent 10 trips that have
Trip controlling the motor. The trip code Disabled occurred where Trip 0 (10.020) is the most recent and Trip 9 (10.029) is
appears in the lower display the oldest. When a new trip occurs it is written to Trip 0 (10.020) and all
The regen unit is enabled and the other trips move down the log, with oldest being lost. The date and
Active Enabled time when each trip occurs are also stored in the date and time log, i.e.
synchronized to the supply
Under The drive is in the under voltage state Trip 0 Date (10.041) to Trip 9 Time (10.060). The date and time are taken
Disabled from Date (06.016) and Time (06.017). The date / time source can be
Voltage either in low voltage or high voltage mode
selected with Date / Time Selector (06.019). Some trips have sub-trip
Heat The motor pre-heat function is active Enabled
numbers which give more detail about the reason for the trip. If a trip has
a sub-trip number its value is stored in the sub-trip log, i.e. Trip 0 Sub-trip
Number (10.070) to Trip 9 Sub-trip Number (10.079). If the trip does not
have a sub-trip number then zero is stored in the sub-trip log.
If any parameter between Pr 10.020 and Pr 10.029 inclusive is read by
serial communication, then the trip number in Table 12-10 is the value
transmitted.
NOTE
The trip logs can be reset by writing a vale of 255 in Pr 10.038.

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
12.10 Behaviour of the drive when tripped

If the drive trips, the output of the drive is disabled so the load coasts to a
stop. If any trip occurs the following read only parameters are frozen until
the trip is cleared. This is to help in diagnose the cause of the trip.
Parameter Description
01.001 Frequency / speed reference
01.002 Pre-skip filter reference
01.003 Pre-ramp reference
02.001 Post-ramp reference
03.001 Final speed reference
03.002 Speed feedback (estimated)
03.003 Speed error
03.004 Speed controller output
04.001 Current magnitude
04.002 Active current
04.017 Reactive current
05.001 Output frequency
05.002 Output voltage
05.003 Power
05.005 DC bus voltage
07.001 Analog input 1
If the parameters are not required to be frozen then this can be disabled
by setting bit 4 of Pr 10.037.

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
13 UL listing information
13.1 UL file reference
All models are UL Recognised to both Canadian and US requirements. The UL file reference is: NMMS2/8.E171230.
Products that incorporate the Safe Torque Off (STO) function are Certified for Functional Safety. The UL file reference is: FSPC.E171230.
13.2 Option modules, kits and accessories

Option Modules, Control Pods, Installation Kits and other accessories for use with these drives are UL Listed.
13.3 Enclosure ratings

With the exception of free-standing cubicle drives, all models are Open Type as supplied.
The drive enclosure is not classified as a fire enclosure. A separate fire enclosure must be provided. A UL/ NEMA Type 12 enclosure is suitable.
When fitted with a conduit box the drives meet the requirements for UL Type 1. Type 1 enclosures are intended for indoor use, primarily to provide a
degree of protection against limited amounts of falling dirt.
The drives meet the requirements for UL Type 12 when installed inside a Type 12 enclosure and through-hole mounted using the sealing kit and the
high-IP insert (where provided).
When through-hole mounted, the drives have been evaluated as suitable for use in surrounding air temperatures up to 40 °C.
Remote Keypads are UL Type 12 when installed with the sealing washer and fixing kit provided.
When installed in a Type 1 or Type 12 enclosure, the drives may be operated in a compartment handling conditioned air.
13.4 Mounting
Drives may be surface, through-panel or tile mounted using the appropriate brackets. Drives may be mounted singly or side by side with suitable
space between them (bookcase mounting).
13.5 Environment
Drives must be installed in a Pollution Degree 2 environment or better (dry, non-conductive pollution only).
The drives have been evaluated for use at ambient temperatures up to 40 °C. The drives have additionally been evaluated for 50 °C and 55 °C
ambient air temperatures with a derated output.
13.6 Electrical installation

OVERVOLTAGE CATEGORY
OVC III
SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT RATING (SCCR)

The Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) of the drives is 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes at a maximum supply voltage of 600 Volts AC, when the
drive is protected by Listed branch fuses as detailed in section 4.3 Ratings on page 47.
SUPPLY
The drives are suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes, 600 Volts AC Maximum.
TERMINAL TORQUE
Terminals must be tightened to the rated torque as specified in the Installation Instructions.
WIRING TERMINALS
Drives must be installed using cables rated for 75 °C operation, copper wire only.
Where possible, UL Listed closed-loop connectors sized according to the field wiring shall be used for all field power wiring connections
GROUND CONNECTION INSTRUCTIONS

UL Listed closed-loop connectors sized according to the field wiring shall be used for grounding connections.
BRANCH CIRCUIT PROTECTION

The fuses and circuit breakers required for branch circuit protection are specified in the Installation Instructions.
OPENING OF BRANCH CIRCUIT

Opening of the branch-circuit protective device may be an indication that a fault has been interrupted. To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, the
equipment should be examined and replaced if damaged. If burnout of the current element of an overload relay occurs, the complete overload relay
must be replaced.
Integral solid state short circuit protection does not provide branch circuit protection. Branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with
the National Electrical Code (NEC), The Canadian Electrical Code, and any additional local codes.
13.7 External Class 2 supply

The external power supply used to power the 24 V control circuit shall be marked: "UL Class 2". The power supply voltage shall not exceed 24 Vdc.

Issue Number: 6
Diagnostics
13.8 Requirement for Transient Surge Suppression

This requirement only applies to Frame Size 7 drives with rated input voltage = 575 V.
TRANSIENT SURGE SUPPRESSION SHALL BE INSTALLED ON THE LINE SIDE OF THIS EQUIPMENT AND SHALL BE RATED 575 Vac
(PHASE TO GROUND), 575 Vac (PHASE TO PHASE), SUITABLE FOR OVERVOLTAGE CATEGORY III, AND SHALL PROVIDE PROTECTION
FOR A RATED IMPULSE VOLTAGE TO WITHSTAND VOLTAGE PEAK OF 6 kV AND A CLAMPING VOLTAGE OF MAXIMUM 2400 V.

Issue Number: 6
Appendix A
A.1 List of abbreviations
Table A-1 Abbreviations throughout the manual
Acronym Description
AC Alternating current
AE Application Engineering
DC Direct current
DLT Discharge line temperature
DOL Direct on line
EIA 232 Serial communication port
EIA 485 RJ485 Fieldbus communications port
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
HF Trip Hardware fault trip
I/O Input/output
IP Ingress protection
KI Keypad interface
MCB Miniature Circuit Breaker
NV Non-volatile (memory); Does not erase with loss of power.
PWM Pulse width modulation
RFC-S Reluctance flux control - sensorless
RO Read only
RTC Real time clock
RW Read/write
SI Systems integration
STO Safe Torque Off

Issue Number: 6
Index
Symbols E
+10V user output .....................................................................61 Electrical safety ...................................................................... 19
+24V external input .......................................................... 61, 64 Electrical terminals ................................................................. 37
+24V user output .....................................................................62 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) ....................... 19, 50, 186
EMC - Compliance with generic emission standards ............. 54
Numerics EMC filter dimensions (external, overall) .............................. 188
0V common .............................................................................61 EMC filter torque settings (external) ..................................... 188
EMC filters (optional external) .............................................. 187
A Emission ............................................................................... 186
AC supply contactor ................................................................49 EN61800-3:2004+A1 2012
AC supply requirements ..........................................................45 (standard for power drive systems) .................................. 54
Access .....................................................................................19 Enclosure ................................................................................ 30
Accuracy ...............................................................................182 Enclosure Layout .................................................................... 30
Acoustic noise .......................................................................182 Enclosure sizing ..................................................................... 30
Advanced menus ....................................................................69 Environmental protection ........................................................ 19
Advanced parameters .................................................. 110, 169
Air-flow in a ventilated enclosure .............................................31 F
Alarm .....................................................................................212 Feedback device cable shielding ............................................ 54
Alarm Indications ...................................................................212 Fire protection ......................................................................... 19
Altitude ..................................................................................181 Fuse ratings .......................................................................... 183
Analog input 2 .........................................................................62 Fuse types .............................................................................. 49
Analog output 1 .......................................................................62
Analog output 2 .......................................................................62 G
Getting Started ....................................................................... 66
B Ground connections ......................................................... 49, 53
Basic requirements .................................................................96 Ground leakage ...................................................................... 50
Ground terminals .................................................................... 37
C Grounding bracket .................................................................. 51
Cable clearances ....................................................................54
Cable lengths (maximum) .....................................................185 H
Cable size ratings ..................................................................183 Hazardous areas .................................................................... 19
Cable types and lengths ..........................................................49 Humidity ................................................................................ 181
Cautions ....................................................................................8
Control connections ....................................................... 58, 170 I
Control terminal specification ..................................................61 Input current ratings .............................................................. 183
Cooling ....................................................................................19 Input inductor calculation ........................................................ 47
Cooling method .....................................................................181 Internal EMC filter ................................................................... 52
Current ratings ......................................................................177 IP Rating (Ingress protection) ............................................... 181
Items supplied with the drive .................................................. 16
D
Destination parameter .............................................................59 K
Diagnostics ............................................................................189 Keypad and display - Installing / removing ............................. 24
Digital I/O 1 .............................................................................63 Keypad operation ................................................................... 66
Digital I/O 2 .............................................................................63
Digital I/O 3 .............................................................................63 L
Digital Input 1 ..........................................................................63 Line reactors ......................................................................... 180
Digital Input 2 ..........................................................................63
Digital Input 3 ..........................................................................63
Dimensions (overall) ..............................................................182
Display ....................................................................................66
Display messages ...................................................................69
Drive enable ............................................................................63

Issue Number: 6
M S
Mechanical Installation ............................................................19 Safe Torque Off .......................................................................64
Menu 0 ....................................................................................69 Safe Torque Off/drive enable ..................................................63
Menu 01 - Frequency / speed reference ...............................116 Safety Information .............................................................. 8, 19
Menu 02 - Ramps .................................................................120 Saving parameters ..................................................................70
Menu 03 - Speed feedback and Speed control .....................124 Sealed enclosure - sizing ........................................................30
Menu 05 - Motor control ........................................................ 130 Serial comms lead .......................................................... 58, 169
Menu 06 - Sequencer and clock ...........................................133 Serial communications connections ........................................57
Menu 07 - Analog I/O ............................................................135 Serial communications look-up table ....................................195
Menu 08 - Digital I/O .............................................................138 Serial communications port isolation .............................. 57, 169
Menu 10 - Status and trips ....................................................142 Solutions Module - Installing / removing .................................23
Menu 11 - General drive set-up ............................................144 Speed range ..........................................................................182
Menu 22 - Additional Menu 0 set-up .....................................147 Start up time ..........................................................................182
Menu 29 - Compressor specific functions .............................149 Starts per hour ......................................................................182
Menu structure ........................................................................ 68 Status ....................................................................................212
Menus 15, 16 and 17 Option module set-up ......................... 146 Status Indications ..................................................................212
Mode parameter ......................................................................59 Storage ..................................................................................181
Motor (running the motor) .......................................................96 Supply requirements .............................................................180
Motor cable - interruptions ......................................................56 Supply types ............................................................................46
Motor isolator / disconnector-switch ........................................56 Surge immunity of control circuits - long cables and
Motor requirements ...............................................................181 connections outside a building ..........................................57
Motor winding voltage .............................................................50 Surge suppression for analog and bipolar inputs and outputs 57
Surge suppression for digital and unipolar inputs and outputs 57
N
NEMA rating ........................................................... 32, 181, 182 T
Notes .........................................................................................8 Technical data .......................................................................177
NV media card operation ......................................................106 Temperature ..........................................................................181
Terminal block in the enclosure ..............................................56
O Terminal cover removal ...........................................................20
Operating mode (changing) ....................................................70 Terminal sizes .........................................................................37
Operating modes ....................................................................12 Through-panel mounting the drive ..........................................27
Option Module .......................................................................146 Torque settings .......................................................................38
Options ....................................................................................14 Trip ........................................................................................189
Output contactor .....................................................................50 Trip History ............................................................................212
Output frequency ..................................................................182 Trip Indications ......................................................................189
P U
Parameter access level ...........................................................70 UL Listing Information .................................................. 214, 216
Parameter ranges .................................................................111 User Security ...........................................................................71
Parameter security ..................................................................70
Planning the installation .......................................................... 19 V
Position feedback module category parameters ...................146 Ventilation ...............................................................................30
Power ratings ........................................................................177 Vibration ................................................................................182
Power terminals ......................................................................37
Precision reference Analog input 1 ......................................... 61 W
Product information ...................................................................9 Warnings ...................................................................................8
Weights .................................................................................183
Q
Quick start connections ...........................................................96
R
Ratings ......................................................................................9
Relay contacts ........................................................................ 63
Residual current device (RCD) ...............................................50
Resolution .............................................................................182
Routine maintenance ..............................................................39

Issue Number: 6
0478-0107-06

Evc Series Zpv066 Zpv096 User Guide en 3671334

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Evc Series Zpv066 Zpv096 User Guide en 3671334

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Evc Series Zpv066 Zpv096 User Guide en 3671334

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User Guide

Variable Speed Drive

Drive firmware version

Drive Software version

Part Number: 0478-0107-06

Copyright © August 2018

7 Running the motor

8 NV media card operation

3 Mechanical installation .......................19 7 Running the compressor ................... 96

4 Drive User Guide

11 Technical data ...................................177

13 UL listing information .......................214

Drive User Guide 5

Model Numbers - EVC Compressor Drives

6 Drive User Guide

Model Numbers - EVC Compressor Drives

TUV Rheinland Industrie Service GmbH EC type-examination certificate numbers:

DofC authorised by:

Drive User Guide 7

1 Safety information 1.4 Environmental limits

8 Drive User Guide

Drive User Guide 9

Figure 2-2 Modbus control mode

Start / Stop and Stator heating control

Condenser Pressure (Pc)

10 Drive User Guide

2.2 Drive model number

EVC 1 185 B K 1 XXX

Power output code****

Drive User Guide 11

Table 2-2 Drive ratings - ZPV0631E Compressors

Table 2-3 Drive ratings - ZPV0662E Compressors

Table 2-4 Drive ratings - ZPV0962E Compressors

2.4 Operating modes

2.5 Drive features

12 Drive User Guide

Figure 2-5 Features of the drive - Power (frame sizes 5 to 7)

2.6 Nameplate description

Model name Power Voltage Power output code

Approvals RoHS compliant Europe

Drive User Guide 13

14 Drive User Guide

LCD keypad option

Keypad LCD keypad option

LCD Remote keypad option

Drive User Guide 15

2.8 Items supplied with the drive

External 24 V power supply

Surface mounting brackets

Supply and motor connector

Finger guard grommets

16 Drive User Guide

2.8.1 Quick reference / Ordering part number list

Table 2-9 Through panel mounting kits

Table 2-10 Fans

Table 2-11 Grommet kits

Table 2-12 EMC filters

Drive User Guide 17

Table 2-13 Line reactors 2 %

Table 2-14 Line reactors for EN 61000-3-12